Home

Xerox WorkCentre C226 PSG

1. L a SL Successive transmission Destination BI _ recipient e e e e e e Successively enter The document is scanned destination numbers Into memory Destination Ci recipient a a ey a Pee J meee eee o Reception AN ee ee e _ Using Broadcast Transmission 1 Perform steps 1 through 5 of Basic Procedure for Sending Faxes page 5 19 2 Dial the fax number of the first destination or touch an auto dial key one touch key or group key Refer to page 5 22 If the condition settings screen appears touch the an ADDRESS DIRECTORY key to display the address J directory screen An auto dial key is highlighted when touched 5 30 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Using Broadcast Transmission 3 Touch the NEXT ADDRESS key and then dial the fax number of the next destination or touch an auto dial key Mm Repeat this step for each of the remaining destinations Condition Settings Sub Address f NOTES Ifyou enter an incorrect number If you make a mistake while entering a number press the C key and then re enter the correct digit s If you have already completed entry of a fax number you can delete the number using steps 4 and 5 e Ifyou select an incorrect auto dial key Simply touch the incorrect key one more time to cancel the selection e The NEXT ADDRESS key only needs to be touched
2. Gently remove the misfed paper as shown in the illustra tion taking care not to tear the paper Fusing area 1 Open the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit x i Grasp the finger hold and gently open the unit DN 7 lt y lof N 2 Remove the misfed paper as shown in the illustrations below _ If paper is misfed in the transport area turn roller rotat ing knob A in the direction of the arrow to remove the misfed paper 1 50 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Misfeed Removal CAUTION The fusing unit is hot Take care in removing paper Do not touch any metal parts If you do not find a misfeed open the cover of the fusing unit and check for a misfeed inside the fusing unit CAUTION The fusing unit is hot Take care in removing paper Do not touch any metal parts 3 Misfeed in the transfer unit If paper is misfed on the transfer belt remove it gently without touching the transfer belt Do not pull out the transfer unit CAUTION The transfer unit is hot Take care in removing paper Do not touch any metal parts 4 Gently close the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit After closing confirm that the misfeed message has been cleared and the normal display appears If the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit is not installed close the side cover in the same way Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 51 General Information 1 52 Misfeed in
3. In this case enter your 5 digit account number as explained on page 1 20 to gain access to the copier functions Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 19 General Information 7 Enter your account number 5 digits with the numeric keys As you enter your account number the hyphens change to asterisks If you enter an incorrect digit N 6 press the key and re enter the correct digit BAG Fe ol When a correct account number is entered the following message will appear Account Status Copies Made Remaining B W S Colour F Colour This does not appear if the account counter has only been set for colour copy mode If a limit has been set by key operator program for the number of copies that can be made by the account the remaining number that can be made is displayed This message appears for several seconds and then changes to the following message Ready To Copy NOTE f Account number security is turned on in the key operator programs the following message will appear in the event that an incorrect account number is entered three times in a row A Please See Your Key Operator For Assistance While this message appears for about one minute no other operations can be performed 8 Follow the appropriate steps to perform the copy job When copying is begun the following message will appear Ready To Copy Press Acc When Finished In the case of int
4. MENU WorkCentre C226 System Information Image Send Management e Destination O Setup o Custom Directory Device Setup e Information e Passwords e Log o Status Message o Alerts Message Network Setup e Network Card e Services e LDAP Help XEROX Network Scanning Setup Custom Directory Enable Scanner Delivery to Scan to E mail Scan to FTP amp Scan to Desktop Advanced Setup O Enable User Authentication User Authentication Server Select the items used for authentication Login Name Password E mail Address Login Name Password File Naming Sender Name O Session Page Counter Date amp Time O Unique Identifier E mail Subject Scanned image from WorkCentre C226 Network Scanning Setup screen ENADE scanner Gellvery Methors ENADE Scanner Heuvery tO 7 Select the scanner delivery methods that you want to use In the Enable Scanner Delivery to field click the checkbox next to each method that you want to use so that a checkmark appears in the checkbox Scan to E mail and Scan to FTP are both initially selected Enabling user authentication Advanced Setup Select the authentication server and items used for authentication In the screen that appears after you click LDAP in the menu frame the authentication server is selected from the servers that have been stored in the Global Address Books List 4 6 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Basi
5. Paper Size 210 x 297 mm Paper Source A4 Auto Select m Custom Paper Type Auto Seet Fit To Paper Size Fit To Page Tray Status Print AA on a4 ns Output 5 Center Tray v Image Orientation Portrait Different Pa g e per C Landscape Rotate 180 degrees Transparency Inserts B 7 Paper Selection Select the paper tray and paper type in this item Paper Source Select the paper tray When Auto Select is selected the tray containing the paper specified in Paper Size and Paper Type is automatically used If a setting other than Auto Select is selected paper will be drawn from the selected source regardless of the Paper Size and Paper Type settings Default setting Auto Select Paper Type Set the paper type It is also necessary to set the paper type at the operation panel on the machine Default setting Auto Select Tray Status Click this button to display the paper size paper type and paper remaining in the machine s paper trays This function operates when the Xerox Print Status Monitor is running in the user s PC and the printer is used on a network 6 Output This sets the exit tray for the printed output This cannot be selected when the staple function is turned on Default setting Center Tray Different Paper This sets the paper tray from which the paper for the first page is drawn Click this button to open the
6. 3 If there was no misfed paper in step 2 pull roller rotating knob B on the punch unit towards you and rotate it Only when an optional punch unit is installed Rotating roller rotating knob B releases the caught paper Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 67 General Information 5 Remove the misfed paper Remove the paper gently taking care not to tear it 7 Remove the misfed paper from the stapler compiler Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal 9 Remove the misfed paper Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal 1 68 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Saddle Stitch Finisher 10 Open the front cover 12 Remove any misfed paper from the saddle stitch tray Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 69 General Information 15 Push the Saddle Stitch Finisher back against the main unit Troubleshooting Saddle Stitch Finisher problems Check the list below before calling for service Stapling position is not correct includ Stapling position not set properly ing saddle stitch The Saddle Stitch Are any Saddle Stitch Finisher covers Close all covers See pages 1 68 and 1 Finisher does not open 69 operate Message indicating need to remove Remove all remaining paper from the paper from the stapler compiler dis stapler compi
7. 3 Touch the key of the job to which you wish to give priority The touched key is highlighted 4 Touch the PRIORITY key The selected job moves up to the next position after the job currently being executed When the current job is completed execution begins of the job selected in step 3 NOTE fthe job in progress is a broadcast transmission job see page 5 30 or a serial polling Job see page 5 35 the priority job will temporarily interrupt the job after the transmission currently in progress is finished When the priority job is finished the broadcast transmission or serial polling job will resume However if the priority job is also a broadcast transmission or serial polling operation the job is begun after all transmissions of the current broadcast or serial polling job are completed 5 26 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Cancelling a Fax Transmission Cancelling a Fax Transmission 1 Press the JOB STATUS key 3 Touch the key of the job that you wish to cancel from among the stored fax jobs or the fax job in progress The touched key is highlighted 4 Touch the STOP DELETE key A message appears to confirm the cancellation Touch the YES key to delete the selected job key and cancel the transmission Stop Delete NOTES f you do not wish to cancel the transmission touch the NO key e CANCEL will appear in the Transaction Report of a job that is cancelled Cancelling On Hook
8. P All Text to Black Color Adjustment 4 Click the Color tab and select Automatic for the Color Mode setting Select the Original Type setting that most closely matches your document to obtain the best image quality page 3 35 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting the Printer Drivers 5 If you need to adjust the colour image quality and or the black and white image quality print contrast perform the following step If you do not need to adjust the image quality go directly to step 6 To adjust the colour image quality and or black and white image quality print contrast click the Color Adjustment button The following screen will appear Use the Color Balance field to adjust the saturation of colour images and strengthen or weaken the RGB red green and blue colour components Use the Image field to adjust the brightness and contrast of both colour and black and white images page 3 38 When finished go to step 6 6 Click the Paper tab Make sure that the paper size is correct Next configure the Paper Selection settings Auto Select is normally used for both Paper Source and Paper Type When you have completed the settings click the OK button to close the printer properties window NOTE Using the Bypass Tray When the paper source is set to the Bypass Tray be sure to set the paper size and paper type on the machine s operation panel This procedure is explained on
9. i Paper tray type Applicable paper types Applicable paper sizes Same as paper types and sizes in row A Paper size ASW 12 x 18 and A6R can also be used in the Bypass Tray Special Heavy Heavy A6R A3W 5 1 2 x8 1 2 paper Refer paper paper 1 12 x18 Special paper to page 1 32 weight 106 to 200 g m2 for applica 28 to 54 Ibs Postcard Bypass ble special 3 See More Bypass Tray Tray papers Heavy AOR Aayi 5 1 2 x8 1 2 information on paper 2 12 x18 Special paper special media weight 201 to 300 g m2 that can be 54 to 80 Ibs used on Transparency film Transparency film page 1 32 Envelopes Standard size envelopes that can be used COM10 Monarch DL C5 Stand 1 Tray Unit Same as paper types and sizes in row A 3 Tray Unit Middle Tray 3 epee muoie Duplex Module pp p See page 1 30 for paper sizes and weights that can be used Module 2 Tray Unit Same as paper types and sizes in row A See the speci fications in High Capacity Feeder on Same as paper types in row A A4 8 1 2 x11 page 1 74 and More information on High Capacity Feeder plain paper on page 1 32 1 When the Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit is installed 2 When the 3 Tray Unit is installed Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 31 General Information More information on plain paper The following restrictions apply to plain paper Be sure to load the paper correctly Incorrect loading may
10. 0 0 cee ees 4 67 Maximum size of e mail attachments 2 00000 ee 4 68 Scanner mode timeout after last scan 0 0 00 0 eee 4 68 Default exposure settings 0 eee eee 4 68 Disable of address direct entry 2 0 00 cece ee ees 4 69 SPeCCIICANON Sea tsar daa a caer ace eee siete aeons 4 70 Scanning Margins aissar ae Baie les ln eee ee See a eta ae PY 4 71 5 Fax Unit To Use this Product Correctly as a Fax Device nanna naana 5 1 Important Safety Information 0 0 0 0 0 eee 5 2 Before Using the FAX Feature 0000 cee e eae 5 3 Points to Check and Program After Installation n n anaana 5 3 Connecting an Extension Phone aasan eens 5 4 A Look at the Operation Panel 0 0 0 eee ees 5 5 Fax Mode Condition Settings Screen a an aana aaa aaa 5 6 Originals that Gan Be Faxed ocx oikuvurcana daw evn oud tw oe wade ees 5 10 Load a DOCUMEN sivas Oca e eb es etka Ose eee wh as eae 5 11 WSING Ine DADE rraga aS ek wun E a a d ee OE a a0 5 11 Using the Document Glass 0 0 5 11 Checking the Size of a Loaded Original 0 0 00 cece eee 5 12 Manually Setting the Scanning SIZe 6 ee 5 13 selecting Resolution and Exposure SettingS 0 0 00 cee eee 5 14 Selecting the Resolution 0 0 0 ce eee 5 14 Selecting the EXPOSUS so 42 05 tte meet OEP OL ee et ee 5 16 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide xi Convenien
11. 2 46 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Special Modes Covers The COVERS mode is used to place covers on the front back or both the front and back of multipage documents This function can only be used when the originals are placed in the DADF tray of the DADF The document glass cannot be used Copying onto a cover One sided copies from one sided or two sided originals One sided originals One sided copies copying onto a cover Back cover no copying Front cover can copy onto front side Back cover no copying Front cover can copy onto front side Two sided copies from one sided or two sided originals One sided originals Two sided copies copying onto a cover Back cover no copying Cover original iY Two sided originals N A Front cover N can copy onto front side A Back side of cover is blank Cover original Selections for front cover back cover or front and back cover can be made Back cover sheets cannot be copied on either on the front side or on the back side Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 47 Copier Operation Not copying onto a cover One sided copies from one sided or two sided originals One sided originals One sided copies not copying onto a cover 4 gt Back cover Front cover not copying onto a cover 4 3 Two sided originals S Two sided copies from one sided or two sided originals One sided origina
12. 3 SENDER LIST Touch this key to select the sender when sending an image page 4 24 key 4 ADDRESS When performing Scan to E mail broadcast transmission touch this key to check your REVIEW key selected destinations Your selected destinations will appear as a list and the list can be edited page 4 30 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 19 Network Scanner Operation key E MAIL ADDRESS key 7 Two sided scanning icon display ORIGINAL key FILE FORMAT key RESOLUTION key a EXPOSURE key 4 20 When the optional Fax Unit is installed touch this key to switch between scanner mode and fax mode When performing Scan to E mail touch this key if you wish to enter the e mail address of the recipient manually instead of using an one touch key page 4 28 Icons appear here when you touch the ORIGINAL key and select two sided scan ning The icons can be touched to open function selection screens page 4 32 Touch this key when you wish to manually set the size of the original to be scanned or scan both sides of the original page 4 32 Touch this key to set the file format of scan images that you transmit The selected file format setting will be highlighted above the key The initial factory setting is PRO GRAMMED page 4 39 Touch this key to change the resolution setting for the original to be scanned The selected resolution setting will be highlighted above the key The initial
13. i The selected tray will be highlighted or the message EAM OAD xxxxxx PAPER will appear If the message appears load paper in a paper tray with paper of the Note The following requirements must be satisfied Originals of a standard size A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R or Ad 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 are set and the auto paper select function is enabled If originals of a size other than the sizes above are to be copied manually select the desired paper size by touch ing the More key in the Paper Select display and then touching the desired paper size selection key The selected key will be highlighted and the paper selection screen will close To close the paper selection screen without making a selection touch the OK key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Normal Copying 4 Select the desired output mode See page 2 18 aaa ukol When a document is detected on the document glass the Sided a lated group mode will be automatically selected To select sort copy touch the More key in the Output display then touch the SORT key on the displayed screen and then touch the OK key NOTE fthe SORT or GROUP key is touched its corresponding icon is highlighted To clear the icon display press the CLEAR ALL key Note that all selections made to that point will be cancelled 5 Use the numeric keys to set the desired number of copies
14. 4 Touch the outer OK key You will return to the initial screen Touching the inner OK key in the step above returns you to step 2 84X11 Original Selecting Resolution and Exposure Settings After loading an original you can adjust the resolution and exposure settings to match the condition of the original for example if it has small or faint characters or if itis a photo After loading the original in fax mode adjust the settings as explained below Selecting the Resolution The initial resolution setting is STANDARD To change the setting follow these steps Change the resolution 1 Touch the RESOLUTION key Standard Resolution N aia Bit IL E ih Linn aay tt br AET h jo ei T Original 2 Touch the STANDARD key FINE key SUPER FINE key or ULTRA FINE key The selected key is highlighted If you touched the FINE key SUPER FINE key or ULTRA FINE key you can also select halftone by touching the HALF TONE key Ultra Fine 5 14 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Resolution and Exposure Settings 3 Touch the OK key You will return to the initial screen NOTES The factory default setting for the initial resolution is STANDARD The initial resolution can be changed to a different setting in the key operator programs e When using the DADF the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun e When a fax is se
15. The search results appear as destination keys If matching addresses are not found a message indicating the result is displayed In this case touch the OK key and touch the SEARCH AGAIN key to return to step 4 6 Touch the desired destination key To display the remaining destinations touch the key tanaka For detailed information on the selected destination touch the DETAIL key You can also register the desti nation to the address book by touching the REGISTER key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 31 Network Scanner Operation 7 Select the destination type Normally touch the TO key However if you are per ae forming a broadcast transmission and wish to CC or BCC the document to the entered address touch the CC or BCC key 8 If you wish to enter another address repeat steps 6 and 7 For Scan to FTP multiple destinations cannot be specified 9 Touch the CONDITION SETTINGS key You will return to the condition setting screen Scanning and Transmitting a Two sided Original A two sided original can be automatically scanned and transmitted using the DADF Follow the steps below 1 Make sure the machine is in scanner mode and then load the document in the DADF 2 Touch the ORIGINAL key m gA When you touch the ORIGINAL key check the original E E oe i gt o j size displayed in the key 3 Touch the 2 SIDED BOOKLET key or the 2 SIDED TAB
16. Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Cancel 3 7 Printer Operation NOTE NOTE 3 Print window in Windows XP Ss General Select Printer a Add Printer MW v Status Page A All Pages Enter either a single page number or a single page range For example 5 12 Ready Location Comment ange Curent Page 1 65535 7 Print to file Number of copies i E o le GHG In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 click the Properties button In Windows 2000 click the displayed tab In Windows XP Server 2003 click the Preferences button For detailed explanations of the following settings see Setting the Printer Driver Properties on page 3 15 Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color iy Document Style Copies r User Settings 1 IV Collate 1 Sided g 2Z Sided Book 2Sided Tablet Pamphlet Style Factory Defaults Saye r Finishing Binding Edge Left Staple N one Y F Punch I No Offset Tied Pamphlet E N Up Printing i Up x mils order Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color Original Type Gy Use this setting for images containing combinations of text photos graphs etc Custom Job Control I Auto Job Control review Color Mode Automatic Print Priority Speed z
17. RACAL MENU XEROX WorkCentre C226 System Information Machine Information Image Send Management x pestination Unit Serial Number 4500527900 R o Somat N Not Set Store destinations and SLETE Model e Ho Cantes C226 configure settings for the o Desktop Current Status Ready to print o Group Machine Location Not Set network scanner function eens Network Scanning Update Status U o Setup o Custom Directory Device Setup i e Information Configure settings for eae management of the Log machine o Status Message o Alerts Message Network Setup e Network Card Configure network e Services settings LDAP Heip a Saisie System Information Image Send Management Destination This is the home page for storing editing and deleting destinations for images scanned with the network scanner A total of 500 destinations including all types can be stored A total of 100 file server and desktop destinations can be stored E mail Sets the destination information for E mail delivery from the network scanner Destination E mail addresses and file types as well as information for destination control destination name index name for front panel display etc are configured by this control FTP Sets the storage location information for file server storage of network scan data File server information such as host name and file types as well as information for
18. Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow See pages 2 21 through 2 24 press the COLOUR COPY START key to begin copy ing To cancel the INTENSITY function select the INTENSITY function again and touch the CANCEL key step 2 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Image Edit Menu Image Edit Menu Special Modes Special Modes SINGLE COLOUR MIRROR IMAGE 3 PHOTO REPEAT MULTI SHOT A3 FULL BLEED Margin Shift l o ia Centring To use the following convenient copy functions touch the IMAGE EDIT key in SPE CIAL MODES 1 Touch the key to switch to the second SPECIAL MODES screen 2 Touch the IMAGE EDIT key in the second SPECIAL MODES screen Image Edit Single Colour an A3 Multi Page P hlet C ruli Blesd Enlargement f ARAE eee Produces copies with a selected single colour page 2 60 A mirror image of the original is printed page 2 61 Produces repeated images of a photo on a single sheet of copy paper page 2 62 The multi shot function is used to copy up to four originals collectively in a specified order per sheet of copy paper in any one of four layout patterns page 2 64 Produces A3 11 x 17 full image copies onto A3W 12 x 18 copy paper page 2 66 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 59 Copier Operation MULTI PAGE Enlarges an original image to a size larger
19. This section explains the procedures for storing editing and deleting auto dial keys one touch keys and group keys and programs which simplify the transmission pro cedure The procedure for using one touch keys and group keys is explained in Transmission by Auto Dialing One Touch Dialing and Group Dialing on page 5 22 and the procedure for using programs is explained in Using a Program on page 5 45 A combined total of 500 one touch keys and group keys can be stored and eight pro grams can be stored If you attempt to store more than this a warning message will appear In this case delete any auto dial keys or programs that are no longer needed one touch keys page 5 72 group keys page 5 76 programs page 5 80 and then store the new auto dial key or program To cancel a storing editing or deleting operation press the CLEAR ALL key You will return to the initial screen To store edit or delete an auto dial key one touch key or group key or program first follow steps 1 through 4 below In the screen of step 4 touch the appropriate key for storing editing or deleting 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing Editing and Deleting Auto Dial Keys and Programs 2 Touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key Address Control Key Operator Pro 3 Touch the DIRECT ADDRESS PROGRAM key The direct address program menu appears Custom Inde 4 Touch
20. ABC abe To switch between upper case and lower case touch the AAA lt gt 44a key When aaa is highlighted lower case letters are entered 7 Touch the AAA lt gt Aaa key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 91 Fax Unit 8 Touch the A key You can touch the ABC abc key during entry to return to alphabetical character entry You can also enter numbers and symbols 9 When finished touch the OK key You will exit the character entry screen and return to the programming screen If you touch the CANCEL key you will return to the programming screen without storing the entered characters 5 92 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Entering Characters Entering numbers and symbols 1 Touch the AB ab lt gt 12 key ADDRESS NAME CANCEL OK When the characters 12 are highlighted number symbol entry mode is selected 2 Enter the desired number or symbol Numbers and symbols that can be entered are as follows Screen 1 2 Screen 2 2 ADDRESS NAME aN oR Change screens by touching the key or key displayed in the screen If you make a mistake touch the J key to move the cursor E back one space and then enter the correct character You can continue touching keys to enter characters You can also touch another character type selection key gt AAA aaa key or AB ab lt gt 12 key to enter characters other than numbers and symbols Xerox WorkCen
21. Before Making CopieS 0000 c cece eee eee 2 1 Part Names and Functions The DADF 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 2 1 E S AE EE EEE E ENE EEE EE E E E E E ET E E 2 1 Touch Panel main screen of copy mode anana nanana a 2 2 DADE auane ook ee ad ae Baus e A a a Bae eel oes Be Be 2 3 Acceptable ONGINGIS 4 4564 os eee eit s eee OF eee Te ee eee 2 3 Size and weight of acceptable originals 000 0s 2 4 SENTONA S renra teed ae A SGes Poe O28 dS OTR Rea eS PEO SS 2 4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide V Wem USING INGIDADE 2 i 0c 44 tiene oot al beeen du dewee oe dS 2 4 When using the document glass 0 0 0 eee 2 5 Standard original setting orientation 0 0 00 eee eee 2 7 Automatic copy image rotation rotation copying 2 8 selecting the Original Size 2 sarrin a ee eee ee eee bee eee ee eevee 2 8 Storing Deleting and Using Original Sizes 2 0 0 00 cee 2 10 Storing or deleting an original SiIZ 6 ee 2 10 Using a Stored Original Size 1 ees 2 12 Basic Procedure for Making Copies 05 2 13 Normal GODY zag irinae cate eetume headers oe be eee eeu setaes 4 2 13 Copying trom he DADR eerder ees oe deters eee ees 2 13 1 sided copies of 1 sided originals 0000 ee eens 2 13 Automatic two sided copying from the DADF 0 5 2 19 Copying from the document glaSS 0 0 0 cee ee eee 2 21 1 sided copies of 1
22. Call an authorized local service representative to correct the problem The equipment emits unusual noise or odors The power cord is damaged or frayed A wall panel circuit breaker fuse or other safety device has been tripped Liquid is spilled into the copier printer The equipment is exposed to water Any part of the equipment is damaged Disconnect Device The power cable is the disconnect device for this equipment It is attached to the back of the machine as a plug in device To remove all electrical power from the equipment disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet Operational Safety Information To ensure the continued safe operation of your Xerox equipment follow these safety guidelines at all times Do These Always connect equipment to a correctly grounded power outlet If in doubt have the outlet checked by a qualified electrician This equipment must be connected to a protective earth circuit This equipment is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin This plug will fit only into an earthed electrical outlet This is a safety feature To avoid risk of electric shock contact your electrician to replace the electrical outlet if you are unable to insert the plug into it Never use a plug that lacks an earth connection terminal to connect the product to an electrical outlet Always follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or supplied with the equipment Al
23. Module 2 Tray Unit and the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit installed The image will vary depend ing on the equipment installed Basic status messages are displayed here When interrupt copy is available the INTERRUPT key will be displayed here When an interrupt copy job is being run a CANCEL key will be displayed here to be used for cancelling the interrupt copy job Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Copy quantity display Copy Ratio display Exposure tab Paper Select display Original tab 2 Sided Copy display Special Modes tab Output display NOTE DADF DADF Displays the selected number of copies before the START key is pressed or the num ber of remaining copies after the START key is pressed A single copy can be made when 0 displayed Use to select the copy ratio page 2 30 Touch to adjust the copy exposure page 2 25 Use to select the paper size page 2 14 2 22 The display shows the location of the paper trays the size of the paper in the trays and the approximate amount of paper loaded in each tray The approximate amount of paper in a tray is indicated by Touch this tab to manually enter the original size page 2 8 Use to select the duplex copy mode setting pages 2 19 2 24 Touch to display the Special Modes screen page 2 37 Use to select sort group and staple sort pages 2 14 2 23 For a description of the Operation Panel
24. This section explains various functions that allow you to access the Web pages in the printer from your computer Printer Configuration Through the Network You can access the Web pages of the printer from your computer using a Web browser such as Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer This will allow you to adjust various settings through the network Environment required for accessing Web pages The following equipment and programs are needed to access the Web pages in the printer Print server card network interface card Recommended Web browser Internet Explorer 5 5 or higher Windows 5 1 or higher Macintosh Netscape Navigator 6 0 or higher or equivalent NOTE The following characters cannot be input in the Web pages when setting the Web pages in the Web server located in this product Inout characters are case sensitive e Characters that cannot be input lt gt amp e Examples of improper input lt abc gt lt abc abc abc abc Accessing Web pages and displaying help Use the following procedure to access the Web pages If the help button under the menu frame is clicked the help screen for description of various function settings that can be operated remotely from the Web pages for this product through the network will appear For the setting of each function see the detailed description 1 Open the Web browser on your computer 3 40 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Printer Configuration Through th
25. Touch Panel One touch and group keys for Scan to E mail group indexes and senders can also be stored edited and deleted from the touch panel of the machine Storing One Touch Keys Only Addresses for Scan to E mail The touch panel of the machine can also be used to store destinations for Scan to E mail Scan to FTP destinations must be stored using the Web page page 4 12 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key Key Operator Prq 3 Touch the DIRECT ADDRESS key 4 42 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing One Touch Keys Only Addresses for Scan to E mail 4 Touch the INDIVIDUAL key 5 Touch the NAME key The No that automatically appears is the lowest num ber from 001 to 500 that has not yet been programmed When NAME is touched the letter entry screen appears Enter up to 36 characters for the name Direct Address Individual No 001 Key Name 6 Touch the INITIAL key 7 Touch a letter key pineot Address 7 individual The first letter initial of the name entered in step 5 is ini tially selected and is highlighted If you wish to change the letter touch a different letter key NOTE The initial you enter here determines the position of the one touch key in the ABC index For information on the ABC index refer to page 4 22 8 Touch the OK key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 43 Network Scanner Operation 9 Touch the INDEX key firect Add
26. except the Bypass Tray on page 1 33 NOTE fyou load a different size of the same type of paper you only need to change the position of the size slide see step 2 below you do not need to change the paper type 5 Loading paper in Paper Tray 1 is now complete Changing the paper size in Paper Tray 1 The following paper size settings are available for Paper Tray 1 A3 to A5 11 x 17 to 8 1 2 x 5 1 2 and EXTRA 1 Use the following procedure to change the size as needed 1 This is limited to square or rectangular paper A3 to A5 11 x 17 to 8 1 2 x 5 1 2 size 1 Pull out Paper Tray 1 If paper remains in the tray remove it 2 Adjust the paper size slide to the paper size Move the paper size slide right or left to indicate the paper size being loaded If a special size paper is loaded in the paper tray set the size slide to EXTRA to inform the machine that a spe cial size paper has been loaded When INCH based size paper is loaded move the size slide to EXTRA Note that setting the size slide to EXTRA only informs the machine that a special size of paper has been loaded it does not inform the machine of the specific size If you wish to inform the machine of the specific size follow the steps in Setting the paper size when an extra size is loaded on page 1 34 If you do not set a size part or all of the image may not print 3 Adjust the guide plates A and B by squeezing their lock l
27. in the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide Image rotation The machine is initially set to rotate a vertically placed E document 90 so that it is oriented horizontally amp before transmission A4 8 1 2 x11 originals are rotated to A4R 8 1 2 x11 R and B5R or A5R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 R originals are rotated to B5 or A5 5 1 2 x8 1 2 A4R 8 1 2 x11 R originals and B5 or Ad 5 1 2 x8 1 2 originals are not rotated If desired you can turn this function off with the key operator program as explained in Rotation sending setting in the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide NOTE Place A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size originals so that they are oriented vertically g If oriented horizontally a ASR 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R orientation the original size will be detected as a different size and thus it will be necessary to touch the ORIGINAL key and specify the correct original size touch the A5R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R key See Manually Setting the Scanning Size on page 5 13 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 25 Fax Unit Priority Transmission of a Stored Job If you have an urgent transmission job and multiple transmission jobs have already been stored you can give priority to the urgent job so that it will be transmitted imme diately after the job currently being executed This is done from the job status screen 1 Press the JOB STATUS key
28. or top of the paper Select from None 10 mm 20 mm or 30 mm Default setting None One sided copying Original image A ES Image shifted Image shifted Image shifted to the right to the left to the bottom Margin B gt lt gt lt Margin Margin Two sided copying Original image CO Image shifted Image shifted Image shifted to the right to the left to the bottom Vi Margin g Ee a gt lt gt lt Margin Margin 3 30 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions Page Protection If an error occurs because there is too much print data selecting this checkbox may enable printing to take place Try selecting this checkbox when a print error occurs If only standard memory is installed 128 MB this setting cannot be selected Default setting Not selected Overlays Select this setting to print the document as an overlay on a previously created form The form must have been previously stored Default setting No Overlay Edit Click this button to open the overlay settings screen The form selected in this screen will be used for the overlay Font Click this button to change the font settings PostScript The following screen appears when the Advanced tab is selected The settings and buttons in this screen are explained below Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color DROS L peeesesecoeoseseceeseseseseosessecsoseses Overla
29. 13 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 64 to 105 g m2 or 17 to 28 Ibs Paper capacity Paper recommended for colour 80 g m2 or 21 lbs 500 sheets Xerox standard paper 80 g m2 or 21 Ibs 500 sheets Power supply Supplied from the main unit Dimensions 600 mm W x 642 mm D x 403 mm H 23 5 8 W x 25 9 32 D x 15 7 8 H not including the adjuster Approximately 31 kg or 68 3 Ibs Size of plain paper A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 BSR A5 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 18 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 7 1 4 x 10 1 2R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Weight of plain 64 to 200 g m2 or 17 to 54 Ibs paper Number of sheets One sheet single pass type Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice Specifications for paper trays The specifications for the types and sizes of paper that can be loaded in the paper trays are shown below Paper tray type Applicable paper types Applicable paper sizes Remarks A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 See Storing B5R A5 Extra Supplies on 11 x17 8 1 2 x14 page 1 45 Paper recommended for colour 8 1 2 x13 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 7 1 4 x10 1 2 R Paper Tray 1 Tray 1 A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 See More B5R A5 Extra information on 11 x17 8 1 2 x14 plain paper Plain paper 8 1 2 x13 8 1 2 x11 on page 1 32 8 1 2 x11 R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 7 1 4 x10 1 2 R 1 30 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Loading Paper
30. 16 Check the file format and the compression mode If you need to change these settings touch the FILE FORMAT key If you do not need to change the settings this step is not necessary File Format gt Settings for colour scanning File type PDF JPEG Compression mode LOW MEDIUM HIGH Settings for black and white scanning File type PDF TIFF Compression mode NONE MEDIUM G3 HIGH G4 The default setting is indicated by an asterisk When you have completed the settings touch the OK key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 45 Network Scanner Operation 17 When you have finished programming the one touch key touch the EXIT key If you wish to program another one touch key touch the NEXT key Touching the EXIT key returns you to the screen of step 4 on page 4 43 abcd abcd com Editing and Deleting One Touch Keys If you wish to delete a one touch key or change the E mail address name or other information programmed in a one touch key perform the following procedure 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key and then touch the DIRECT ADDRESS key refer to steps 1 to 3 on page 4 42 2 Touch the AMEND DELETE key Amend Delete 3 Touch the one touch key you wish to edit or delete Direct Address Amend Delete Exit Select Address To Amend Delete EE cor e To edit a one touch key follow steps 4 and 5 e To delete a one touch key
31. 2 47 COVERS key 2 37 custom directory storing scanning 4 17 custom paper size 3 27 custom settings clock adjust 1 37 1 41 display contrast 1 37 1 41 key operator program 1 38 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide list print 1 37 1 41 total count 1 37 1 40 tray settings 1 38 1 41 CUSTOM SETTINGS key 1 15 D DADF 1 9 2 1 2 3 automatic copying from 2 19 copying from 2 13 scanning 4 26 default display settings scanner 4 66 Default Job ID 3 25 Always Use This ID 3 26 Job Name 3 26 User Name 3 25 default paper type for Bypass Tray 3 56 default sender set 4 67 delete the print hold data 3 55 deleting document data from F code polling memory box 5 54 from Public Box 5 41 F code memory box 5 81 group keys 4 50 5 77 job program 2 75 memory box 5 88 one touch keys 4 46 5 72 programmed transmission destinations 4 15 programs 5 80 sender information 4 53 deleting programmed sender information 4 17 destination address entry manual 4 27 with global address search 4 30 destination information setting up 4 10 destination input methods 4 27 destinations storing Scan to E mail 4 11 4 42 Scanto FIP 4 12 DETAIL key 1 18 Device Setup 3 43 Log 3 44 Password 3 43 Different Paper setting 3 28 direct address entry disabling 4 69 DIRECT ADDRESS key 4 42 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Index display contrast 1 37 1 41 display switching keys 5 9 DNS server settings 4 7 DNS setup 4 9 docum
32. 37 alarm 5 98 alerts message 3 44 All Text to Black checkbox 3 38 Always Use This ID 3 26 AMEND DELETE key 4 46 applicable paper sizes 1 30 applicable paper types 1 30 auditing mode 1 18 Account Nunmber 3 25 auto colour calibration 3 58 auto image 2 28 2 71 Auto Job Control review 3 19 auto paper select 2 14 2 22 auto power shut off mode 1 8 auto resolution 2 26 auto size detection 1 37 auto dialing 5 17 5 22 automatic copy image rotation 2 8 automatic image quality adjustment 2 25 automatic reception 5 28 automatic reduction 5 10 automatic selection reduction enlargement 2 28 automatic switching B W and colour 3 7 automatic two sided copying from DADF 2 19 from document glass 2 24 automatic two sided printing 1 33 B B W reverse 2 50 B W REVERSE key 2 38 BCC key 4 217 binding change 2 21 2 24 Binding Edge 3 19 Index Bitmap Compression 3 32 black and white printing 3 4 BLACK COPY START key 1 15 5 6 Black Overprint 3 36 bleed 2 66 Blue Strength 3 39 book original 2 42 booklets and tablets 4 33 Border 3 18 brightness 2 52 2 57 broadcast transmission 5 29 5 32 Scan to E mail 4 25 Bypass Tray 1 10 3 63 loading paper in 1 23 misfeed 1 48 C C CLEAR key 1 15 5 5 CALL FOR SERVICE CODE 1 56 cancelling dual page scan 5 44 fax transmission 5 27 F code polling 5 55 polling 5 37 scan transmission 4 27 5 22 scanning 5 39 transfer 5 48 transmission e mail or FIP 4 41 CC key 4 21 centre era
33. 4 Touch the OK key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 5 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow If a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 In either case press the COLOUR COPY START key to begin copying To cancel the BRIGHTNESS function select the BRIGHTNESS function again and touch the CANCEL key step 2 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 57 Copier Operation Intensity 2 58 This copier allows the level of intensity of images to be adjusted This function can only be used when the original is placed on the document glass The DADF cannot be used 1 Touch the INTENSITY key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen The INTENSITY setting screen will appear 2 Adjust the intensity aa Adjustments Intensity Cancel JL ox Oe Ee Use the and keys to adjust the level of the INTENSITY When the key is touched the colour adjustments menu icon 4 will appear at the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on 3 Touch the OK key inside OK key on the INTENSITY setting screen Return to the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen 4 Touch the OK key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 5 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen
34. 40 1 Touch the MARGIN SHIFT key on the SPECIAL MODES screen The margin shift setting screen will appear Margin shite The margin shift icon 2 will also appear in the upper S left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on Ia Centring 2 Select the shift direction Touch a shift direction key to select right or left The selected key will be highlighted 3 Set the shift amount as needed and touch the lower OK key Use the v and the 4 keys to set the shift amount The shift amount can be set from 0 to 20 mm in 1 mm incre ments Side 1 Side 2 10 Kk 10 Kek If a Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit and Duplex Bypass v a v a Inverter Unit are not installed the margin shift setting for back side copies will not be displayed 4 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow lf a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 To cancel the margin shift function touch the CANCEL key on the margin shift setting screen This must be done before you touch OK in step 4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Special Modes Erase The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies produced when copy ing thick originals or books The erase modes that can be selected are shown below The erase width is approximately 10 mm 1 2 in
35. 462 644 20d acre na Se dane 9 95 When a Transaction Report Is Printed 2 0 0 eee 9 95 Viewing the Communication Activity Report 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 5 98 When an Alarm Sounds and a Warning Message Is Displayed 5 98 Problems and Solutions 0 0 0c eee eens 5 100 Tae E accutane E ee owe ane ee ee ok l 1 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide xiii Xiv Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide WARNING Warning AN Warning introduction Safety Notes Read these safety notes carefully before using this product to ensure you operate the equipment safely Your Xerox product and recommended supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements These include safety agency approval and compliance to established environmental standards Please read the following instructions carefully before operating the product and refer to them as needed to ensure the continued safe operation of your product The safety and environment testing and performance of this product have been verified using Xerox materials only Any unauthorized alternation which may include the addition of new functions or connection of external devices may impact the product certification Please contact your authorized local dealer for more information Warning Markings All warning instructions marked on or supplied with the product should be followed This WARNING alerts users to areas of the product where there is
36. 5 1 2 x8 1 2 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 8 1 2 x14 11 x17 If a non standard size original is loaded including special sizes the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear at all 5 12 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Manually Setting the Scanning Size Manually Setting the Scanning Size If you load an original that is not a standard size such as a long original or an INCH size or if the size is not detected correctly you must touch the ORIGINAL key and set the original size manually Perform the following steps after loading the document in the DADF tray or on the document glass see the previous page 1 Touch the ORIGINAL key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen 2 Touch the MANUAL key Original Size The sizes that can be selected are displayed Manual I Booklet 3 Touch the desired original size key AUTO is no longer highlighted MANUAL and the orig inal size key you touched are highlighted To select B4 8x1 2 x14 A3 11 x17 or LONG SIZE touch the key and then touch the appropriate Original size key To select an inch size touch the INCH tab Touch the appropriate inch original size key The selected key is highlighted To return to the AB original size palette touch the AB tab Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 13 Fax Unit
37. 5 27 Fax Unit 1 13 faxing a two sided original 5 23 F code confidential transmission 5 56 polling 5 54 polling memory 5 52 polling cancelling 5 55 relay broadcast function 5 60 relay broadcast transmission 5 59 relay request function 5 61 transmission 5 49 F code memory box deleting 5 81 editing 5 81 file format selecting scanning scanning file format selecting 4 38 FILE FORMAT key 4 20 file naming scanned image 4 7 file size limit Scan to E mail 4 68 l 4 FINISHER TRAY key 1 60 Finishing 3 19 Binding Edge 3 19 Staple 3 20 Fit To Page 3 27 font set PCL 3 47 forwarding function 5 46 fusing area misfeed 1 50 fusing unit 1 11 fusing unit pressure adjusting levers 1 27 G GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH key 4 22 Graphics Mode 3 30 gray scale printing 3 4 Green Strength 3 39 group copy output 2 18 group dialing 5 17 5 22 5 74 group index storing 4 54 5 80 GROUP key 1 60 group keys deleting 5 77 editing 5 76 editing and deleting 4 50 programming 4 48 storing 5 74 groups storing Scan to E mail 4 14 H halftone settings 3 36 High Capacity Feeder 1 12 1 74 3 14 loading paper 1 74 misfeed 1 75 Hold After Print 3 23 Hold Before Print 3 23 Hold Job List 3 48 hole punch scrap disposal 1 66 hole punching 3 22 settings for 3 22 host name 4 13 I O timeout 3 57 IMAGE EDIT key 2 38 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Image Edit menu 2 59 image orientation printing 3 27 Image Quality Graphics Mode 3
38. 5 49 The polling memory function explained here uses a memory box called the PUBLIC BOX NOTE When using the polling memory function do not set the reception mode to MANUAL RECEPTION see Using an Extension Phone to Receive a Fax on page 5 63 Scanning a document into memory Public Box for polling memory This procedure is for scanning a document into the Public Box If other document data has already been stored in the Public Box the new document will be added after that data If the previous document data is no longer needed delete that data first see Deleting document data from the Public Box on page 5 41 and then follow the steps below 1 Make sure the machine is in fax mode alts the IMAGE SEND key light is on the machine is in fax mode If the light is not on press the IMAGE SEND key When the network scanner option is installed touch this key to return to the initial screen of fax mode or scanner mode whichever mode was selected last To switch to fax mode from scanner mode touch the SCANNER FAX 2 Place the original in the DADF tray 3 In fax mode touch the SPECIAL MODES key and then touch the MEMORY BOX key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen To cancel the operation touch the CLEAR ALL key 5 38 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Transmission and Reception Using the Polling Functio
39. C226 User Guide 1 25 General Information e Use only Xerox recommended transparency film Insert the film so that the rounded corner is on the left for horizontal loading or on the right for vertical loading Horizontal Vertical loading loading e When loading multiple sheets of transparency film in the Bypass Tray fan the sheets several times before loading Setting envelopes or postcards When setting envelopes or postcards in the Bypass Tray set them in the orientation shown below Loading postcards Insert the postcard with the side to be printed on facing up The postcard should be oriented as shown in the diagram Loading envelopes Only the front side of envelopes can be printed Insert the envelope with the front side facing up Printing onto envelopes or postcards e Attempting to print onto both sides of envelopes or postcards may result in mis feeds or poor prints e Do not use pre printed envelopes e Before inserting a postcard or envelope straighten any curled edges Curled edges may cause creases colour deviations misfeeds and poor quality images 1 26 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Loading Paper Printing onto envelopes Attempting to print on envelopes that have metal clasps plastic snaps string clo sures windows linings self adhesive patches or synthetic materials may cause misfeeds inadequate toner adherence or other trouble Envelopes with embossed su
40. Correct adjustment will not be possible if you use the test patch that is printed for Auto colour calibration for the copy function or any other document If you attempt to use the wrong test patch you will return to the message screen that asks you to begin automatic adjustment Be sure to place only the test patch printed out above on the document glass e Lay approximately five sheets of copy paper that are the same size as the test patch on top of the set test patch and gently close the original cover When a message appears informing you that auto colour calibration is completed touch the OK key to end the procedure NOTE Before using this program make sure that the registration is correctly adjusted If the registration is not correctly adjusted perform AUTO ADJUSTMENT in Registration adjustment in the Key Operator Programs section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide Initialize and or store settings You can restore the CONDITION SETTINGS page 3 44 and the key operator pro gram of the PRINTER SETTINGS of page 3 55 to the factory default settings You can also store the current configuration of these settings in memory and restore a stored configuration at a later time Restore factory defaults This restores the CONDITION SETTINGS page 3 44 and the key operator program of the PRINTER SETTINGS of page 3 55 to the factory default settings If you need a record of the settings prior to rest
41. Dialing To cancel on hooking dialing dialing by touching the SPEAKER key and then the numeric keys when you need to redial the number or because transmission was inter rupted touch the SPEAKER key once again Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 27 Fax Unit Receiving Faxes 5 28 NOTES NOTES When another fax machine sends a fax to your machine your machine will ring auto matically receive the fax and begin printing this is called automatic reception e You can store a transmission job while fax reception is in progress See Storing transmission jobs memory transmission on page 5 24 e To receive faxes sufficient paper must be loaded in the paper tray Refer to Loading Paper on page 1 21 for information on loading appropriate paper Incoming faxes that are A4 8x1 2 x11 or B5 size will be automatically rotated to match the orientation of the paper so there is no need to load both horizontally ui and vertically oriented A4 8 1 2 x11 and B5 paper However if you receive a fax that is smaller than A4 8 1 2 x11 or B5 size the paper size used to print the fax will depend on how the original was oriented vertically or horizontally in the sending fax machine Receiving a Fax 1 The machine will ring and reception will automatically begin Number of rings The machine has been set to ring twice before beginning automatic reception You can use the key operator program to change th
42. Enter The Print Pin Via The 10 Key Pad Then Press 0k e If you make a mistake press the C key All digits will be cleared so you will need to re enter the number from the first digit e To cancel entry of the print PIN touch the CANCEL key You will return to the screen of step 2 without programming a print PIN Touch the OK key You will return to screen of step 2 and the entered print PIN will appear To exit touch the EXIT key To program another memory box touch the NEXT key Touching the EXIT key returns you to the screen of step 3 on page 5 82 Touching the NEXT key returns you to the screen for programming a new memory box the screen of step 4 on page 5 82 Setting for F Code Relay Broadcast Memory Boxes Recipient Program the end receiving machines to which document data received in the F code relay broadcast memory box will be transmitted when your machine is a relay machine Up to 30 end receiving machines 30 one touch keys or group keys can be programmed If you attempt to program more than this number a message will appear and programming will not be possible Only destinations that have been programmed in auto dial keys one touch keys or group keys can be selected If you need to include a destination that has not been programmed in an auto dial key first program it in a one touch key page 5 68 and then program the destination as an end receiving machine Xerox WorkCentre C226 User G
43. FRI 15 00 XEROX PLANNING DIV FAX No 0666211221 P 001 001 4 1 Date and time programmed in the custom settings see Custom Settings on page 1 37 2 Own name programmed with the key operator program See the Fax Unit sec tion of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide 3 Own fax number programmed with the key operator program 4 Transmitted page number 3 digit number appearing in the format page number total pages only the page number appears if you use manual transmission or Quick On Line transmission If desired you can use the key operator program to omit the page number 5 42 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Faxing a Divided Original Dual Page Scan Position of sender s information The key operator program can be used to select whether the sender s information is added outside the original data or inside the data See the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide The initial factory setting is outside the data T Direction of transmission None of the transmitted image is cut off however the transmitted data is longer than the scanned data and thus when both the sender and the receiver use the same size of paper the printed fax may either be reduced or split up and printed on two pages Length of scanned data Length of transmitted data Outside scanned data T Direction of transmission The top edge of the sca
44. Guide 5 83 Fax Unit 9 Touch the OK key You will return to the memory box programming screen The entered sub address and passcode are displayed REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED appears to the right of the box number Only for F Code polling memory Continue programming the settings that are particular to each type of memory box Go to the appropriate page below F code polling memory Polling times page 5 84 e F code confidential transmission Print PIN page 5 85 e F code relay broadcast transmission Recipient page 5 86 Setting for F Code Polling Memory Boxes Polling Times You can select whether to have document data that was scanned into an F code poll ing memory box automatically cleared after one transmission or to leave the docu ment data in the box and allow an unlimited number of transmissions when polled The initial setting is ONCE Change the setting as needed 1 Touch the POLLING MEMORY key in step 3 of Programming an F Code Memory Box on page 5 82 and store a box name sub address and passcode 2 Touch the POLLING TIMES key Sub Address f 214341434 351212 3 Touch the key for the desired polling times If you do not wish to erase the document after polling takes place touch the UNLIMITED key so that it is highlighted F Code Memory Box Polling Memory No 001 Polling Times 5 84 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Programming Editing and Deleting F Code
45. Memory Boxes 4 Touch the OK key You will return to the screen of step 2 and the selected polling times will appear 5 To exit touch the EXIT key To program another memory box touch the NEXT key Touching the EXIT key returns you to the screen of step 3 on page 5 82 Touching the NEXT key returns you to the screen for programming a new memory box the screen of step 4 on page 5 82 Setting for F Code Confidential Transmission Memory Boxes Print PIN Program the print PIN Personal Identification Number that is used to print a docu ment that has been received to an F code confidential memory box For information on using a print PIN refer to Printing a Document Received to an F Code Confidential Memory Box on page 5 57 NOTES gt Program a 4 digit number for the print PIN The characters and cannot be used The print PIN can not be omitted e Take care not to forget the print PIN that you have programmed If you forget the passcode consult your dealer Touch the CONFIDENTIAL key in step 3 of Programming an F Code Memory Box on page 5 82 and store a box name sub address and passcode 2 Touch the PRINT PIN key l Box Name f Fax Information Sub Address f 55112233 481221 EER Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 85 Fax Unit 5 86 NOTES 3 Use the numeric keys to enter a 4 digit number F Code Memory Box Confidential No 003 Print Pin
46. Module is installed Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 71 General Information Stapling position quick reference guide for duplex output The orientation of the copy paper original scanned original data and binding position selection are all interrelated The table below shows these relationships Orientation of original or original data Page 1 amp Page 2 Duplexed One position stapling Two position stapling Buipuiq yet Two position stapling along the shorter edge is not possible Two position stapling Top binding with two position stapling is not possible uud uoezualo elod Bulpuig doL D Q gt 5 D 2 gt Co Two position stapling along the shorter edge is not possible Left binding with two position stapling is not possible Bulpuiq 427 Two position stapling along the shorter edge is not possible Buljulid uonezuano adeospuey Buipuiq doy Right binding with two position stapling is not possible Buipuig yybiy 1 72 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Saddle Stitch Finisher Relation between print image and saddle stitch The orientation of the copy paper original scanned original data and binding position selection are all interrelated The table below shows these relationships Page 1 amp Page 2 Duplexed Page 3 amp Page 4 Duplexed Hulpulq 437 Hulud uoieyUsHO WesI0g Same as above D amp r SA 5 k 5 ro Page 1 amp Page 2 Duplexed
47. Operator Programs in the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide The key operator programs that can be accessed depend upon how the product is configured with optional equipment Key operator program list 3 50 Printer Settings Default Settings Prohibit notice page printing Prohibit test page printing A4 letter size auto change Delete the print hold data Output method when memory is full Default paper type for Bypass Tray Job queuing Interface settings Port switching method Enable parallel port Enable USB port Enable network port I O timeout Network settings IP address setting Enable TCP IP Enable NetWare Enable EtherTalk Enable NetBEUI Reset the NIC Colour adjustments 3 55 3 55 3 55 3 55 3 55 3 56 3 56 3 56 3 56 3 56 3 56 3 57 3 5 7 3 57 3 97 3 58 3 58 3 58 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Key operator program list Program name Page Auto colour calibration 3 58 Initialize and or store settings Restore factory defaults 3 59 Store current configuration 3 60 Restore configuration 3 60 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 51 Printer Operation Procedure for using key operator programs The procedure for using key operator programs is explained here using the PRINTER SETTINGS program as an example Follow the same steps to use the programs explained on page 3 55 and following 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key Key Operator Programs 3 Use th
48. Page 3 amp Page 4 Duplexed Bulpulgq 437 Punud uoezuano adeospuey Same as above Buipuig yybiy Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 73 General Information High Capacity Feeder The High Capacity Feeder can hold approximately 3 500 sheets 80 g m2 21 lbs of A4 8 1 2 x 11 size paper For the types of paper that can be loaded in the High Capacity Feeder see High Capacity Feeder in the tray specifications page 1 31 Part name Top cover Open for misfeed removal Release lever NOTES Do not place heavy objects on the High Capacity Feeder or press down hard on the tray e To install the High Capacity Feeder the optional Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit or the 3 Tray Unit must also be installed Loading paper in the High Capacity Feeder 1 Pull the tray out until it stops When the tray Is in operation do not use excessive force to pull the tray out This may damage the tray 1 74 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide High Capacity Feeder 2 Place the paper in the centre of the paper table The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line up to 3 500 sheets of Xerox standard paper 80 g m2 21 lbs lf the paper type was changed be sure to change the appropriate settings as explained in Setting the paper type except the Bypass Tray See page 1 33 3 Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine The paper table will automatically r
49. Pamphlet User Settings Factory Defaults Finishing Binding Edge Left z Staple None v T Punch No Offset Job Control I Auto Job Control review 3 21 Printer Operation 3 22 Punch Configure the settings for the Punch function When this is selected the document will be hole punched The Collate setting is automatically activated when Punch is selected Default setting Not selected Hole punching only if a Hole Punch Module is installed If the Saddle Stitch Finisher is equipped with a Hole Punch Module printed paper can be hole punched and delivered to the offset tray Saddle stitching and hole punching cannot be selected at the same time The automatic image rotation will not function when the hole punching function is used lt Example gt Original 1 Punch positions Original 2 Punch positions No Offset Select this setting when you do not wish sets of collated or grouped output to be offset from each other Default setting Not selected Offset mode When delivered to the tray each set or group of pages will be offset from the previous set for easy separation The offset function only operates in the offset tray Stapled sets will not be offset Offset mode Non offset mode KZ E Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions Defaults D 3 ee Account Humber Hold After
50. Send Management Store various types Unit Serial Number 4500527900 o E mai N Not Set of transmission o FIP Model sabe wae certs C226 o Desktop Current Status Ready to print o Group Machine Location Not Set e Sender Store the sender s Network Scanning name and E mail ae o Custom Directory Device Setup e Information Configure basic settings for the e Passwords e Log o Status Message o Alerts Message Some transmission methods require Network Setup that the E mail area server and DNS e LDAP Heip Configure settings required for Global Address F Local intranet Web Page To use the network scanner function you must configure basic network scanner set tings pages 4 6 to 4 9 store transmission destinations pages 4 10 to 4 16 and pro gram your sender s name page 4 16 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 5 Network Scanner Operation Basic Settings for Network Scanning Click Network Scanning in the menu frame and then establish the required settings These settings should only be established by the network administrator After entering the settings be sure to click Submit to store them For detailed information on setting procedures refer to Help Click here Z WorkCentre C226 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Q sxx amp x E A K Search Se Favorites media E2 ra I Laas X rel Address http 13 138 24 206 JCE
51. Tray 1 1 Open the upper side cover Push the lever upward and gently open the cover NOTE f paper is loaded in the Bypass Tray temporarily remove the paper and close the Bypass Tray before opening the side cover 2 Remove the misfed paper Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal NOTE The misfeed may have occurred inside the machine Check carefully and remove it Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 47 General Information 1 48 3 If misfed paper is not found in step 2 pull out Paper Tray 1 and remove the misfed paper Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal 4 Gently close the paper tray Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine 5 Gently close the upper side cover After closing confirm that the misfeed message has been cleared and the normal display appears Misfeed in the Bypass Tray 1 Remove the misfed paper from the Bypass Tray Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal 2 After removing the misfed paper open and close the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit to reset Grasp the finger hold and gently open the unit Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Misfeed Removal After closing confirm that the misfeed message has been cleared and the normal display appears If the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit is not installed close the side cover in the same way Misfeed in the
52. Use the LS and ly touch keys to enter the X dimension If you inserted a standard size of paper in the Bypass Tray make sure that a checkmark appears in the ENABLE AUTO SIZE DETECTION checkbox Enable Auto Size Detection Extra Size Basic Setting di ons tory xy m e imensions for Y JIM The permitted range for the X dimension is 139 to 432 mm 5 1 2 to 17 inches and the permitted range for the Y dimension is 100 to 297 mm 4 to 11 3 4 inches Basic Setting 7 Touch the OK key to complete the setting Custom Settings The items that can be set with the custom settings are shown below Total count The number of pages processed by the machine and optional equipment can be displayed See page 1 40 Display contrast Used to adjust the contrast of the operation panel display See page 1 41 List print Used to print a list of machine settings See page 1 41 Clock adjust Used to set the date and time of the built in clock of the machine See page 1 39 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 37 General Information 1 38 Tray settings The paper type paper size and automatic tray switching can be set for each tray Automatic tray switching allows feeding to switch between trays loaded with the same type and size of paper If one tray runs out of paper during printing printing will continue from the other tray See page 1 41 For the detailed descriptions and use of the settings listed below see Cha
53. Use the auto image function to select the and paper sizes appropriate copy ratio based on the origi nal and copy sizes see page 2 28 Blank copies Is the original placed correctly When using the document glass place the original face down When using the DADF place original face up Order of copies Is the order of originals correct When using the document glass set the incorrect originals from the first page one sheet at a time When using the DADF set the originals with the first page up Job cancellation Is a message requesting cancellation of Press the CLEAR ALL key to cancel the needed job displayed current job Scanning of origi Is a message indicating memory is full lf the data amount exceeds the limit nals is incomplete displayed when using the pamphlet copy or multi shot copy which requires scanning of all originals scanning will be cancelled and copying will not be performed If you install an additional memory the storage capacity will increase The selected num For an interrupt copy job are you When colour copying is performed in sort ber of sets of cop attempting colour copying in sort mode mode for an interrupt copy job only one ies is not printed set of copies can be made If more than one set is needed replace the original and repeat the copy procedure for each set needed Not all pages are When making copies the memory When the memory becomes full during copied became full
54. WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 39 Network Scanner Operation NOTES When the ONE PAGE PER FILE checkbox is not selected all scanned pages are combined into a single file When the checkbox is selected one file is created per page e Ifthe file format is set to JPEG in the file format settings for colour scanning a checkmark automatically appears in the ONE PAGE PER FILE checkbox and one file is created for each page 4 Touch the OK key You will return to the initial screen Compression Mode NOTES The initial file format setting can be changed with the key operator program Initial file format setting page 4 67 e Even if you change the settings in the FILE FORMAT setting screen you can return to the settings stored for each recipient by selecting PROGRAMMED once again 4 40 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting the File Format Cancelling an E Mail FTP Transmission You can cancel a transmission job that is in progress Cancellation is done from the scanner job status screen 1 Press the JOB STATUS key 2 Touch the SCANNER JOB key 3 Touch the STOP DELETE key A message appears to confirm the cancellation Touch the YES key to delete the selected job key and cancel the transmission NOTE f you do not wish to cancel the transmission touch the NO key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 4 Network Scanner Operation Storing Editing and Deleting from the
55. a different paper size only in printer mode This only appears in the job status screen of fax mode The key is used to switch the job list display between JOB QUEUE and COMPLETE JOB QUEUE Shows stored jobs and the job in progress COMPLETE Shows finished jobs Use to display the print job list for printer copy and fax mode This displays a list of jobs that only used the network scanner function Only when the network scanner function is added This displays the transmission reception status and finished jobs of fax mode when the fax option is installed Use to switch the page of the displayed job list Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete the selected reserved job Note that a fax print job cannot be cancelled or deleted This only appears in the job status screen of fax mode Touch this key to give priority to a job that has been selected in the job queue The key is only effective for computer print jobs and only appears in the job status screen of the printer mode It is used to display detailed information of a selected print job and to change the paper size for the print job Auditing Mode When the account counter function is turned on a count is kept of the number of copy sheets used by each account maximum of 200 accounts The counts can be dis played and totaled as needed The key operator programs can be used to enable auditing mode separately for copy mode fax mode network scanner
56. and then fol low steps 4 through 7 beginning on page 2 23 For one sided copying follow steps 4 through 7 beginning on page 2 23 To cancel the dual page copy function touch the DUAL PAGE COPY key on the spe cial modes screen step 1 The highlighted display will be cancelled NOTE To erase shadows caused by document binding use the edge erase function page 2 41 Centre Erase and Edge Centre Erase cannot be used in combination Centring When the original and copy paper are of different sizes CENTRING is used to shift the image to the centre of the copy paper but only in the left to right direction Example e This function can be used to reduce a larger sized origi Original Copy nal image and centre it on a copy of smaller paper size as well as centre a smaller original onto a larger sized Copy 4 gt 4 e This function will not work when non standard size origi SB B nals or copy paper are used This function cannot be selected when enlargement copying has been selected 1 Touch the CENTRING key on the SPECIAL MODES screen E D The CENTRING key is highlighted to indicate that the A 3 Oe function is turned on and the centring icon will 7 appear in the upper left of the screen ia Centring A k 2 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode 2 44 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Special Modes About the steps that follow lf a
57. approximately 500 sheets of the recom Unit mended paper for colour 80 g m2 or 21 lbs or approximately 500 sheets of Xerox standard paper 80 g m2 or 21 Ibs Duplex Module This stand includes a module for automatic two sided printing and two paper trays 2 Tray Unit The two trays can hold approximately 500 sheets of the recommended paper for colour 80 g m2 or 21 Ibs or approximately 500 sheets of Xerox standard paper 80 g m2 or 21 lbs To perform two sided printing a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit is required 3 Tray Unit This stand has three paper trays Each tray can hold approximately 500 sheets of the recommended paper for colour 80 g m or 21 Ibs or approximately 500 sheets of Xerox standard paper 80 g m or 21 Ibs Saddle Stitch The finisher can deliver sets saddle stitched and folded at the paper centreline to form Finisher a pamphlet edge stapled in three different modes or unstapled For two hole or three hole output a hole Punch Module must be installed 1 12 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Part Names and Functions Exit tray The exit tray is installed on the output outlet of the machine or the Duplex Tray Inverter Unit Duplex Bypass This module is required to automatically turn paper over within the machine for auto Inverter Unit matic two sided printing Other optional equipment Scan Kit This kit is required to add the network scanner function To use the network scanner fu
58. are not going to enter a sub address and passcode after the fax number pro ceed to step 12 e For information on sub addresses and passcodes see Transmission Between Machines Supporting F codes on page 5 49 e A maximum of 64 digits can be entered including the fax number sub address passcode any pauses hyphens and slashes to separate the sub address and passcode 10 If you need to enter a sub address touch the SUB ADDRESS key and then enter the sub address with the numeric keys a OW Tove ne ee ee alone eee entered after the fax number Continue by entering the sub address max 20 digits Press Ok If you do not wish to enter a passcode proceed to step 12 11 If you wish to enter a passcode touch the SUB ADDRESS key once again and enter the passcode with the numeric keys a When you touch the SUB ADDRESS key a slash is entered after the sub address Continue by entering the o Via The 10 Key Pad Then Press 0 4 passcode max 20 digits 0666211221 3456 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing Editing and Deleting Auto Dial Keys and Programs 12 Touch the OK key You will return to the one touch key programming screen REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED will appear highlighted to the right of No NOTE The FAX No line only shows 32 digits regardless of how many digits actually programmed 13 Check the key name The characters appearing next to the KEY NAME key wil
59. as the tray moves up and down e To install the Saddle Stitch Finisher a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit and either a stand 1 Tray Unit a 3 Tray Unit or a Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit must also be installed Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 59 General Information Using the Saddle Stitch Finisher GROUP key 2 STAPLE SORT key 3 SORT key FINISHER TRAY key OFFSET key CENTRE TRAY key D OK key SADDLE STITCH key PUNCH key 1 60 Touch the More key in the Output display on the main screen of copy mode to dis play the screen that allows selection of sort staple sort centreline stapling group function and the output tray When Group Is selected all copies of the same original will be grouped When Staple Sort is selected sorted sets will be stapled and delivered to the offset tray They will not be offset stacked When Sort is selected sets of copies will be sequentially delivered When the offset function is selected output goes to the offset tray The offset tray is automatically selected when the staple sort function is turned on The offset function operates when Yes is selected and doesn t operate when No is selected The offset checkmark is automatically cleared when the staple sort function is turned on lf the centre tray is selected output paper will be delivered to the exit tray located above the main unit Touch to close the OUTPU
60. at a specified time This allows you to check the machine s activity at regular intervals The machine is initially set factory setting to not print the report To have the report printed change the setting with the key operator program See Activity report print select setting in the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide NOTES gt After printing the data is cleared from memory so the report cannot be printed a second time e Refer to the table in When a Transaction Report is printed on the previous page for the notes that appear in the TYPE NOTE column When an Alarm Sounds and a Warning Message Is Displayed When an error occurs during a transaction an alarm will sound and a message will appear in the display Take action as explained in the following table Message screen Alarm Meaning of message Action Page Guide ADD Xxxxxxxx PAPER A received fax cannot Add the indicated Loading Paper on be printed because paper page 1 21 there is no suitable paper CHANGE THE TONER CARTRIDGE The machine is out of Replace the toner Replacing the Toner toner and the received cartridge Cartridges on document cannot be page 1 42 printed PLEASE RETURN xx ORIGINALS TO THE DADF An original misfeed Reload the indi Using the DADF on THEN PRESS START occurred in the DADF cated original page 5 11 during scanning THE MEMORY BECOMES FULL The memory became Send
61. become damp resulting in paper misfeeds 4 Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally Do not store it standing on end If stored standing on end the toner may not distribute well even after shaking the cartridge vigorously and will remain inside the cartridge without flowing out Supply and Consumables The supply of spare parts for a repair of the appliance is guaranteed for at least 7 years following the termination of production Spare parts are those parts of the appa ratus which may break down within the scope of the ordinary use of the product whereas those parts which normally exceed the life of the product are not to be con sidered as spare parts Consumables too are available for 7 years following the termi nation of production Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 45 General Information Misfeed Removal When a misfeed has occurred during printing the message MISFEED HAS OCCURRED will appear in the touch panel display of the operation panel and print ing output will stop The approximate locations of possible misfeeds are indicated by Y in the illustration below The page numbers for detailed information for misfeed removal for each are also shown D Misfeed in the fusing area Misfeed in the Bypass Tray and exit area page 1 50 page 1 48 2 Misfeed in the Duplex Bypass 7 Misfeed in the 1 Tray Unit Inverter Unit page 1 53 page 1 47 Misfeed in the Saddle Stitch Misfeed in the Duplex Finisher
62. beep can be turned off Default sender set If you do not select a sender when performing a Scan to E mail operation the sender information stored with this setting is automatically used You can check the stored sender information by printing the SENDER list 1 Touch the SENDER NAME key and then enter the sender name The sender name entry screen appears Up to 20 characters can be entered 2 Touch the OK key 3 Touch the RE ADDRESS key and then enter the return address Up to 64 characters can be entered 4 Touch the OK key The entered return address appears Check the address to make sure it is correct Compression mode at broadcasting This setting selects the compression mode for broadcasting using Scan to E mail The compression mode set here is used for all destinations regardless of their individual compression mode settings The initial settings are as follows e Black and white scanning HIGH G4 e Colour scanning MEDIUM Initial file format setting These programs are used to set the file format of the transmitted image and the num ber of images per file e The file type and compression mode is set in FILE FORMAT FILE TYPE COM PRESSION MODE The setting takes effect in the following situations e A file format is not selected when sending a image e A file format setting was not included when the destination was stored e Ifthe file format is set when sending an image or storing a destination
63. destination control destination name user index name for front panel display etc are configured by this control 3 42 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Printer Configuration Through the Network Group Multiple e mail destinations can be stored in one of the one touch keys displayed in the touch panel This is called storing a group When sending an e mail the stored destinations can be selected by simply touching the one touch key This is convenient when you wish to send the same e mail to multiple destinations Sender The sender of E mail transmissions from the network scanner is configured The sender will be set as the From item of the E mail header Up to 20 senders can be registered and a sender can be selected among them from the operation panel Network Scanning Setup Basic setting screen for the network scanner E mail subject for scanner delivery file name etc are set To use the network scanner you must set up SMTP Setup and DNS Setup This screen displays the SMTP and DNS settings and provides a link to SMTP Setup and DNS Setup Custom Directory User index names in the display list on the operation panel are set Device Setup Information Configure machine identification information for the status amp alert E mail function Password The settings and programmed information in the Web page can be protected by click ing Passwords in the menu frame and establishing passwords The administrator sh
64. dete fog sete atts atsa eka Sais a eee e aint te E AN a a a cra aed Gaels 4 1 About the Network Scanner Function 000 0c cee eee eee cua 4 3 Settings and Programming Required for the Network Scanner POCQUING 4 528 065060 oe Od Gd eo OE e ee ae ee 4 4 ACCESSING Wep Fages 12a oye areata eee we eee ee eee ae ees 4 4 ADOULING WED Page ccc5 ot sieed tahae tee ra ge ose ee ee Se Gees 4 5 Basic Settings for Network Scanning 0 00 cece eee eee 4 6 Enable scanner delivery methods Enable Scanner Delivery to 4 6 Enabling user authentication Advanced Setup 085 4 6 select the method for assigning a file name to a scanned image File Naming 4 7 selecting an e mail subject E mail Subject only used for Scan to E mail 4 7 E mail Server and DNS Server Settings 0 0 0 0 eee eee 4 7 Setting Up Destination Information 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee 4 10 Storing destinations for Scan to E mail 0 0 00 4 11 Storing destinations for Scan to FTP 0 0 00 cee eee eee 4 12 Storing Groups Scan to E mail 0 2 0 0 0 ccc ee 4 14 Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations 4 15 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide IX Storing Sender Information Scan to E mail 2 0 2 0 e eee eee 4 16 Editing and deleting programmed sender s information 4 17 Storing a Custom DITeClOly 245 sadn oe ek ee ae a RR EY eee GA 4 17 Protect
65. due to a machine failure so please check again before calling for service In the event that service is required turn off the main switch unplug the power plug from the outlet Problems related to the printer function are described in this section For troubleshooting related to general machine use the copier function or the network scanner function please read Troubleshooting in the corresponding manuals Printer is on but Is the interface cable correctly con Make sure the USB or parallel cable is cor data is not nected rectly connected to the machine and your received computer Has the printer driver been installed Install the appropriate printer driver See correctly the Printer Installation section in the Work Centre C226 System Administration Guide Is the printer driver correctly selected Make sure that this printer is selected in the Has it been configured in the network software application software or use an when using as a network printer appropriate utility to check that the printer is registered on the network Data is received Has the specified size and type of Load paper select another paper size or but not printed paper been loaded cancel printing Printer cannot be Has the printer driver been installed Install the appropriate printer driver See selected from com correctly the Printer Installation section in the Work puter Centre C226 System Administration Guide The orientatio
66. factory setting is LOWER page 4 37 Touch this key to change the exposure setting for the original to be scanned The selected exposure setting will be highlighted above the key The initial factory setting is AUTO page 4 36 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Protecting Information Programmed in the Web Page Passwords Address directory screen E mail Destination Control Touch the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key in the Condition setting screen page 4 19 to display the screen shown below at right If you have set the initial screen to the address directory screen using the key operator program the initial screen will appear as follows Destinations stored using the Web page are grouped in indexes Q according to the letter entered in Initial for each destination and the name entered in Display Name is displayed in the one touch key 4 zj a CONDITION Full Name Required Resi w C Initial Optional T SETTINGS i USER1 x Custom Directory E Frequently Used GLOBAL E mail Address itestt test1 abcd com ADDRESS SEARCH Required Global Address Search G Display Name Optional hesi oo File Format for Colour PDF Medium compression x File Format for B W Poe Submit 5 E mail Destination Management page 1 TO key CC key 3 BCC key 4 One touch key display 4 i i ADDRESS REVIEW a GROUP f When selecting a destination
67. general guidelines The actual number of Original pages that can be scanned into memory will vary depending on the content of the originals Original type Full colour origi nal mostly text Full colour origi nal text and photos Full colour origi nal photo Text original Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide No added Added memory TY 128 MB 256 MB Original size Up to A4 8 1 2 x 11 B4 A3 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 A3W 12 x 18 Up to A4 8 1 2 x 11 B4 A3 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 A3W 12 x 18 Up to A4 8 1 2 x 11 B4 A3 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 wo e B4 A3 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 200 340 17 A3W 12 x 18 O1 ao gt N CO ss 2 17 Copier Operation Copy output sort and group 1 Place your original onto the document glass or the DADF tray 2 On the numeric keys enter the desired number of copies lt n gt 3 Inthe Output display touch the SORT key or the GROUP key NOTE Sort is automatically selected when the original is placed on the DADF tray of the DADF e Group is automatically selected when the original is placed on the document glass 4 Press the COLOUR COPY START key or the BLACK COPY START key Your copies are printed e If Sort was selected lt n gt sets of copies will print e If Group was selected lt n gt copies of each page wi
68. is a canceled revenue stamp this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is performed for lawful purposes Postage Stamps canceled or uncanceled For philatelic purposes Postage Stamps may be photographed provided the reproduction is in black and white and is less than 75 or more than 150 of the linear dimensions of the original Postal money Orders Bills Checks or Draft of money drawn by or upon authorized officers of the United States Stamps and other representatives of value of whatever denomination which have been or may be issued under any Act of Congress Adjusted Compensation Certificates for Veterans of the World Wars Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government Bank or Corporation Copyrighted materials unless permission of the copyright owner has been obtained or the reproduction falls within the fair use or library reproduction rights provisions of the copyright law Further information of these provisions may be obtained from the Copyright Office Library of Congress Washington D C 20559 Ask for Circular R21 XXIV Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide oND 10 Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization Foreign Naturalization Certificates may be photographed Passports Foreign Passports may be photographed Immigration Papers Draft Registration Cards Selective Service Induction Papers that bear any of the following Registrant s information Earnings or Income Depe
69. is set as the initial screen When SWITCH AUTOMATICALLY TO COPY MODE SCREEN is selected the dis play will automatically switch to the copy mode screen if no action is taken in the scan fax mode screen for 20 seconds The number of direct address keys displayed setting The number of one touch keys displayed in each address directory screen can be changed from 6 the normal setting to 4 or 9 Touch 4 6 or 9 to select the desired number NOTE For the key name that appears in each one touch key a maximum of 18 characters can appear when the number of one touch keys displayed is set to 4 or 6 A maximum of 10 characters can appear when the number of one touch keys displayed is set to 9 Initial resolution setting This is used to change the default resolution setting for transmission in network scan ner mode The default resolution is initially set to LOWER To change the setting touch the desired resolution key e LOWEST B W 150 x 150dpi Colour 100 x 100dpi e LOWER B W 200 x 200dpi Colour 150 x 150dpi e STANDARD B W 300 x 300dpi Colour 200 x 200dpi HIGHER B W 400 x 400dpi Colour 300 x 300dpi HIGHEST B W 600 x 600dpi Colour 600 x 600dpi 4 66 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting Programs Scan complete sound setting This program is used to set the volume of the beep sound that informs you that the original has been scanned Two volume levels are available or the
70. it s initial setting Original Copy 7 4 4 7 7 4 7 7 4 NNANNNNNNNNAN EDGE ERASE Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies caused when heavy paper or a book is used as an original CENTRE ERASE Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings of bound documents EDGE CENTRE ERASE Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies and eliminates the shadow at the centre of copies 1 Touch the ERASE key on the SPECIAL MODES screen The erase setting screen will appear The erase icon Z will also appear in the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 41 Copier Operation 2 select the desired erase mode Select one of the three erase modes The selected key will be highlighted Centre Edge Centre rase Erase Use the y and the 4 keys to adjust the erase width gk and then touch the OK key 4 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow lf a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 To cancel the erase function touch the CANCEL key on the erase setting screen Dual page copy The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two documents placed side by side on the document glass It is especially useful when copying books and other bound documen
71. key and cancel the job as explained on page 5 27 e If the machine makes two beeps during or at the end of transmission and an error message appears in the message display refer to page 5 98 to fix the problem e Ifthe power is turned off or a power failure occurs while a document is being scanned in the DADF the machine will stop and a document jam will occur After power is restored remove the document e A job number appears in the screen together with JOB STORED when a transmission job is stored If you make a note of this number after performing a broadcast transmission you can use the number to check the results of the transmission for each destination in the transaction report or activity report Transmission by Auto Dialing One Touch Dialing and Group Dialing To dial by touching an auto dial key one touch key or group key instead of pressing the numeric keys follow the steps below To use an auto dial number the name and fax number of the destination must first be stored For information on auto dial num bers see page 5 17 To store an auto dial number see pages 5 68 and 5 74 1 Perform steps 1 through 5 of Basic Procedure for Sending Faxes on page 5 19 2 Touch the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key The address directory screen appears This step is not necessary if the address directory already appears Go to step 3 3 Touch the one touch key for the desired destination Refer to page 5 9 for information o
72. key is pressed touch the CONDITION SETTINGS key in the address directory screen to display the condition settings screen Default display settings in the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide can be used to select whether the condition settings screen appears or the address directory screen appears as the initial screen when the IMAGE SEND key is pressed When the network scanner option is installed you will return to the initial screen of fax mode or scanner mode whichever mode was selected last Pressing the IMAGE SEND key in a copy screen or printer screen returns you to the initial screen of fax mode Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Message display Memory and reception mode display SPEAKER REDIAL ADDRESS DIRECTORY SUB ADDRESS ADDRESS REVIEW SCANNER FAX Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Fax Mode Condition Settings Screen Condition settings screen The display is initially set factory setting to show the following condition settings screen as the initial screen e To Send a Exposure Fax Memory 100 Address ception d Directory Standard Resolution Original Messages appear here to indicate the current status of the machine The icon at left ES indicates fax mode This shows the amount of fax memory that is free and the currently selected reception mode Touch t
73. m Up to 999 can be set If you are only making a single copy the copy can be made with the copy number display showing 0 Use the C clear key to cancel an entry if a mistake has been made 6 Press the COLOUR COPY START 00 or BLACK COPY START O key Replace the original with the next original and press the START key Repeat this operation until all originals have been scanned 7 Touch the READ END key If you selected Sort for the output in step 4 it is neces sary to touch the READ END key Place Next Original Press Start When Finished Press Read End Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 23 Copier Operation Automatic two sided copying from the document glass When a Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit and a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit are installed the following automatic two sided copy function is possible The copy paper is turned over automatically allowing easy two sided copying NOTE Certain restrictions exist depending on the amount of memory installed and the copy settings See Copy mode output restrictions on page 2 16 and Guidelines for the number of scannable originals during sort copying on page 2 17 Original Copy 1 Place an original on the document glass pages 2 4 to 2 10 2 On the 2 Sided Copy display touch the 2 gt 2 SIDED COPY key i B Sided 1 OE i Ci Sided Cst d Saa Sided C_i l C Jan rere 3 In the 2 Sided Copy display touc
74. memory box by print ing it and the procedure for clearing data from a box are almost the same as the proce dures for printing and clearing document data from the Public Box Instead of touching the PUBLIC BOX key in step 3 of Printing document data in the Public Box on page 5 40 or Deleting document data from the Public Box on page 5 41 touch the key of the desired memory box If a document icon El appears to the right of a mem ory box key document data has been stored in that box and you can print it out However the contents cannot be printed or deleted while the memory box is being used for transmission Procedure for F Code Polling NOTES Make sure that a document has not been loaded in the DADF tray or on the document glass and then follow the steps below e You must know the sub address SEP and passcode PWD of the other machine s F code polling memory box e Serial polling selecting multiple fax machines to be polled using a group key or by touching the NEXT ADDRESS key is not possible with F code polling 1 In fax mode touch the SPECIAL MODES key and then the POLLING key ee ae If the address directory screen appears touch the CON special Nodes address DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings i 7A m screen The POLLING key is highlighted and the polling icon f Scan To cancel polling touch the POLLING key once again so that it is not high
75. must first store the destinations in a group Click Group and then select the Scan to E mail destinations that you wish to store in the group Up to 300 destinations can be stored in one group Only destina tions for E mail can be stored in a group Note that multiple destinations cannot be entered manually when sending an image When you have completed all of the entries click Submit The entries will be stored MENU WorkCentre C226 X E ROX System information Destination Management image Send Management E mail FTP Desktop Group e Destination o E mail Group Destination Control Full Group Name Required Initial Optional e Network Scanning Custom Directory USERI o Setup l CI Frequently Used Custom Director Click here Address es Required Device Setup 105 e Information e Passwords e Log o Status Message o Alerts Message Network Setup ee ee ee Full Group Name Enter the full group name of the destination up to 36 characters Required Initial Optional Enter the initial character of the stored destination name This initial is used to place the destination in the ABC index of the machine s address directory screen page 4 21 Custom Directory Drop down list Select one custom directory for this destination Check box for Frequently Used The destination is set as Frequently Used when checked on Address es Required Select the addres
76. normal polling explained on page 5 34 however it uses an F code polling memory box and is always protected by means of the sub address and passcode How F code polling memory works The other machine 1 F code polling ak transmission request eck Sub address Sub address and passcode and passcode e are _ to your machine Sub address Se 6 I I I IZ 1 2 I xE sz O ve O Q 3 Polling memory 4 Automatic A box opens of document data to other machine 5 52 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide F Code Polling Memory F code polling is when your machine calls another machine and retrieves a document that was scanned into the polling memory box of that machine the reverse of the above diagram NOTES gt To perform polling or polling memory without using an F code refer to page 5 34 e To create an F code memory box for polling memory refer to page 5 81 and Setting for F Code Polling Memory Boxes Polling Times on page 5 84 e Unlike normal polling the other machine s fax number is not programmed as a passcode for F code polling memory The sub address and passcode of the polling memory box are always used for polling security e The receiving machine bears the expense phone charges of the transmission Using F Code Polling Memory In order for another machine to retrieve a document from your machine you must first scan the document into the F code polling memory box You
77. on page 1 35 If you loaded a special size of paper in the Bypass Tray set the paper size as explained in Setting the paper type and paper size in the Bypass Tray on page 1 35 If you do not set a size part or all of the image may not print This completes the procedure for loading paper in the Bypass Tray NOTE When loading paper in the Bypass Tray or closing the tray close the paper cover as shown NOTES Be sure to load A6 paper A5 paper 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 paper and postcards as shown in the diagram below A6 paper post cards A5 paper 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 paper e When loading plain paper other than paper recommended for colour Xerox standard paper special media other than postcards Xerox recommended transparency film or paper to be printed on the back the paper must be loaded one sheet at a time Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds e Before loading heavy paper straighten any curling in the paper e When adding paper remove any paper remaining in the tray combine it with the paper to be added and reload as a single stack e Do not use paper that has already been printed on by a plain paper fax machine or a laser printer This may cause printed images to become dirty e When printing on transparency film be sure to remove each sheet as it exits the machine Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may cause curling Xerox WorkCentre
78. only the Storing transmis SEND SCANNED DATA OR CANCEL THE J OB full while the original pages that were sion jobs memory was being scanned already scanned transmission on or cancel the page 5 24 entire transmis sion POLLING IS NOT POSSIBLE WITH Polling is not possible Try polling again Polling on page 5 THE AVAILABLE MEMORY because there is not after currently 35 enough space in mem stored jobs are ory completed 5 98 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Message screen Alarm MANUAL RECEIVE IS DISABLED DUE TO OUT OF MEMORY CLOSE THE xxxx COVER CLOSE THE DADF CLOSE THE LOWER RIGHT SIDE COVER CALL FOR SERVICE CODE xx xx FAX FUNCTION TROUBLE Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide When an Alarm Sounds and a Warning Message Is Displayed Meaning of message Action Page Guide Manual reception was not possible because there was not enough free space in memory The indicated cover is open The self diagnosis func tion has activated and automatically stopped operation An error code appears IN XX xx Try manual recep tion again after currently stored jobs have been completed Close the indi cated cover Turn off the power and then turn it back on If the same message still appears con tact your dealer 5 99 Fax Unit Problems and Solutions If you experience a problem with the fax function first check the following table If you cannot solve the problem usi
79. original change originals and repeat scanning until all originals have been scanned When finished touch the READ END key that appears in the message display NOTE To cancel Dual Page Scan Press the CLEAR ALL key Programming Frequently Used Operations This function allows you to store the steps of an operation including the destination and scanning settings into a program This function is convenient when you frequently send documents such as a daily report to the same destination Up to eight programs can be stored Programs can be stored using the custom settings and a name up to 18 characters long can be assigned For information on storing editing and deleting programs refer to Storing a Program on page 5 78 and Editing and Deleting Programs on page 5 80 5 44 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Programming Frequently Used Operations The following settings can be stored in a program e Destination fax number e Polling e Dual Page Scan e Resolution and exposure Auto dial keys one touch or group keys are used to store the destination fax number A full number cannot be entered using the numeric keys When storing a broadcast transmission or serial polling operation in a program up to 100 destination fax num bers can be stored NOTES A program differs from a timer transmission in that it is not cleared from memory after transmission takes place A program thus allows you to repeatedly pe
80. original size and selected copy ratios 10 Make all other desired settings such as exposure paper size and number of copies and then press the COLOUR COPY START 9000 or BLACK COPY START O key To cancel this function touch the CANCEL key or the XY ZOOM key again as in step 3 on page 2 33 or step 5 on page 2 34 This must be done before you touch OK in step 8 Special Papers Special papers including transparency film postcards and envelopes must be fed through the Bypass Tray 1 Place the original in the DADF tray or on the document glass pages 2 4 to 2 10 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 35 Copier Operation 2 36 NOTES 2 Load the special paper in the Bypass Tray See pages 1 29 and 1 30 for the specifications of paper that can be used in the Bypass Tray For the paper loading instructions see Loading paper in the Bypass Tray on page 1 23 3 Touch the More key in the Paper Select display and then select the Bypass Tray or 2 TA Boo E Select the type of paper that you inserted in the Bypass Tray Touch the OK key Make all other desired settings such as exposure or the number of copies and press the COLOUR COPY START 00 or BLACK COPY START O key If you placed the original on the document glass set the output to Sort you must touch the READ END key after all pages of the original have been scanned step 7 on page
81. originals The document glass cannot be used Using the Document Glass Open the document glass cover and place the docu ment face down on the document glass Gently close the cover Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 11 Fax Unit NOTE Do not place any objects under the original size detector plate Closing the document glass cover with an object underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size Regardless of the size of the original place the original on the left side of the docu ment glass Align the original with the document glass scale and centering mark Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as shown below Document glass scale Document glass scale p gt mark Checking the Size of a Loaded Original When a standard size original is placed the origi C nal size is automatically detected automatic origi nal detection function and displayed in the top half of the ORIGINAL key Check the key to make sure that the original size has been correctly D detected AUTO appears when the automatic original detection function is operating Displays the original size If a non standard size original is placed or if you wish to change the scanning size fol low the steps below to manually set the original scanning size NOTE Standard sizes that can be detected are as follows A5 B5 B5R A4 A4R B4 A3
82. page 1 23 Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color m Paper Size Paper Selection 210 x 297 mm Paper Source fas JAutoSelect oo Custome Paper Type m Fit To Paper Size l Fit To Page Tray Status Prin aa hs Output Center Tray x m Image Orientation Portrait Different Paper C Landscape Rotate 180 degrees Transparency Inserts Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 9 Printer Operation 7 Click the OK button in the Print window in Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 or the Print button in Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Printing in colour The procedure for printing a document in colour is explained here using WordPad as an example If you do not have any documents created in WordPad create a docu ment that can be used for test printing To print in colour set the Color Mode setting to Color Both colour and black and white documents will be printed using Y yellow M magenta C cyan and Bk black toner 1 This is a standard accessory program in Windows 1 Open a document created in WordPad 2 Select Print from the File menu of WordPad The Print window appears Document WordPad File Edit View Inger Fe Hew Ctrl Open Ctrl 0 Save Ctrl 5 Save As Print Ctrl P Print Preview Page Setup Recent File Send Exit Print window in Windows Me 21
83. page 4 21 and are normally included in the ABC index Two types of indexes are available the ABC index and group indexes custom directories Group indexes allow you to assign any index name to the destination for easy search ing Six group indexes are available and a name up to six characters long can be assigned to each Click Custom Directory in the menu frame of the Web page to display the following screen Group index names can be programmed and edited in this screen Enter names for indexes 1 through to 6 and then click Submit If you wish to change a pre viously programmed name enter the new name and save it For information on grouping destinations in a group index see the appropriate pages for programming the transmission methods For information on switching between the ABC index and group indexes see page 4 22 NOTE You can also store indexes in the Custom Directory from the touch panel of the machine page 4 54 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 17 Network Scanner Operation Protecting Information Programmed in the Web Page Passwords Passwords can be set to restrict Web page access and protect settings Note that it is not necessary to set passwords the network scanner functionality can also be used without passwords A password can be set for the administrator and passwords can be set for each user If you use a user password to access the Web page you will be able to establish edit and delete destin
84. poor Try the transmission image is distorted due to thunder or another again reason Were the resolution and Check the resolution and Selecting Resolution exposure settings suitable exposure settings and Exposure Settings on pages 5 14 and 5 16 Transmission does Is the machine s clock set to Set the clock to the cor Operation procedure not take place atthe the correct time rect time common to all custom specified time settings on page 1 39 5 100 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Problems and Solutions pes ee Sn ie Printing does not take place after reception A received image prints out blank The received image is faint The received image is distorted White or black lines appear in the trans mitted image A dial tone is not heard through the speaker A ringing sound is not made Telephone Does a message appear in the display instructing you to add toner or paper Printing is not possible Was the wrong side of the original scanned in the trans mitting machine Is the original faint Were line conditions poor due to thunder or another reason Is the document glass dirty Is the volume set to low Has the ringer volume been turned off Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide When an Alarm Sounds and a Warning Message Is Displayed on page 5 98 Restore printing capabil ity as instructed by the display message Print ing will begin Check
85. program If you do not select a sender when sending an image the default sender information stored with the key operator program Default sender set is automatically sent page 4 67 1 Click Sender in the menu frame of the Web page Image Send Management e Destination e Netwo cannin o Setup o Custom Director 2 Click Add under New Sender The sender programming screen appears INew Sender Add iMi Sender List Sender Name 3 Enter the name and e mail address of the new sender Be sure to click Submit after entering this information Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing a Custom Directory Editing and deleting programmed sender s information 1 Click Sender in the menu frame of the Web page Image Send Management e Destination o E mail o ETP o Desktop o Group e Sender e Netwo cannin Setup Custom Directo 2 Click the sender that you wish to edit or delete from the Sender List menu so that it is highlighted and then click Edit or Delete If you clicked Edit edit the information in the same way Sender List that you initially programmed it and then click Add to Sender Name save your changes If you clicked Delete a message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion Click Yes to delete Edit Delete Storing a Custom Directory Programmed destinations appear as one touch keys in the Address directory screen of the touch panel
86. required to connect the tele Kingdom f phone line cable to the wall tele A Adapter phone socket as shown in the L illustration eg at Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 1 Fax Unit Fax power switch When using the machine be sure to keep the fax power switch turned on at all times The fax power switch must be turned on to receive faxes at night or send timer trans mission faxes at night Fax power switch Settings and programming Information about settings and programming that are required before the fax function ality can be used is located in Points to Check and Program After Installation on page 5 3 of this manual Please read this section and perform the required settings and programming Lithium battery A lithium battery inside the machine keeps key operator program settings for the fax function in memory When the battery dies settings and programmed information will be lost Be sure to keep a written record of the settings and programmed information Refer to page 5 89 The life of the lithium battery is approximately 5 years if the machine power switch and fax power switch are kept continually off Other information lf a thunderstorm occurs we recommend that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet Information will be retained in memory even if the power cord is unplugged Important Safety Information e If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you shou
87. result in skewed feeding or misfeeds Paper in AB system Paper in inch system A6R A3W 5 1 2 x8 1 2 12 x18 Xerox standard paper 80g m2 21 Ibs Plain Restrictions on paper Paper other than Xerox stan 64 to 105g m2 or 17 to 28 Ibs dard paper Recycled coloured pre punched pre printed and letterhead papers must conform to the same conditions as above In the High Capacity Feeder only A4 size paper can be used when using AB sizes and only 8 1 2 x 11 can be used when using inch sizes More information on special media that can be used The following restrictions apply to special media The use of incorrect media may result in fusing problems weak adhesion of toner to paper or toner smudging when rubbed skewed feeding misfeeds or other failures ae ae paper sizes from AGR to A3W 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 to 12 x 18 paper weights from 106 to 200 g m2 28 to 54 Ibs can be used heavy paper 1 Postcards can be used Heavy Do not use folded postcards picture postcards or postcards with a paper coated front These may cause misfeeds or a dirty printed image Special paper 2 For paper sizes from A6R to A3W 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 to 12 x 18 paper a weights from 201 to 300 g m2 54 to 80 Ibs can be used Transparency film Use Xerox recommended transparencies Applicable standard envelopes COM 10 Monarch DL C5 Envelopes Envelopes can only be fed from the Bypass Tray Applicable paper stock weight for env
88. s Add Printer Status Ready _ Print to file Location Comment Find Printer Page Range all Number of copies i E O Pages 1 65535 1 2 3 Enter either a single page number or a single GH pi pi page range For example 5 12 3 In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 click the Properties button In Windows 2000 click the displayed tab In Windows XP Server 2008 click the Preferences button NOTE For detailed explanations of the following settings see Setting the Printer Driver Properties on page 3 15 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 13 Printer Operation To print using the two sided printing function or the Saddle Stitch Finisher select these options in the following window Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color Copies m User Settings fi Factory Defaults ti M Collate puma Document Style le 1 Sided C 2 Sided Book 2 Sided Tablet Tiled Pamphlet Finishing Binding Edge I No Offset N Up Printing fu D Job Control J Border J Auto Job Control review C 2 Sided Tablet To use the saddle stitch function select Pamphlet Style and then set Staple to 2 Staples in the Finishing field f Pamphlet Style 4 Click the Paper tab Make sure that the paper size is correct Next configure the Paper Selection settings Auto Se
89. scanned image range is on the opposite side of the selected image range Cause The original was placed with the left and right sides reversed Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 57 Network Scanner Operation solution Place the original in the correct orientation Refer to page 2 4 The received image data cannot be opened Cause The viewer program used by the recipient does not support the format of the received image data Solution Try selecting a different file type TIFF JPEG or PDF and or a different compression format NONE MEDIUM G3 or HIGH G4 when sending the image data Refer to page 4 38 The recipient does not receive transmitted data Cause An incorrect destination was selected Otherwise there is a mistake in the information stored for the destination e mail address or FTP server information Solution Select the correct destination and make sure the correct information is stored for the destination Refer to page 4 10 If delivery by e mail Scan to E mail is unsuccessful an error message such as Undelivered Message may be sent to the designated administrator s e mail address This information may help you determine the cause of the problem The recipient does not receive data sent by e mail Scan to E mail Cause A limit has been set in the Maximum size of e mail attachments of the key operator program for the maximum size of an image file that can be sent using Scan to E mail the
90. see page 1 14 The DADF can be used to automatically feed originals for continuous copying Both sides of two sided sheet originals can be scanned without having to manually turn the originals over This feature is convenient for making copies of a large number of origi nals Acceptable originals When the DADF is used up to 40 originals of the same size can be set in the feeder maximum stack thickness of 4 mm 11 64 or 30 originals of weight 90 g m2 24 lbs Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 3 Copier Operation Size and weight of acceptable originals A5 or Original size eee A3 or bce ALOE 148 x 210 mm 297 x 420 mm Weight thickness i SD 56 m or 15 Ibs 90 m or 24 Ibs g m Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 m Notes on use of the DADF e Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges Use of originals out of the specified range may cause an original misfeed e Before loading originals into the DADF tray be sure to remove any staples or paper clips e If originals have damp spots from correction fluid ink or glue from pasteups be sure they are dried before they are fed If not the interior of the DADF or the doc ument glass may be soiled e To prevent incorrect original size detection original misfeeds or smudges on cop ies use the following as a guide for feeding originals Transparency film tracing paper carbon paper thermal paper or originals printed with therma
91. see page 1 41 for a table that shows correspondences between numeric values and fonts Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 47 Printer Operation Printing from the Operation Panel This section explains the job retention function and other functions that enable printing to be executed from the machine s operation panel Hold Job List If Hold After Print Hold Before Print or Proof Print operation is performed on the computer print data will be held as a hold job A maximum of 99 jobs can be held Print data held by this function will not be erased even if the main switch is turned off If the number of jobs exceeds 99 the job is processed as follows e If Hold After Print is executed Printing will be executed but the job will not be held A notice page will be printed See page 3 65 e If Hold Before Print is executed Printing will not be executed and the job will not be held A notice page will be printed See page 3 65 e If Proof Print is executed Printing of one set will be executed but the job will not be held A notice page will be printed See page 3 65 If the above error occurs and the Xerox Print Status Monitor has been installed the error message will appear in the Xerox Print Status Monitor 1 Press the PRINT key to display the printer basic screen 3 48 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Hold Job List 2 Select the desired data Print Hold Job List To switch the screen touch
92. send an image allowing you to select the destination Click here Q sack QJ x a A P Search Pe Favorites media 4 2 ee Ki Lag rel Address http 13 138 24 206 WorkCentre C226 System information Image Send Management e Destination o E mail FIP o Desktop o Group e Sender e Netw scanr o Setup o Custom Directory Device Setup e Information e Passwords e Log o Status Message o Alerts Message Network Setup e Network Card e Services e LDAP Heip JPE a Network Scanning Setup Custom Director Enable Scanner Delivery to Scan to E mail Scan to FTP amp Scan to Desktop Advanced Setup CO Enable User Authentication User Authentication Server Select the items used for authentication Login Name Password E mail Address Login Name Password File Naming Sender Name Date amp Time O Session Page Counter CO Unique Identifier E mail Subject Scanned image from WorkCentre C226 Submits ws UL v E mail Refer to page 4 11 FTP Refer to page 4 12 Group Refer to page 4 14 For detailed information on setting up editing and deleting destinations refer to Help 4 10 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting Up Destination Information Storing destinations for Scan to E mail Click E mail in the menu frame of the Web page to store destinations Use this screen to enter the e mail addresses of destinations for Scan to E mail
93. shows switching keys how many screens are left Touch the keys to move through the screens CONDITION This displays the condition settings screen which is used to set various conditions SETTINGS ABC GROUP Touch this key to switch between the alphabetical index and the group index Index keys One touch key destinations are stored on each of these index cards alphabetical index or group index Touch this key to switch between the indexes Group indexes make it possible to store one touch keys by group with an assigned name for easy reference This is done with the custom settings refer to pages 5 68 and 5 74 Frequently used one touch key destinations can be stored on the FRE QUENT USE card for convenient access NOTE The screen shown above is the alphabetical address directory If desired the initial screen can be set to the group address directory Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 9 Fax Unit Originals that Can Be Faxed Original sizes NOTE n table below width is the first measurement and length is the second Minimum original size Maximum original size Using the DADF A5 210 mm x 148 mm 297 mm x 800 mm 8 1 2 x 5 1 2 11 x 31 1 2 A5R 148 mm x 210 mm Long documents can be loaded Using the document 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 297 mm x 432 mm glass 11 x 17 NOTE Originals that are not a standard size A5 B5 B5R A4 A4R B4 A3 5 1 2 x8 1 2 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 8 1 2 x14 11 x
94. sided originals 0 0 00 cee eee 2 21 Automatic two sided copying from the document glass 2 24 Exposure AGJUSIMENS 422 0224 0e ene baniak See Badioe Ana eos 2 25 Reduction Enlargement Zoom 000 eee 2 28 Automatic selection auto image 1 0 0 eee 2 28 Manal selecto sareen het ate ae eine oe ee ee 2 30 KY ZOOM ow tow oy Mets Gd eh ee dees Gee E ge re 2 33 Special PADO enra ce sto cee eee oe ho one eee a 2 35 Convenient Copy Functions 02000008 2 37 Special MOdCS cn 25cecedvednetunuw ead sal eus hebsataynevas 4 ede 2 37 Common operation procedure for using the special functions 2 38 WIG OIN SAT 0 8 5 5 duce at de ote hh ot Se ana lech aa nE he ae eae Byes 2 39 El Gaare Gackt Cees tne tied eee herent Camere aria ieee eee eae 2 41 DU AliDAGE CODY 6 a adv nu te See ne ate ne ee Se eee ah ee 2 42 CeCNWING a3 sano gas Bo eee oe tes cael ee eee eae ae 2 44 Transparency film with insert sheets 0000 e eee eee eee 2 45 FOV GSEs ig ets oe sate Gree Saeed oe Bae aw Oe eo ee ee eas 2 47 CODVING Onto a COVE sd2ecc cat stiu oe 2486 ebaten tates tees x2 2 47 Not copying onto ACOVEr 1 ees 2 48 BV TOVO Oe ft tcc 6 5a ceeds bb cea hb pede Gated eek 2 50 Colour Adjustments Ment isas 22 65 fees cea bids See hoe ee ese Pe eS 2 51 AGB AGUS s 2ns7 Gl iweeues oles coed ee enewEe owe A 2 52 Dial ONeSS E oe ooh eee eee ore ace oe bee eee 2 53 SUPPIESS DaCKGr
95. storage register screen Highlighted storage register numbers are registers which already have programs stored Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 73 Copier Operation 4 Make all copier selections to be stored to Stns Ike sedas Ad beer N The number of copies cannot be stored OK To Delete Press Cancel Special Modes The selected settings will be stored under the register number selected in step 3 If a number key is selected in step 3 that has already been programmed A setting confirmation screen will appear To replace the existing program with the new program touch the STORE key and continue from step 4 If you do not wish to replace the existing program touch the CANCEL key to return to the screen of step 3 and select a different number key NOTE f overwriting of programmed copy settings has been prohibited in the key operator programs you will not be able to store a job program Recalling a job program 1 Press the P key 2 Touch the desired storage register number key to recall the job from memory When a number key is touched the selection screen will be closed and the stored job program will be recalled A number for which no job program has been stored can not be selected Job Programs Press Program Number Recall 2 74 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Job Program Memory 3 Set the number of copies as needed and press the COLOUR COP
96. than A3 11 x 17 and prints divided ENLARGEMENT images onto multiple sheets of copy paper for assembly into large composite copy page 2 68 PAMPHLET The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in proper order for eventual cen COPY _ ire stapling and folding into a booklet Two original pages are copied onto each side of copy paper Four pages are therefore copied onto one sheet page 2 71 A Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit and a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit are required for this function Single colour Produces copies with a selected single colour 1 Touch the SINGLE COLOUR key on the IMAGE EDIT screen Image Edit The SINGLE COLOUR setting screen will appear 4 5 2 60 When one of the keys is touched the single colour icon 1 will appear at the upper left of the screen to indicate that the single colour function Is turned on The number that appears with the icon indicates the selected colour and is the number on the key of the selected colour Touch the OK key inside OK key on the SINGLE COLOUR setting screen Return to the IMAGE EDIT menu screen Touch the OK key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Image Edit Menu About the steps that follow lf a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is bei
97. the 4 or L key Xerox001 Microsoft Word Xerox002 Microsoft PowerPd Xerox004 cost xls 3 Use the Numeric keys to enter the 5 digit password required only if a password has been set Be sure to enter the password that has been entered on de the computer If no password has been set this step is ee ee not needed Each time a number is entered will change to cost xls 4 Ensure that the desired number of prints is set The number of prints can be changed by using the or a key To delete the print data after completing the print job touch the PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA key To keep the print data after printing touch the PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA key To cancel printing and clear the print data touch the DELETE key If you select execution of the print job printing will start If another job is being printed your job will be stored as a print job Your job will be printed after preceding jobs are completed Operation is now complete Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 49 Printer Operation NOTE Key Operator Programs This section explains the key operator programs for the printer function Key operators should read this section to ensure correct use of the key operator programs Key operator programs related to the printer function are explained here For informa tion on key operator programs related to the copy function and network scanner func tion see Key
98. the address directory to display the condition setting screen The key operator program Default display settings can be used to set the display to show either the condition setting screen shown below or the Address directory screen page 4 21 when the IMAGE SEND key is pressed refer to page 4 66 4 18 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Protecting Information Programmed in the Web Page Passwords 1 When the optional Fax Unit is installed you will return to the condition setting screen of fax mode or scan fax mode depending on which mode was last selected If the condition setting screen of fax mode appears touch the key to switch to the base screen of scan fax mode NOTE For information on the parts of the unit and the operation panel that are used for network scanning refer to pages 1 13 and 1 14 For parts that are used for both network scanning and printing refer to page 3 40 Condition setting screen The display is initially set factory setting to show the following condition setting screen as the initial screen 5 Address SEE Ecce cee cree aaant ing Taneman T Directory WH pete ee ae i Scanner ai E 6 Message Messages appear here to indicate the current status of the machine display 2 ADDRESS This displays the Address Directory screen page 4 21 Touch this key when you wish DIRECTORY key to use a one touch key that has a destination or group programmed in it page 4 25
99. the desired key and perform the programming operation Refer to the pages indicated below for the operation you wish to perform Custom Settings Direct Address Program Ok Store INDIVIDUAL key PROGRAM key Store a one touch Store a program key page 5 68 page 5 78 GROUP key AMEND DELETE key Store a group key e One touch key page 5 74 page 5 72 e Group key page 5 76 Program page 5 80 NOTE One touch keys are used to select destinations for group dialing and programs If no one touch keys have been stored the GROUP key and PROGRAM key will be greyed out and it will not be possible to store a group or a program Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 67 Fax Unit Storing One Touch Keys Follow the steps below to store a one touch key after you have completed steps 1 through 4 beginning on page 5 66 1 Touch the NAME key The No that automatically appears is the lowest num ber from 001 to 500 that has not yet been programmed When NAME is touched the letter entry screen appears Enter up to 36 characters for the name Direct Address Individual No 001 Refer to page 5 90 for the procedure for entering letters 3 Touch a letter key The first letter initial of the name entered in step 1 is ini tially selected and is highlighted If you wish to change the letter touch a different letter key NOTE The initial you enter here determines the position of th
100. the memory became full will be cleared from memory If the memory becomes full while scanning the first page of a document the transmission job is automatically cancelled e The number of jobs that can be stored will depend on the number of pages in each job and the transmission conditions The number of storable jobs will increase if the optional expansion memory is installed If the receiving party is busy lf the receiving party is busy the transmission is temporarily cancelled and then auto matically re attempted after a brief interval two attempts are made at intervals of 3 minutes If you do not want the machine to re attempt the transmission press the JOB STATUS key and cancel the job see page 5 27 This setting can be changed with the key operator program lf a transmission error occurs lf an error occurs that prevents transmission or the receiving machine does not answer the call within 45 seconds then transmission is stopped and then automatically re attempted later two recall attempts are made at an interval of 1 minute Automatic recalling can be stopped by pressing the JOB STATUS key and cancelling as explained on page 5 26 This machine also supports error correction mode ECM and is set to resend any part of a fax that is distorted due to noise on the line The settings can be changed in the key operator programs See Call timer at mem ory sending and Recall in case of communication error
101. the set tings apply to the default file format settings Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 67 Network Scanner Operation e The ONE PAGE PER FILE YES NO setting is used to select how files are cre ated when multiple pages are scanned Select YES to have an individual file cre ated for each scanned page so that multiple files are created Select NO to have all scanned pages combined into a single file e The initial settings for the above programs are as follows e Black and white scanning File type PDF Compression mode HIGH G4 One page per file No e Colour scanning File type PDF Compression mode MEDIUM One page per file No Maximum size of e mail attachments To prevent the size of image files transmitted by Scan to E mail from becoming too large you can set a size limit lf the total size of the image files created by scanning the original exceeds the limit the image files are discarded The limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB The initial setting is 2 MB The limit cannot be disabled Scanner mode timeout after last scan If no action is taken after scanning an original from the document glass transmission of the original will begin automatically after the time set with this program The time can be set from 0 to 60 seconds in increments of 10 seconds When 0 is selected transmission begins immediately after scanning from the document glass ends The default setting is 60 seconds
102. this limit is exceeded the e mail will not be delivered to the recipient Even if there is no limit and your e mail is successfully delivered a large data file may take a long time to be received and place a heavy bur den on the recipient s network depending on the recipient s network Internet connec tion environment lf large image data files are repeatedly sent the resulting burden on the network may slow down the speed of other unrelated data transmissions and in some cases may even cause the mail server or network to go down The example images below will produce the following file sizes when scanned as A4 8 1 2 x 11 size originals File size of text original A File size of photo original B when scanned mesouten when scanned Black and white scanning Colour scanning LOWER Approx 26 KB Approx 300 KB Approx 1200 KB TIFF HIGH G4 format TIFF HIGH G4 format JPEG MEDIUM compression HIGHER Approx 43 KB Approx 700 KB Approx 3500 KB TIFF HIGH G4 format TIFF HIGH G4 format JPEG MEDIUM compression If multiple images are scanned the file size will be approximately Size of each image as indicated above x Number of images scanned Although the actual limitation depends on your network environment a general guide line for the maximum file size for Scan to E mail is 2000 KB In cases where you need to send multiple documents try such measures as lowering the resolution mode 4 62 Xerox Work
103. to Black Color Adjustment Euston Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 5 Printer Operation NOTE NOTE Print Priority lets you select whether priority is given to quality or soeed during printing page 3 38 Select the mode that is most suitable for your needs 5 If you need to adjust the black and white image quality print contrast perform the following step If you do not need to adjust the image quality go directly to step 6 To adjust the black and white image quality print contrast click the Color Adjustment button The following screen will appear Adjust the brightness and contrast in the Image field at left page 3 38 When finished go to step 6 Click the Paper tab Make sure that the paper size is correct Next configure the Paper Selection settings Auto Select is normally used for both Paper Source and Paper Type When you have completed the settings click the OK button to close the printer properties window Using the Bypass Tray When the paper source is set to the Bypass Tray be sure to set the paper size and paper type on the machine s operation panel This procedure is explained on page 1 23 7 Defaults olor Balance Saturation 50 g Bed Strength zi ki i Green Strength 50 Image s Brightness 50 Blue Strenath 50 aj El El Hi Contrast 50 aj E gt Click the OK button in the Pri
104. to display its setting screen Condition Settings Default Settings PCL Settings Detailed descriptions for configuration settings start on page 3 46 3 Touch the desired setting item on the screen and touch the OK key Default Settings To set another item repeat steps 2 and 3 4 To finish the setting operation touch the EXIT key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 45 Printer Operation Default settings The default settings are used to set specific print conditions for printing in an environ ment where the print driver is not used such as printing from MS DOS or from a com puter that does not have the provided print driver installed NOTE When some items can be set both in the printer driver and on the operation panel the values set in the printer driver override those set on the operation panel For items that can be set in the printer driver perform the settings in the printer driver The following settings are available Copies COPIES sets the number of print to make Default setting 1 The number of copies can be set from 1 to 999 Orientation ORIENTATION allows portrait orientation or landscape orientation to be selected for printing Default setting PORTRAIT PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE can be set Default paper size The paper size to be used for printing under normal conditions is set Printing will be performed on the specified size of paper unless otherwise specified
105. to the PRINT HOLD DATA key operator program printer for retention page 3 55 Password entry is Did you enter a password for the Password is needed when executing print requested retention function ing If the password is not known printing cannot be executed In some cases the Did you run out of paper during print When using the Bypass Tray it is recom printed image may ing mended that paper be placed vertically be rotated 90 degrees with Landscape Portrait respect to paper orientation orientation placed horizontally 4 in the Bypass Tray Colour documents Is the Color Mode setting set to Set the Color Mode to Color page 3 37 print in black and Color in the Color tab of the printer white driver Is the correct printer driver selected in Select the correct printer driver the software application Does the application support colour Read the application manual to see if colour printing printing is Supported Is the correct printer driver selected Select the correct printer driver Though selected in the software appli cation colour print ing does not take place The colour balance Is the Color Mode setting set to Set the Color Mode to Color page 3 37 cannot be adjusted Color in the Color tab of the printer driver 3 62 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Description of Setting Programs Additional information on selecting the paper type for the Byp
106. transport area fusing area and exit area Transport area 1 Open the upper side cover and check for a misfeed Push the lever upward and gently open the cover NOTE f paper is loaded in the Bypass Tray temporarily remove the paper and close the Bypass Tray before opening the side cover Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal NOTE The misfeed may have occurred inside the machine Check carefully and remove it 2 Gently close the upper side cover NOTE Even after clearing a misfeed paper may remain inside the machine on the transfer belt where it is not visible In this case after visible misfeeds are removed the paper on the transfer belt will be automatically moved to a position where it is visible and a misfeed will be indicated once again on the display Clear the misfeed as explained in Misfeed in the transfer unit step 3 on page 1 51 For this reason it may be necessary to perform the Misfeed in the transfer unit procedure twice Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 49 General Information Exit area Models with an exit tray attached to the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit Gently remove the misfed paper as shown in the illustra tion taking care not to tear the paper Models without the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit Gently remove the misfed paper as shown in the illustra tion taking care not to tear the paper Upper exit tray
107. when successively dialing fax numbers with the numeric keys Example XXXX NEXT ADDRESS XXXX Dial f Dial Cannot be omitted o XXXXNEXT ADDRES S One touch NEXT ADDRESS Qne touch Dial i f Can be omitted Can be omitted If desired you can use the key operator program to set the machine so that the NEXT ADDRESS key must always be touched 4 Touch the ADDRESS REVIEW key to display the list of destinations TTEA M When the ADDRESS REVIEW key is touched only the p editia entered and selected destinations are displayed ZAM aaaress Review Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 31 Fax Unit 5 Check the destinations When you have finished checking the destinations touch te the OK key to return to the screen of step 4 002 coxpe tos_ e If you wish to delete a destination touch the displayed one touch key A message will appear to confirm the AN Delete the Address deletion Touch YES and the destination will be deleted Rpueveniset from the destination list To cancel instead of deleting touch the NO key 6 Continue from step 7 of Basic Procedure for Sending Faxes page 5 19 NOTE To cancel a broadcast transmission To cancel a broadcast transmission when selecting destinations press the CLEAR ALL key To cancel after all steps of the transmission have been completed see Cancelling a Fax Transmission on page 5 27 Automatic Transmission at a Specified Time Timer Transm
108. window for selection of cover sheet settings Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions Transparency Inserts Select this setting when you wish to insert a different type of paper between pages Click this button to open the window for selection of transparency insert settings This cannot be selected when two sided printing the staple function or the punch function is selected Originals 4 3 Insert sheets Advanced settings PCL5c The following screen appears when the Advanced tab is selected The settings and buttons in this screen are explained below Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color Overlay No Overlay z Edit Image Quality Resolution Settings 600 dpi Graphics Mode HP GL 2 Margin Shift None bd J 5 i pr Page Protection Image Quality This item is used to select the Resolution Settings and Graphics Mode for printing Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 29 Printer Operation Resolution Settings select 300 dpi or 600 dpi Default setting 600 dpi Graphics Mode Select Raster or HP GL 2 Select Raster to print using raster graphics Select HP GL 2 to print using HP GL 2 commands Default setting HP GL 2 Margin Shift Use this setting to shift the document image to move the margin at the left right
109. with the operator of the transmitting machine Ask the other party to re send the document using a Suitable expo sure setting Ask the other party to send the document again Clean the document glass Pages 2 81 and 2 82 Set the speaker volume to medium or high Speaker volume set ting in the Fax Unit section of the Work Centre C226 System Administration Guide Set the ringer volume to low medium or high Speaker volume set ting in the Fax Unit section of the Work Centre C226 System Administration Guide 5 101 Fax Unit 5 102 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Symbols Numerics P key 1 15 1 sided copies 2 13 2 21 1 Tray Unit 1 12 loading paper 1 28 misfeed 1 52 specifications 1 29 256 MB Memory Kit 1 13 2 Sided Copy display 2 3 2 20 2 Tray Unit loading paper 1 29 misfeed 1 53 specifications 1 30 2 Up Pamphlet 3 17 3 Tray Unit 1 12 loading paper 1 28 misfeed 1 53 specifications 1 29 A A3 full bleed 2 59 2 66 A4 letter size auto change 3 55 ABC GROUP key 4 22 ACC C 1 15 acceptable originals 2 3 Account Number 3 25 account number 1 19 address control 1 38 address directory 5 22 ADDRESS DIRECTORY key 4 19 4 21 address directory screen 4 21 5 7 5 9 address review 5 7 5 31 ADDRESS REVIEW key 4 19 addresses disabling direct entry 4 69 storing 4 42 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Index Advanced tab PCL5c 3 29 PostScript 3
110. you change the size 8 To exit touch the OK key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 11 Copier Operation Using a Stored Original Size 1 Follow steps 1 to 2 of Storing or deleting an original size 2 Touch the original size key that you wish to use Recall Store Delete 3 Touch the OK key The stored original size is called up 2 12 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Normal Copying Basic Procedure for Making Copies This section explains the procedures for using basic copy functions including making normal copies and enlarging reducing copies Normal Copying This section describes the normal copying procedure Copying from the DADF NOTE Certain restrictions exist depending on the amount of memory installed and the copy settings See Copy mode output restrictions on page 2 16 and Guidelines for the number of scannable originals during sort copying on page 2 17 1 sided copies of 1 sided originals Original 1 Place the originals in the DADF tray pages 2 4 to 2 10 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 13 Copier Operation 2 14 2 Ensure that the 1 gt 1 Sided copy mode is selected Original Aol jus tme bupply 2 Sided Copy sex11 Qi ot sicea sxi 142 Sided C 1x17 _J292 sided C More rore i 3 Ensure that paper of the same size as the originals is automatically selected Note PTR he selected tray will be highlighted or the m
111. 1 23 Setting envelopes or postcardS 0 0 cee eee 1 26 Loading paper in the stand 1 Tray Unit 3 Tray Unit 1 28 Specifications stand 1 Tray Unit 3 Tray Unit 5 1 29 Loading paper in the Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit 1 29 specifications Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit 0000 1 30 Specifications for paper trayS 0 ce ee 1 30 More information on plain paper 0 0 0 cee ee 1 32 More information on special media that can be used 1 32 Paper that can be used for automatic two sided printing 1 33 Setting the paper type except the Bypass Tray 5 1 33 setting the paper size when an extra size is loaded 1 34 Setting the paper type and paper size in the Bypass Tray 1 35 GUS OMO EUN Senma eL eae n ae o tesa eeer eos ena epee ie 1 37 Operation procedure common to all custom settings 1 39 ADOULING SCUINGS 2 c2 5 5 54 ben eee eet ood as ey eee Pe eee 1 40 Replacing the Toner Cartridges 0 0 cee eens 1 42 SIGNING SUDPIGS 4 x 2245544265404 4s Poe teehee eee est BRR e eed 1 45 iv Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Proper Siola 2 40 chan idtudeanee as EAEAN E bn is 1 45 MISICCQ REMOVGl csdee0dueeee ene bees dade as detesee age a dee aa 1 46 Misfeed Removal Guidance 2 0 0 cee eee 1 47 Misfeed in the paper feed area 1 ec eee 1 47 Misfeed in
112. 17 can also be faxed Scanning area of original Note that the edges of an original cannot be scanned Area that cannot be scanned 2mm 2mm from the edges of the original Automatic reduction of faxed document lf the size width of the faxed document is greater than the receiving machine s paper size the size will be automatically reduced Faxed document Receiving machine s sya ipeat fae Ratio Area ratio width paper width A3 11 x17 B4 8 1 2 x14 B4 8 1 2 x14 0 78 1 0 64 A3 11 x17 A4 8 1 2 x11 AAR 8 1 2 x11 R dead A document can also be faxed without reducing its size In this case the left and right edges will not be transmitted 5 10 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Loading a Document Loading a Document A document can be loaded in the DADF or on the document glass Use the DADF when faxing a large number of sheet originals Use the document glass to fax originals that cannot be scanned using the DADF such as thick or thin sheet originals or bound Originals such as books Using the DADF 1 Lift the document glass cover and make sure a document is not placed on the document glass Gently close the cover 2 Adjust the document guides on the DADF tray to the width of the document 3 Align the edges of the document pages and then insert the stack in the DADF tray so that the first page is face up Insert the stack into the DADF tray until it stops NOTE Use the DADF for long
113. 2 23 Output location for copies on heavy paper 2 transparencies and envelopes Copies on these types of paper will be outout face up to the tray on the left side of the machine They cannot be delivered to the centre tray Face down delivery is not possible for these papers Colour adjustment menu As special functions of colour copying the following colour image adjustments are available page 2 51 e RGB ADJUST e SHARPNESS e SUPPRESS BACKGROUND e COLOUR BALANCE e BRIGHTNESS e INTENSITY Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Special Modes Convenient Copy Functions This chapter explains special purpose functions storing of copy settings and other convenient functions Please select and read sections of this chapter as needed Special Modes When the Special Modes tab on the main screen of copy mode is touched the SPE CIAL MODES screen containing several special function touch keys will appear These functions are shown below Touch the Special Modes tab Image Quality Reduce Enlarge Paper supply 2 Sided Copy Copy Output B B c o Ze ex _ 142 sided stapled Ge uxir 292 sided Juncol lated Jore C_J re CC Jiere CC os LSS Ly Transparency Inserts MARGIN SHIFT Use this to shift the image on the copy to create binding margins page 2 39 key ERASE key Use this to erase peripheral shadows that occur when making copies of books and other thi
114. 23 5 8 gt E 60cm 23 5 8 A small amount of ozone is produced within the copier during operation The emission level is insufficient to cause any health hazard NOTE The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0 1 pom 0 2 mg m calculated as an 8 hr time weighted average concentration However since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor it is advisable to place the copier in a ventilated area Moving this machine Pull out the four handles as shown below grasp them firmly and keep the machine horizontal while moving it Left side Before lifting the machine fold Before lifting the machine fold up the exit tray and tape it up the Bypass Tray and tape it securely to the machine securely to the machine CAUTION Two people are required to lift and carry this machine If the machine has been placed on a stand 1 Tray Unit The stand 1 Tray Unit is on casters for moving Unlock the casters and the adjusters of the stand 1 Tray Unit and gently move the machine taking care to steady it to prevent it from toppling For locking and unlocking the casters and the adjusters see page 1 4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 3 General Information If the machine is to be left unused for a long time If the machine is to be left unused for a month or longer follow the procedure on page 1 27 to release the pressure on th
115. 3 54 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Description of Setting Programs Description of Setting Programs The key operator programs related to the printer function are explained here Printer settings Default settings These programs are used to adjust the settings of various printer functions Prohibit notice page printing This program is used to disable notice page printing Turn on this program when you do not want the machine to print the notice page explained in Notice Page Printing on page 3 65 Prohibit test page printing This program is used to disable test page printing When the program is turned on the PRINTER TEST PAGE in the user settings cannot be printed See page 1 41 A4 letter size auto change If this program is set and printing onto 8 1 2 x 11 size paper is selected but not avail able the printer will automatically substitute A4 size paper in place of 8 1 2 x 11 paper if A4 paper is available 8 1 2 x 11 paper cannot be automatically selected in place of A4 NOTE When 8 1 2 x 11 size is specified for a document attached to an E mail that has been transmitted from a foreign country and A4 size paper is not installed in the printer printing cannot be done without operator intervention If this program is set printing will be executed without intervention if a paper tray is loaded with A4 paper Delete the print hold data Use this program to manually delete all stored data from the hard
116. 30 Resolution Settings 3 30 image quality black and white setting print contrast 3 6 colour setting print contrast 3 9 3 12 printing 3 29 3 38 image quality adjustment 2 25 image rotation 5 25 IMAGE SEND key 1 14 4 18 5 5 Image Send Management 3 42 image sending scanning 4 23 index keys 4 22 initial file format setting 4 67 initial resolution Scanner 4 66 initialize settings 3 59 insert sheets for transparencies 2 45 installation requirements 1 1 intensity 2 52 2 58 interface settings enable network port 3 56 enable parallel port 3 56 enable USB port 3 56 I O timeout 3 57 port switching method 3 56 INTERRUPT key 2 2 2 77 Inverter Unit 1 13 misfeed 1 53 IP address 3 64 4 60 IP address setting 3 57 J jam staple 1 63 Job Compression 3 32 job list 1 17 Job Name 3 26 job program deleting 2 75 recalling 2 74 storing 2 73 job program memory 2 73 job queuing 3 56 JOB STATUS key 1 15 job status screen 1 17 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Index K key operator programs A4 letter size auto change 3 55 custom setting 1 38 default paper type for Bypass Tray 3 56 delete the print hold data 3 55 job queuing 3 56 output method when memory is full 3 55 printing 3 50 prohibit notice page printing 3 55 prohibit test page printing 3 55 restoring factory default settings 3 59 scanning 4 63 4 65 keyboard select 1 38 1 41 L list print 1 37 1 41 loaded original checking size of 5 12 loading docu
117. 44 USING a Frogak aaier nr ree Gad a ba hee od ee aAa 5 45 Transferring Received Faxes to Another Machine When Printing Is Not Possible Forwarding Function 005 5 46 Using the Transier FUNCOM venes dude doen dee eee wat aes 5 47 Transmission Using F Codes 0000e een eeuee 5 49 Transmission Between Machines Supporting F codes 5 49 Memory Boxes and Sub Addresses Passcodes Required for F code Transmission 00 00 eee eee es 5 49 Entering Dialing a Fax Number with a Sub Address and Passcode 0c cece ee ees 5 51 Creating a Memory Box for F Code Transmission 5 52 F Gode Polling MEMOlY 0 464655 68 04 eee owe WA SR ON OES eS WE we RSs 5 52 Using F Code Polling Memory 0 0 0 cece ee eee 5 53 Procedure for F Code Polling 2 0 cece eee ee eee 5 54 F Code Confidential Transmission 2 0 0 0 00 eee 5 56 xii Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide F Code Confidential Transmission 000 eee eee eee eee 5 57 Printing a Document Received to an F Code Confidential Memory Box 0 0 cc ee eee 5 57 F Code Relay Broadcast Transmission 0 000 cece eee eee 5 59 Using the F Code Relay Broadcast Function 005 5 60 Using the F Code Relay Request Function 0000 ee 5 61 Convenient Methods of Use 00000 eee 5 61 Using an Extension Phone 2 0 0 cee eee eee eas 5 61 Sen
118. 6 User Guide 2 31 Copier Operation 5 Ensure that the desired paper size has been automatically selected based on the selected copy ratio or select another size as needed 6 Touch the OK key 7 Use the numeric keys to set the desired number of copies oo If you are only making a single copy the copy can be m ite made with the copy number display showing 0 a Lo fofi Up to 999 can be set Use the C clear key to cancel an entry if a mistake has been made 8 Press the COLOUR COPY START 9000 or BLACK COPY START 00 If you placed the original on the document glass set the output to Sort you must touch the READ END key after all pages of the original have been scanned step 7 on page 2 23 To return the ratio to 100 To return the ratio setting to 100 touch the 100 key in the Copy Ratio display 2 32 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Reduction Enlargement Zoom XY Zoom The XY ZOOM feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed independently The preset ratios maximum 400 minimum 25 can be selected with the enlarge ment and reduction keys In addition the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 50 to 200 in increments of 1 NOTE When the DADF is used the ratio can only be set within the range 50 to 200 Example Selecting 100 for the length and 50 for the width Original Copy A4 gt A 1 Place the original in the DADF tray o
119. 64 The print area of A3 wide paper is the entire page excluding a margin of approximately 3 mm 1 8 at each edge Approx 4 3 mm 11 64 Paper size Printable area The print area is the entire page excluding a margin of 4 3 mm 11 64 at each edge The actual print area may vary depending on the printer driver used and the type of software application The print area of A3 wide paper is the entire page excluding a margin of approxi mately 3 mm 1 8 at each edge 3 66 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide PCL symbol set No EE EE EA NIO NO a eek O Print Area No symbolset w SS 0 windowsa tiana 32 Windows Bac o3 These symbol sets are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 67 Printer Operation 3 68 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 Network Scanner Operation Introduction An option is available that enables the machine to be used as a network scanner This section explains only the network scanner functions of the product For information on loading paper replacing toner cartridges clearing paper misfeeds handling peripheral units and other copier related information please refer to Chapter 1 General Infor mation and Chapter 2 Copier Operation NOTES Before using the network scanner feature several settings must be established from the Web page These settin
120. 9 Fax Unit 5 40 Printing document data in the Public Box To check a document that is stored in the public box follow these steps to print it out If no documents have been stored the PUBLIC BOX key will be greyed out 1 In fax mode touch the SPECIAL MODES key and then touch the MEMORY BOX key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen we ee ii ee O Special Modes f 7 2 Touch the PRINT DATA key Polling Memory Print Data 3 Touch the PUBLIC BOX key Touching the CANCEL key will return you to the screen of step 2 4 Press the BLACK COPY START key The message screen appears and the Public Box data is stored as a print job Ga To cancel printing touch the CANCEL key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Transmission and Reception Using the Polling Function Deleting document data from the Public Box This procedure is used to delete document data from the Public Box when it is no longer needed 1 In fax mode touch the SPECIAL MODES key and then touch the MEMORY BOX key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen Ty 7 og 7 E i a OREA o Special Modes f 2 Touch the DELETE DATA key Memory Delete Data 3 Touch the PUBLIC BOX key The message screen appears All data in the Public Box is d
121. A LITHIUM PRIMARY MEMORY BACK UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL XEROX DEALER OR AUTHORISED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSIS TANCE IN DISPOSING OF THIS BATTERY This product utilizes tin lead solder and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal or recycling information please contact your local authorities or the Elec tronics Industries Alliance www eia org Introduction To gain the maximum benefits in using this product it is recommended that the user read this section to become familiar with all the features and functions of the basic product and the precautionary information contained in the manual This product is a high speed Digital full colour copier printer that can be expanded to become multifunctional through the installation of optional peripheral devices The product can be extended to include printer network scanning or network printing capa bilities This section describes the basic use of the product as a copier and does not contain information on using any of the optional peripheral devices Separate opera tion manuals are included with each of the optional peripheral devices Refer to these manuals for their operation Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 5 General Information 1 6 Original and paper sizes This machine allows use of standard sizes in both the AB a
122. Bones Ad era toe ee ees ae ee 2 83 3 Printer Operation Basic Printing Procedures 000ee eee eenaee 3 1 Setting the Printer Drivers eruten ean AESA EPA eee eee 3 1 Printer driver settings in Windows selecting and setting print conditions 3 1 Windows 96 98 Me rers rensa irria 06 4048 ee te tet nee ou dade 3 1 Windows NT4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 20000 cee 3 2 Selecting a Color Mode setting 0 0 cee eee 3 2 Using the Help file to view explanations of the settings 3 3 Opening Help in Windows 0 0c cee eee 3 3 Printing in black and WN 43 05 we write 6 haw Eee at eh es ages 3 4 Automatic switching between colour and black and white 3 7 Foc MUNCMM COWIE sarasa Serhan Ge eA eee os 3 10 Printing using optional peripheral equipment 0005 3 12 Setting the Printer Driver Properties 5 3 15 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide vii Selecting Printing FUNCHONS sses it cihd set eet Bey dee Pts dive cet Se he oe woh wes ea Rane SS 3 15 Frequently used settings 4420022280 eed wooden eaw dee ew eats dn eae 3 16 Saddle SiC MHNCHON 0 diet terea a bau Re ieee ere a ald aes 3 20 Staple Sont ModE 2 s20 o46Ge snd Hus Beha EEA see ae ee 3 20 Hole punching only if a Hole Punch Module is installed 3 22 OTISCHIMOGG 4 cae Saeed a4 oe eee ee ee ee ae 3 22 Papel SCumMOSii tio ouieeeed bund awa eS het eee aes lt 3 3 26 Advanc
123. COPY START O If the C key is pressed while originals are being scanned scanning will stop If copying had already started copying and scanning will stop after the original in progress is output to the original exit area In these cases the copy quantity will be reset to 0 NOTE The 1 sided to 1 sided copying mode is set as the default in the initial settings Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 15 Copier Operation Copy mode output restrictions No added memory Memory added 128 MB or 256 MB Two Original paper size sort Group sort Group sided copying mode Output mode Up to A3 11 x 17 Colour copying ne A3W 12 x 18 sided copying Black and Up to A3 11 x 17 white copying A3W 12 x 18 Up to A4 8 1 2 x 11 Auto Colour copying B4 A3 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 matic we aaa ASW 12 x 18 copying Blackand Upto A3 11 x 17 O O white copying A3W 12 x 18 x O Copying possible using selected settings gt Copying not possible The DADF cannot be used to copy an A3W 12 x 18 size original 2 16 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Output mode Colour copying Black and white copying Normal Copying Guidelines for the number of scannable originals during sort copying When using sort copy mode the number of pages shown in the table below will all be scanned into memory and the set number of copies made Note that the numbers shown below are
124. Centre C226 User Guide Key Operator Program List Key Operator Programs This section explains the key operator programs that are related to the network scan ner feature of the machine For key operator programs that are related to the printer and copy functions of the machine refer to the Chapter 3 Printer Operation and WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide Key Operator Program List Program name Network scanner settings Default display settings The number of direct address keys displayed setting Initial resolution setting scan complete sound setting Default sender set Compression mode at broadcasting Initial file format setting Maximum size of e mail attachments Scanner mode timeout after last scan Default exposure settings Disable of address direct entry Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Page 4 63 Network Scanner Operation Using the Key Operator Programs Follow the steps below to use the key operator programs 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key Key Operator Programs 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the five digit key operator code number Each time a number is entered the dashes in the dis play will change to asterisks Key Operator Code 4 Touch the N W SCANNER SETTINGS key depending on the program you wish to use N W Scanner f Settings ey Operator ode Change f Product Key 5 Make desired settings for the selected program Detaile
125. Colour deviations occur The displayed paper size differs from the loaded paper size When printing ona special size of paper part of the printed image is missing When printing ona special size of paper using the Bypass Tray part of the printed image is missing When printing in colour character and colour deviations appear The display of the tray s paper size slide differs from the paper size in the tray The paper size setting is not set correctly in the paper tray settings of the custom settings The paper size is not set correctly in the special size settings for the Bypass Tray Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Perform colour registration as explained in the Key Operator Programs section of the WorkCentre C226 System Adminis tration Guide When you change the paper size in the tray be sure to adjust the paper size slide on the tray to the new paper size page 1 22 When using a special size of paper set the correct paper size in millimetres in the paper tray settings of the custom settings see page 1 33 If the paper size setting is not correct part or all of the image may not print this depends on the options installed When using a special size of paper set the correct paper size in millimetres as explained in step 6 on page 1 37 If the paper size setting is not correct part or all of the image may not print this depends on the options installed 1 57 General I
126. DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 To cancel the CENTRING function touch the CENTRING key again on the SPECIAL MODES screen step1 Transparency film with insert sheets When copying onto transparency film blank insert sheets can be placed between transparent sheets Example Inserting insert sheets between transparencies Originals 1 sided e Insert sheets cannot be copied on in any mode 7 e This mode can be selected only in the 1 sided to 1 sided and 2 sided to 1 sided modes i e A multiple number of copies cannot be selected in this mode a 1 e Transparency film must be fed from the Bypass Originals 2 sided Tray insert sheets Insert sheets must be the same size A4 or A4R 8 1 2 x 11 or 8 1 2 x 11 R as the transpar ency film For two sided originals For best results use Xerox recommended trans this is only possible when fil using a DADF parency tilim Before performing the following procedure touch the More key in the Output dis play of the main screen of copy mode to display the OUTPUT settings screen page 2 18 and then touch the LEFT TRAY key to set the output tray to the left tray If the optional Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed touch the FINISHER TRAY key to set the output tray to the finisher tray 1 Touch the TRANSPARENCY I
127. DF tray of the DADF The document glass cannot be used for this function NOTES During cover copying the stream feeding mode will not function even if it is turned on by the program e During cover copying the pamphlet copy function page 2 71 and the saddle stitch pamphlet staple function will not operate To cancel the COVERS function select the COVERS function again and touch the CANCEL key step 2 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 49 Copier Operation B W reverse Black and white are reversed in the copy to create a negative image This function can only be used for black and white copying NOTE Original BIW reverse COPY Originals with large black areas which use a large amount of toner can be printed with black white reverse to reduce toner rb A consumption 1 Touch the key to switch to the second SPECIAL MODES screen 2 Touch the B W REVERSE key in the second SPECIAL MODES screen The B W REVERSE key will be highlighted to indicate that the function is selected In addition the B W reverse aye icon will appear in the upper left hand corner of the lt screen 3 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow lf a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 To cancel the B W reverse function touch the B W REVERSE key in th
128. Default setting A4 or 8 1 2X11 A3W A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 11X17 8 1 2X14 8 1 2X13 8 1 2X11 7 1 4X10 1 2 5 1 2X8 1 2 8K or 16K can be set Default output tray The output tray to be used for printing under normal conditions is set Printed sheets will be output to the specified tray unless otherwise specified by application software Default setting CENTRE TRAY The trays that can be selected depend on installation of peripheral devices 3 46 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Making Configuration Settings Default paper type The paper type to be used for printing under normal conditions is set Printing will be performed on the specified type of paper unless otherwise specified Default setting PLAIN PLAIN PRE PRINTED RECYCLED LETTER HEAD PRE PUNCHED or COLOUR can be set PCL settings PCL symbol set setting This setting is used to select which country s characters are used for certain of the symbols in the character code table of the PCL symbol set Use this setting when you need to select symbols that differ by country Default setting 1 Roman 8 See page 3 67 for the symbol set settings You can also print the PCL SYMBOL SET LIST in LIST PRINT see page 1 41 for a table that shows correspondences between numeric values and symbol sets PCL font settings This setting is used to select the font for printing Default setting 1 Courier You can also print the PCL FONT LIST in LIST PRINT
129. Enter a maximum of 6 characters for the index name Use the key to clear the displayed name and then enter the desired name When finished touch the OK key The new name appears in the screen of step 3 5 If you wish to program another index name repeat steps 3 and 4 When finished touch the OK key Printing Programmed Information You can print out lists of the one touch keys and group keys that have been stored in the machine 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key GAL Je AL BELJ AR 2 Touch the LIST PRINT key List Print Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 55 Network Scanner Operation 4 Touch the key of the list you wish to print PROCESSING PRINT DATA appears in the message display and printing begins To cancel printing touch the CANCEL key NOTE f you attempt to print a list when no data exists a warning message will appear 4 56 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Printing Programmed Information Troubleshooting lf a problem or question arises try to solve the situation using the following information before contacting your authorised Xerox dealer The image cannot be scanned Cause The original is loaded upside down Solution If you are using the document glass the original must be placed face down If you are using the DADF the original must be inserted face up A moire stripe pattern appears on the scanned image Cause A slight amount of moir sometimes appears when
130. Guide Normal Copying 4 The image to be copied onto the second side of 2 sided copies can be inverted so that the resultant 2 sided copies are in the correct orientation for binding at the top For top binding touch the BINDING CHANGE key on the 2 sided copy selection screen 5 Touch the OK key Make selections and proceed as in steps 3 to 6 on pages 2 14 and 2 15 Copying from the document glass When copying originals which cannot be fed from the DADF such as thick originals open the document cover and copy the originals from the document glass NOTE Certain restrictions exist depending on the amount of memory installed and the copy settings See Copy mode output restrictions on page 2 16 and Guidelines for the number of scannable originals during sort copying on page 2 17 1 sided copies of 1 sided originals Original NOTE Do not place any objects under the original size detector because they may damage it or the original size may not be detected properly Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 21 Copier Operation 2 22 How to place the original Place the original in the appropriate position shown below according to its size gt Centre the original on the centring scale Original scale Original scale Centring scale Centring scale KA Cis Sided 3 Ensure that paper of the same size as the original is automatically selected set on the Original tab See note
131. Guide Part Names and Functions Press to display the current job status See page 1 17 Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel or to set key operator programs See page 1 37 Use to select the number of copies and to make numerical entries for setting opera tions This is used when the copy network scan and fax functions are used If the audit ing mode has been set press this key to close an open account after finishing a copy job For setting of the auditing mode see page 1 18 This is used as a program key when using the copy function and to dial when using the fax function Press to clear a copy quantity entry If this key is pressed while the DADF is being used any originals in progress will be automatically output This key is used in copy mode network scanner mode and fax mode This is used to make black and white copies and to scan a black and white original when the network scan function is used This is also used to scan an original to be faxed using the fax function This key is used in copy mode network scanner mode and fax mode This returns all copy mode settings to the default settings However the touch panel display mode will not be changed When beginning a copy job press this key This is used to make full colour or single colour copies and to scan a colour original when the network scanner function is used 1 When the network scanner option is installed 2 When
132. Information NOTE CAUTION 1 44 6 Insert the new toner cartridge Align the insert holes as shown and then push the cartridge in A toner cartridge of a different colour cannot be installed For instance a yellow cartridge cannot be installed in the cyan position 7 Push the cartridge in until it locks securely in place NOTE Do not push the white area shown in the illustration The lock lever may come down After the toner cartridge is replaced the machine auto matically enters resolution adjustment mode In some cases this may take about 5 minutes e Do not throw the toner cartridge into a fire Toner may fly and cause burns e Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing Supplies Storing Supplies Standard supplies for this product that can replaced by the user include paper toner cartridges and staple cartridges for the finisher For best copying results be sure to use only Xerox Genuine Supplies which are designed engineered and tested to maximize the life and performance of Xerox products Look for the Genuine Supplies label on the toner package Proper storage 1 Store the supplies in a location that is e clean and dry e atastable temperature e not exposed to direct sunlight 2 Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat 3 Paper stored in packages standing up or out of the wrapper may curl or
133. It is not possible to interrupt an automatic two sided copy job 1 Touch the INTERRUPT key If the INTERRUPT key does not appear interrupt copy I ing is not possible ed Copy Copy Output 141 Sided QB cotlates 142 Sided ___ Stapled When the INTERRUPT key is touched in step 1 the I INTERRUPT touch key will be replaced by the CAN CEL key as shown in the illustration ed Copy Copy Output 41 Sided QB colates 142 Sided ___ Stapled e Ifyou touch the INTERRUPT key when the account counter function is turned on the display will prompt you to enter your account number Enter your account number with the numeric keys The copies you make will be added to the count of the entered account number e Ifthe INTERRUPT key is touched while an original is being scanned the interrupt state will begin after scanning is completed If the INTERRUPT key is touched during copying the interrupt state will begin after the copy is completed e Interrupt copying is not possible during automatic two sided copying using the optional Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit In addition automatic two sided copying is not possible during interrupt copying 2 Place the original for the interrupt copy job in the DADF or on the document glass pages 2 4 to 2 10 If a black and white copy job is being interrupted to run another black and white copy job the number of origi nals that can be copied in the interrupt job is 35 based on te
134. LET key as appropriate for the original you loaded If necessary touch the MANUAL key and set the origi nal size page 4 34 2 Sided Booklet 4 32 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Scanning and Transmitting a Two sided Original 4 Touch the OK key You will return to the initial screen A two sided original icon appears next to the ORIGINAL key Example The icon that appears when the 2 SIDED BOOKLET key is touched File Format 5 Continue from step 4 of Basic Transmission Method page 4 24 NOTES Booklets and tablets Two sided originals that are bound at the side are booklets and two sided originals that are bound at the top are tablets e Two sided scanning turns off when transmission is finished Pressing the CLEAR ALL key will also cancel two sided scanning Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 33 Network Scanner Operation Scanning Settings When sending an image you can adjust the original size exposure resolution and file format settings as needed Manually Setting the Scanning Size NOTE NOTE 4 34 If you load an original that is not a standard size such as an inch size or if you wish to change the scanning size touch the ORIGINAL key and set the original size man ually Perform the following steps after loading the document in the DADF or on the docu ment glass Standard sizes that can be detected are as follows A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B
135. NOTE Up to 100 destinations can be stored in a group key To program a group key follow steps 1 through 3 beginning on page 5 66 touch the GROUP key in step 4 and then follow these steps Only one touch key destinations can be stored in a group key If you wish to store a destination that is not programmed in a one touch key first program the destination in a one touch key and then store it in the group key 1 Follow the same steps 1 through 7 of Storing One Touch Keys page 5 68 to enter a GROUP NAME INITIAL and INDEX In step 1 on page 5 68 touch the GROUP NAME key instead of the NAME key 2 Touch the ADDRESS key me f Group Digital Document Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing Editing and Deleting Auto Dial Keys and Programs 3 Touch one touch keys of the destinations that you wish to store in the group Corporation amp fea Frequent Use f ABCD f EFGHI f JKLMN f OPQRST f uvwxyz ENN o gt Group e One touch keys that have been touched are highlighted e If you touch the wrong key simply touch it again to cancel the highlighting and remove the destination from the group NOTE Keys that are greyed out are group keys Group keys cannot be selected e To check the destinations that you have stored in the group touch the ADDRESS REVIEW key A list of the destinations appears To delete a destination touch the key of the destination and then touch the YES key i
136. NSERTS key on the SPECIAL MODES screen of the Special Modes tab The TRANSPARENCY INSERTS key is highlighted to indicate that the function is turned on and the transpar ency inserts icon etc appears in the upper left of the screen Transparency Inserts 2 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 45 Copier Operation 3 Load transparency film into the Bypass Tray Remove any paper already in the Bypass Tray before loading the transparency film To load paper in the Bypass Tray see page 1 23 4 Touch the More key in the Paper Select display and select the transparency film loaded in the Bypass Tray ME Touch the TRANSPARENCY key Original 5 Touch the SPEED MODE key or the QUALITY MODE key for the transparency film Please Select Transparency Mode SPEED MODE iS for fast printing QUALITY MODE is for a high quality image After touching either key followed by the OK key you will return to the main screen of copy mode z Basic Setting fi About the steps that follow If a DADF is being used see page 2 13 If the document glass is being used see page 2 21 To cancel the TRANSPARENCY INSERTS function touch the TRANSPARENCY INSERTS key again on the SPECIAL MODES screen NOTE When the copy job is finished remove any transparencies that remain in the Bypass Tray
137. OUNnG ss scunevedtevoawesedtaceeteet tea toe ene 64 2 54 Colour DAlGNCCs 2442 eau datetud edwstae a 24aeebereu sets 46665 2 55 vi Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide PONINES case ads Gitte cein eo Sy oh Seat de eh sta ace dee A iecants emt Sane Sedna Dice Mien tase yp St 2 5 MENSI ae ae a a a cpa ote ae ey Ow OR a Be A ses ge ee ee ae EA 2 58 Mage Ed MENU con anes ok ae ee ase eee a nace ae a ee era ees 2 59 SMIECI cnet ee bosch eee oes Leese S Aa eis 2 60 Miror IMAG i a tne geal kei ot a eal a Nae Oe AE we ie ae YY 2 61 PROLOM ee Alt che ot wt ane ee en ee art Goce aes od eee ed ee 2 62 MUN SNOlac ween oh eS he eed bated au 6 Sh ee eid Beene eG es 2 64 AS XAET FUREDE oc gcc ccodehaueee oe bet ebemerdudetaes da 2 66 Multi page enlargement 0 0 00 cee ees 2 68 aM MC CODY tenet Ged toe Oe a bation N ok oe cea ets 2 71 JOD FOdram MeCMON 2 axis 2tuteeeeorn eso ees weet en ee ehee ere tes 2 73 Stong a OD Progr aM ssas dianne E e wees ees 2 73 Recalling a OD PlrOOlaMN es 265 28oc enend eee AEE E AA ER 2 74 Deleting a stored job program 1 eee 2 75 mteruping a Copy RUM 2ca5scecenet ceded outer a da 2 77 Machine Maintenance for Copying 05 2 79 Removing an Original Misfeed 2 0 0 0 ee eee 2 79 Removing a misfed original from the DADF 0005 2 79 User Maintenance for COpyiIng 2 0 cc eee eee 2 81 Cleaning the Original Scanning Area 2 6 eee 2 82 TKOUBIESNOOUNG esre e s
138. Print Default dab ID Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color Hold Before Print User Name ne ry Preor int sae PIN Job Hame ev oo Always Use This ID mee 2 ipl Notify Job End J No Offset 1 Up bi Job Control Af Boyes J Auto Job Control review Cancel m Finishing Binding Edge Left bi Staple m N Up Printing Retention Normal Print When selected it is not necessary to use the operation panel on the machine to begin printing This setting is used for basic printing As long as the machine is operating properly printing can be executed entirely from the computer Hold After Print When selected the print job is retained in the machine s hold job list after being printed This allows the user to print the job again if necessary or delete the job if no longer needed Hold Before Print This setting is used to prevent print jobs from being misplaced When a print job is executed the machine stores it in the hold job list rather than printing it The user can then initiate printing from the machine s operation panel or delete the job as needed Proof Print This setting is used to prevent misprints when printing large numbers of copies When printing is executed the machine prints only one trial set of copies and then stores the remainder of the job in the hold job list After the user has veri
139. SR A5 11 x17 8 1 2 x14 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 If a non standard size original is loaded including special sizes the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear at all 1 Touch the ORIGINAL key Original 2 Touch the MANUAL key The sizes that can be selected are displayed AUTO is no longer highlighted MANUAL is high lighted Original Size J Rotate The Image 90 Degrees If you wish to rotate the original 90 when creating an image file click the ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES checkbox a checkmark should appear in the box Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Manually Setting the Scanning Size 3 Touch the desired original size key ____ _ _ ___ The original size key you touched are highlighted If you wish to select an inch size touch the INCH key and then touch the desired Original size key INCH is highlighted and inch size keys are displayed To return to the AB palette touch the AB key once again If you wish to select a custom size touch the EXTRA SIZE key and enter the size of the original Touch the X key and use the 4 or keys to set the length in the X direction and then touch the Y key and do the same for the Y direction Aly ET paa wW The length can be within the range 10 to 432 mm 1 2 to Ls Lede j 17 in the X direction and 10 to 297 mm 1 2 to 11 5 8 in the Y dire
140. SS key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen The SHARPNESS setting screen will appear The colour adjustments icon 4 will also appear in the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on 2 Touch the SOFT key to soften image outlines or touch the SHARPEN key to sharpen them a ae Adjustments Sharpness 3 Touch the OK key inside OK key on the SHARPNESS setting screen Return to the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 53 Copier Operation 4 Touch the OK key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 5 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow lf a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 In either case press the COLOUR COPY START key to begin copying To cancel the SHARPNESS function select the SHARPNESS function again and touch the CANCEL key step 2 Suppress background 2 54 This copier can suppress unwanted background areas on the original images when copying 1 Touch the SUPPRESS BACKGROUND key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen The SUPPRESS BACKGROUND setting screen will appear The colour adjustments icon 88 will also ao appear in the upper left of the screen to indicate that the Background a f function is turned on In
141. T screen and to return to the main screen When saddle stitching is selected the copies will be stapled at the centre and deliv ered to the saddle stitch tray Touch this key to display the pamphlet copy setting screen page 2 71 This is only possible when a checkmark appears in the checkbox of the AUTOMATIC SADDLE STITCH key operator program If the Saddle Stitch Finisher is equipped with a hole Punch Module printed paper can be hole punched and delivered to the offset tray When one of the functions is selected it is highlighted Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Saddle Stitch Finisher Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal When the staple cartridge becomes empty or staples become jammed a message will appear in the message display of the operation panel Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge or remove jammed staples Staple cartridge replacement 1 Open the front cover 3 Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction of the arrow to move the staple unit to the front Turn the roller rotating knob until the triangle mark is aligned with the index Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 61 General Information 1 62 5 Remove the empty staple cartridge Press the lock button to unlock the staple box cover and remove the staple cartridge NOTE f staples remain the staple cartridge cannot be removed 6 Insert a new staple c
142. TES Selecting the resolution Six resolution settings are available for both colour copying and black and white copying depending on the contents of the original Original type Contents of the original Normally this setting is selected When a black and white copy is made the exposure is automatically adjusted to obtain the best image quality When a full colour copy is made the image is adjusted in the same way as when TEXT PRTD PHOTO initial settings below is selected TEXT PRID This mode provides the best balance PHOTO for copying an original which contains both text and printed photographs TEXT PHOTO This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and photographs TEXT This mode is useful in enhancing very low density areas of an original or in suppressing unusually high density background areas PHOTO This mode provides the best copies of photographs with fine details PRINTED This mode is useful for copying printed PHOTO photographs This mode is useful to provide the best shading and fine details found on most maps 2 26 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Exposure Adjustments e Making a copy of a copy When making a copy of a copy made on this machine touch the checkbox for COPY OF COPY to select the mode Three resolution settings are available when this mode is selected TEXT PRINTED PHOTO TEXT and PRINTED PHOTO e For brighter colours in colour copi
143. Text ee aS l On First Page Only i Center As Gutline Only Watermark preview The watermark function is used to print a watermark a faint shadowlike text image on the paper This shows a preview of the currently selected watermark The position of the watermark can be adjusted by directly dragging the image with your mouse or by using the scrollbars at the right and bottom of the preview screen Default setting x 0 y 0 NOTE The image that appears in the Watermark Preview is an approximate representation of what will appear in the print Center Select this setting to have the watermark printed in the centre of the paper Watermark Select a watermark from the watermarks that appear in the box Default setting None Add Click this button to create a custom watermark Update Click this button to adjust the size or angle of the text of a stored watermark Delete Click this button to delete a stored watermark Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 33 Printer Operation 3 34 3 Text When you wish to create a custom watermark enter the text of the watermark here Up to 100 characters can be entered To store the entered text as a watermark click the Add button explained in above Size Use this setting to adjust the size of the characters of the currently selected watermark Any number from 6 point to 300 point can be selected Default setting 100 point 6 Angle Use this settin
144. This setting cannot be disabled Default exposure settings This program is used to configure the default exposure settings The default settings are initially configured as follows e Exposure AUTO e Original type TEXT e MOIRE REDUCTION Not selected To change the MOIRE REDUCTION setting touch the checkbox When the exposure is set to AUTO the original type can be set to TEXT PRTD PHOTO TEXT PHOTO or TEXT 4 68 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting Programs When the exposure is set to MANUAL the exposure can be adjusted to one of nine levels from 1 to 5 1 is light and 5 is dark TEXT PRTD PHOTO TEXT PHOTO TEXT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO or MAP can be selected for the Original type Disable of address direct entry This program is used to disable direct entry of e mail addresses when performing e mail transmission To disable direct entry of e mail addresses touch the checkbox so that a checkmark appears When direct entry of e mail addresses is disabled only stored e mail addresses can be used as destinations This allows e mail destinations to be restricted and prevents accidental transmission to the wrong address due to incorrect entry of an address The following operations are also disabled e Storing editing and deleting one touch keys at the operation panel e Storing editing and deleting groups at the operation panel NOTE To prohibit direct entry of destinations in the W
145. Timer Transmission on page 5 33 Transferring Received Faxes to Another Machine When Printing Is Not Possible Forwarding Function 5 46 When printing is not possible because of a paper toner or other problem you can transfer received faxes to another fax machine if that machine has been appropriately programmed in your machine This function can be conveniently used in an office or other workplace where there is another fax machine connected to a different phone line When a fax has been received to memory the DATA light to the right of the IMAGE SEND key blinks See If received data cannot be printed on page 5 29 2 Printing not possible because of paper or toner problem 1 Fax transmission to your machine Your machine Other machine 3 Transfer instruction using custom settings 4 Automatic dialing and transmission to programmed transfer destination 5 Printing Transfer destination Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Transferring Received Faxes to Another Machine When Printing Is Not Possible Forwarding Function NOTES gt When the transfer instruction is issued all data that has been received in memory to that point is transferred The page that was being printed when the problem occurred and all following pages will be transferred e Data cannot be selected for transfer Data received to a confidential memory box cannot be transferred See F Code C
146. US key on the operation panel is pressed A job list showing the current job at the top of the job queue or a list showing com pleted jobs can be displayed The contents of jobs can be viewed or jobs can be deleted from the queue The screen below is an example and differs from actual screens D Sets Progress Status 1 EJcopy 003 000 Paper Empty Complete Z Msuzuki 003 000 Waiting 4 D Job list This shows the current job and the jobs waiting to be run The icons to the left of the jobs in the queue show the job mode Copy mode Printer mode A Network scanner mode F E Fax send job Fax reception job The displayed jobs in the job list are themselves operation keys To cancel printing or to give a job the highest print priority touch the relevant job key to select the job and execute the desired operation using the keys described in 5 and 6 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 17 General Information PAPER EMPTY in the job status display Mode select key PRINT JOB key SCANNER JOB key FAX JOB key Display switching keys STOP DELETE key PRIORITY key DETAIL key When a job status display indicates PAPER EMPTY the specified paper size for the job is not loaded in any of the trays When the DETAIL key appears the key of a job in the job queue can be touched fol lowed by the DETAIL key to change the paper size selection to
147. Use paper that can be used for automatic two sided printing page 1 33 When loading sizes A3W A3 B4 A4R 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 or 8 1 2 x 11 R be sure to open the tray extension Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Copying printing on paper from the Bypass Tray is skewed Paper from the Bypass Tray mis feeds Printing stops before the job is finished ber The Bypass Guide is not adjusted to the size of the loaded paper The paper size and paper type have not been set The number of sheets placed on the Bypass Tray exceeds the maximum num ber The Bypass Guide is not adjusted to the size of the loaded paper If too many pages collect on the output tray the tray full sensor activates and stops printing Troubleshooting The number of sheets placed on the Bypass Tray exceeds the maximum num Do not place more than the maximum number of sheets Adjust the Bypass Guide to the size of the loaded paper Be sure to set the paper size and paper type when using special size or special type papers page 1 35 Do not place more than the maximum number of sheets Adjust the Bypass Guide to the size of the loaded paper Remove the paper from the output tray You have run out of paper Load paper page 1 21 Smudges on Does a message appear indicating the Please contact the your dealer as soon printed sheets need for maintenance as possible
148. When you have completed all of the entries click Submit The entries will be stored WorkCentre C226 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Q sack a s Search 5 Favorites meda EA 7 Ne I LJ X rel Address etpf9 138 24 206 M k XEROX MENU WorkCentre C226 System Information Network Scanning Image Send Management Setup Custom Directory Click here o ETP Enable Scanner Delivery to o Desktop Scan to E mail Group Scan to FTP amp Scan to Desktop e Sender e Network Scanning Advanced Setup Setup o Custom Directory O Enable User Authentication User Authentication Server Device Setup Setu Select the items used for authentication e Information Login Name Password E mail Addre e Passwords e Lo o g Status Message feu Ala nain na e eee Full Name Required Enter the full name of the destination up to 36 characters Initial Optional Enter the initial character of the stored destination name This initial is used to place the destination in the ABC index of the machine s address directory screen page 4 23 Custom Directory Drop down list Select one custom directory for this destination Check box for Frequently Used The destination is set as Frequently Used when checked on E mail Address Enter one address as an e mail destination up to 64 characters Required If Global Address Search can be used you can click Global Ad
149. Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Warranty While every effort has been made to make this operation manual as accurate and helpful as possible Xerox Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to its content All information included herein is subject to change without notice Xerox is not responsible for any loss or damages direct or indirect arising from or related to the use of this operation manual Copyright Xerox Corporation 2005 All rights reserved Reproduction adapta tion or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under copyright laws Trademark information Microsoft Windows operating system is a registered trademark or trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and other countries Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and other countries Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Adobe Reader Copyright 1987 2005 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated All other company names and product names appearing in this manual are the trademarks of their respective owners Table of contents Introduction Salely NOTES o ccau iced sa E taeda s kee aces XV WARNING Electrical Safety Information 0 0 0 0c
150. Y START 0000 or BLACK COPY START O key Copying will start with the settings of the recalled job program NOTE f any settings related to the contents of a job program were changed in the key operator programs after the job program was stored the changed settings will not be included when the job program is recalled Deleting a stored job program 1 Press the P key 3 Select a storage register number of the program to be deleted If a number key for which no job program has been stored is selected the screen will change to the screen of step 4 on page 2 74 for storing a job program Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 75 Copier Operation 4 Touch the DELETE key When the DELETE key is touched the screen in step 3 will return and the program will be deleted If the CAN ore Another Program CEL key is touched the screen in step 3 will return but the program will not be deleted If no other programs are to be deleted touch the EXIT key on the screen dis played in step 3 to exit the job program mode ANa Job Program Has Been Already Stored St NOTE f overwriting of programmed copy settings has been prohibited in the key operator programs you will not be able to clear a job program 2 76 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Interrupting a Copy Run Interrupting a Copy Run NOTES INTERRUPT can be used to temporarily stop a long copy run so that another copy job can be run
151. a Fax Transmission on page 5 27 Manual Polling A document should not be loaded in the machine when the following operation is per formed Manual polling is begun on the signal of the other party 1 Touch the SPEAKER key in fax mode and dial the number of the other machine B A oNe touch key or the REDIAL key can also be used e 2 Touch the SPECIAL MODES key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen 3 When you hear the fax tone from the other machine touch the POLLING key JOB STORED appears in the touch panel Polling reception begins Your machine prints the fax after receiving it from the sending machine NOTE Serial polling cannot be performed manually When polling reception ends repeat steps 1 through 4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 37 Fax Unit Using Polling Memory This function sends a document previously scanned into memory to a receiving machine when the receiving machine calls and polls your machine If desired you can restrict polling to fax machines whose fax number you have programmed in your machine This machine has memory box which is memory used for such functions as the normal polling memory function F code polling memory F code confidential transmission and F code relay transmission see Memory Boxes and Sub Addresses Passcodes Required for F code Transmission on page
152. a or of a province the government of a state other than Canada or a department board Commission or agency established by the Government of Canada or of a province or of a government of a state other than Canada Impressed or adhesive stamps used for the purpose of revenue by the Government of Canada or of a province or by the government of a state other than Canada Documents registers or records kept by public officials charged with the duty of making or issuing certified copies thereof where the copy falsely purports to be a certified copy thereof Copyrighted material or trademarks of any manner or kind without the consent of the copyright or trademark owner The above list is provided for your convenience and assistance but it is not all inclusive and no liability is assumed for its completeness accuracy In case of doubt consult your solicitor Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide XXV Other countries XXvI Copying certain documents may be illegal in your country Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty of making such reproductions e Currency notes Bank notes and cheques Band and government bonds and securities Passports and identification cards Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner e Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt contact
153. achine s fax number as explained for a normal transmission or for a polling operation see Using the Polling Function on page 5 36 and then enter the sub address and passcode as follows 1 Dial the fax number of the other machine or touch a one touch key If the condition settings screen appears touch the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key to display the address directory screen Hee Bowe O aio If the sub address and passcode have been pro grammed into the one touch key the following steps are not needed 2 Touch the SUB ADDRESS key When the SUB ADDRESS key is touched a slash appears at the end of the fax number If you make a mis take press the C key to clear the mistake Address Radiew 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the sub address of the other machine s memory box max 20 digits If you make a mistake press the C key and re enter the correct digit s 6 4 Touch the SUB ADDRESS key once again 9 x Lo a A slash appears at the end of the sub address 5 Use the numeric keys to enter the passcode of the other machine s memory box max 20 digits If a passcode has not been established for the other box this step is not necessary NOTES Youcan program a sub address and passcode into a one touch key along with the fax number see Storing One Touch Keys on page 5 68 e Manual transmission on hook dialing using a sub address and Passcode Is Not P
154. ailure occurs The e mail addresses of the recipients of the information must be entered This function cannot be used if the optional Fax Unit is installed Network Setup Network Card A link to the network card Web page for configuring the print server card network interface card is provided The Admin password is the same as the Web Page pass word of the network card Services Configure information concerning the e mail system LDAP This is used to configure advanced settings when using an LDAP server and user authentication Printer Configuration Settings This section explains the printer configuration settings Making Configuration Settings The printer configuration settings are used to configure basic printer settings The fol lowing settings are available e Default settings Basic settings used in printing page 3 46 e PCL settings Set the PCL symbol set and fonts page 3 47 3 44 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Making Configuration Settings Operation procedure common to all printer configuration set tings These items can be set from the operation panel 1 Touch the CONDITION SETTINGS key on the printer screen to display the configuration setting menu screen emer am Any print jobs held in the printer and any job currently 7 MPaper Select transmitted to the printer will be listed in the former print ee conditions Condition Settings 2 Touch the key of the desired item
155. an appropriate resolu tion setting see page 2 25 Text is not clear on An appropriate resolution setting for the Change the resolution setting to TEXT a Copy Original has not been selected Moir appears ona copy of a maga zine catalogue or other printed mate rial An appropriate resolution setting for the original has not been selected Text overlaying a photo is not clear on a copy of a map magazine or other printed material An appropriate resolution setting for the original has not been selected Smudges appear on copies Document glass or document cover dirty Black or white line appear on copies when the single pass feeding function is used Original smudged or blotchy Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Change the resolution setting to PRINTED PHOTO Change the resolution setting to MAP Clean the surface of the document glass and the original scanning area and origi nal presser part of the DADF see page 2 82 Clean the original scanning area see page 2 82 Use a clean original 2 83 Copier Operation Image cannot be Is the auto paper select or auto image Rotation copy functions only if the rotated function set machine is either in the auto paper select mode or in the auto image mode see page 2 8 Part of original Is the original positioned correctly Set the original properly page 2 4 image is not cop a ied Is the copy ratio proper for the original
156. an explanation When Gray Scale is selected in setting on page 3 37 this setting cannot be selected Default setting Standard The selected settings are the default settings The default settings for the document types are as follows Color UCR Black e Pure Black ooo rendering Becton Overprin Soreening Text Saturation High Text Perceptual Photo Match ow Black Off Photo Off Photo On ab S ma w D O Drawing Saturation High Perceptual Web Page Match Standard Off Automatic O Web 1 Colour Rendering select colour matching settings 2 UCR Under Colour Removable Selection Set the proportion of black toner to be used Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 35 Printer Operation 3 Black Overprint Select whether or not black characters are overprinted on a colour background 4 Screening Select halftone settings 5 Pure Black Text Select whether to print black characters with black toner or with 4 colour CMYK toner Custom Use these settings when you wish to change the default settings for each document type 3 Preview of document type This shows a preview of the document type selected in Table of document type previews Color Mode Gray Scale Automatic Original Type Drawing Thin line Web Page 3 36 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color Onginal Type Use this settin
157. anner option is installed touch this key to return to the initial screen of fax mode or scanner mode whichever mode was selected last Pressing the IMAGE SEND key in a copy screen or printer screen returns you to the initial screen of fax mode To switch to the initial screen of fax mode from the initial screen of scanner mode touch the SCANNER FAX key see page 5 7 This is used to produce tone signals when you are on a pulse dial line Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 5 Fax Unit BLACK COPY START CLEAR ALL NOTE Press to begin scanning an original for fax transmission Use to cancel a transmission or programming operation When this key is pressed the operation is cancelled and you return to the initial screen described on the page 5 6 This key is also used to cancel a resolution paper size or special function setting that was selected when sending a fax For the names and functions of the parts of the machine see page 1 14 Fax Mode Condition Settings Screen NOTE The condition settings screen of fax mode is displayed by pressing the IMAGE SEND key while the print mode copy mode or job status screen appears in the touch panel In the explanations that follow it is assumed that the initial screen that appears after pressing the IMAGE SEND key is the condition settings screen page 5 7 If you have set the display to show the address directory screen page 5 9 when the IMAGE SEND
158. aper loading 1 27 1 Tray Unit 1 28 3 Tray Unit 1 28 Bypass Tray 1 23 Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit 1 29 High Capacity Feeder 1 74 Paper Tray 1 1 27 passcodes 5 49 5 51 Password 3 43 passwords protecting programmed information 4 18 pause 5 20 PCL settings font set 3 47 symbol set 3 47 PCL symbol set 3 67 photo repeat 2 59 2 62 PIN 3 24 polling function 5 34 5 42 F code polling 5 54 F code polling memory 5 52 manual polling 5 37 polling memory 5 38 polling security 5 42 polling times 5 84 polling cancelling 5 37 port switching method 3 56 postcards loading 1 26 printing 1 26 preheat mode 1 8 print document data in Public Box 5 40 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide F code confidential memory box 5 57 F code polling memory box 5 54 programmed information 5 89 transaction report 5 95 print area 3 66 print contrast 3 6 3 9 3 12 PRINT JOB key 1 18 PRINT key 1 14 Print PIN 5 85 Print Priority 3 38 printer configuration settings 3 44 common operation procedure 3 45 default 3 46 PCL 3 47 printer driver settings using Help file 3 3 printer drivers Main tab 3 16 setting 3 1 3 2 setting properties 3 15 printer Web pages 3 40 printing black and white 3 4 colour 3 10 fitto page 3 27 from operation panel 3 48 image orientation 3 27 image quality 3 38 rotate image 3 27 two sided 3 14 using High Capacity Feeder 3 14 using optional peripheral equipment 3 12 using Saddle Stitch Finisher 3 14 printing functio
159. artridge into the staple box After inserting the staple cartridge press down on the staple box cover to lock the cartridge in place NOTES Donot remove the tape from the cartridge before inserting the staple cartridge into the box e Make sure that the new staple cartridge is locked securely in the staple box Press down on the staple box cover until you hear a click indicating that the staple cartridge is locked 7 Remove the tape from the staple cartridge by pulling it straight Push the staple box in until it clicks into place 9 Push the stapler section back into the finisher 10 Close the front cover NOTE Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to ensure that stapling is performed properly Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Saddle Stitch Finisher Staple jam removal 1 Unlatch the Saddle Stitch Finisher and slide it away from the main unit seen Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 63 General Information 6 Remove the misfed paper Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal 9 Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction of the arrow to move the staple unit to the front Turn the roller rotating knob until the triangle mark is aligned with the index 1 64 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Saddle Stitch Finisher 11 Raise the lever at the end of the staple box Remove th
160. as manufactured under a registered ISO9001 Quality system Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide XIX USA XX WARNING WARNING Regulatory Information for Fax Function CE Mark The CE mark applied to this product symbolizes Xerox s declaration of conformity with the following applicable Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated January 1 1995 Council Directive 72 23 EEC amended by Council directive 93 68 EEC approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council directive 89 336 EEC approximation of the laws of the member states related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 99 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration of conformity defining the relevant directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Authorized local dealer In order to allow this equipment to operate in proximity to Industrial Scientific and Medical ISM equipment the external radiation from the ISM equipment may have to be limited or special mitigation measures taken This is a Class A product In a domestic environment the product may cause radio frequency interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures FAX Send Header Requirements The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a
161. as sending and receiving faxes Sending a Fax Basic Procedure for Sending Faxes NOTE 1 Make sure the machine is in fax mode i When the IMAGE SEND key light is on the machine is in fax mode If the light is not on press the IMAGE i SEND key When the network scanner option is installed touch this key to return to the initial screen of fax mode or scanner mode whichever mode was selected last To switch to g fax mode from scanner mode touch the SCANNER FAX key see page 5 7 2 Load the original e Using the DADF page 5 11 e Using the document glass page 5 11 If you are using the document glass to send multiple pages load the first page first You cannot load documents in both the DADF tray and on the document glass and send them in a single fax transmission 3 Check the original size If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen If the original is not a standard size or the size was not 2 detected correctly touch the ORIGINAL key to specify Original the original size See Manually Setting the Scanning Size on page 5 13 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 19 Fax Unit 4 If needed adjust the resolution setting see page 5 14 Standard Resolution NX 5 puto Expogure 6 Dial the fax number The number that you entered appears in the message display If it is not correct press t
162. ass Tray when using the printer function To set the paper type and size for the Bypass Tray see page 1 23 The procedure for setting the paper type for the Bypass Tray when using the printer function is explained here Touch the PAPER SELECT key in the main screen of printer mode to display the paper type selection screen If the desired paper type is not selected touch the desired paper type to highlight it Paper type PLAIN LETTER HEAD PRE PRINTED PRE PUNCHED RECYCLED COLOUR POSTCARD Touch the HEAVY PAPER key and then select HEAVY PAPER1 TRANSPARENCY Touch the TRANSPARENCY key and then select SPEED MODE or QUALITY MODE ENVELOPE Touch the ENVELOPE key and then select the envelope type If the paper type setting in the Paper Settings screen of the printer driver is different from the paper type setting in the machine printing will not take place In this event select the job key in the job status screen page 1 17 and then touch the DETAIL key Touch the PAPER key in the screen that appears and then either change the machine s paper type setting for the Bypass Tray or select a different paper tray Select the PLAIN key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 63 Printer Operation Checking the IP address There are three ways to check the IP address e Using LIST PRINT in CUSTOM SETTINGS in the operation panel Select NIC PAGE to print a list of the machine settings The IP address that
163. ast page 5 59 Memory boxes are programmed edited and deleted as follows Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 81 Fax Unit Programming an F Code Memory Box A box name sub address passcode and function must be programmed in a memory box NOTES gt When programming a new memory box a sub address that is being used for another box cannot be used The passcode however can be the same as a passcode used in another box e A passcode can be omitted e Upto 50 F code memory boxes can be programmed If 50 F code memory boxes have already been programmed a warning message will appear and you will not be able to program a new box First delete an unused F code memory box page 5 88 and then program the new box 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key and then touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 5 67 2 Touch the F CODE MEMORY BOX key oa 3 Touch one of the memory box keys POLLING MEMORY CONFIDENTIAL or RELAY BROADCAST on the store upper line Custom Settings F Code Memory Box f e Relay Store Polling Menory f Confidential f Broadcast i i Relay Amend Delete Polling Memory Confidential ee POLLING MEMORY is touched in the example here The F code memory box programming screen appears 4 Touch the BOX NAME key The No that automatically appears is the lowest num faa ber from 001 to 050 that has not yet been programmed Q When the BOX NAME ke
164. ate after 60 seconds elapses If a print job or fax is received while auto power shut off mode or preheat mode is acti vated the machine automatically returns to normal operation The Environmental Choice Program guidelines are applied to the products only in Canada The products that meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines carry the logo shown above The products without the logo may not meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines 1 8 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Part Names and Functions Part Names and Functions Exterior Left tray Finished sheets are deposited here see page 2 18 Left side cover Open this cover when a paper misfeed occurs in the fusing unit or the transfer unit DADF Duplex Automatic Document Feeder This automatically feeds originals to be scanned The feeder can turn the original over and scan the back side as well as the front side for support of two sided originals 4 Power switch Press to turn power on and off Front cover Open to replace toner cartridge Operation panel Centre tray Finished sheets are deposited here see page 2 18 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 9 General Information Bypass Tray Stand 1 Tray Unit 3 Tray Unit Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit 2 Paper tray 3 Left side cover release Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit and exit tray Special papers including transparency film and copy paper can be
165. atically allowing easy two sided copying NOTE Certain restrictions exist depending on the amount of memory installed and the copy settings See Copy mode output restrictions on page 2 16 and Guidelines for the number of scannable originals during sort copying on page 2 17 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 19 Copier Operation The following two sided modes can be 1 Automatic two sided copying from one sided Originals 2 Automatic two sided copying from two sided Originals 3 Automatic one sided copying from two sided originals This function can be used even if a Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit and or a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit are not installed 1 Place the originals in the DADF tray pages 2 4 to 2 10 2 Inthe 2 Sided Copy display select a duplex copy mode Supply 2 Sided Copp Cor Note If 2 gt 1 Sided copy mode is desired you must jo x11 B Sided a first touch the More key Ja KIF Ci sided C Jax E Sided C Jore C rre C 3 Select the desired duplex copy mode The left screen shows the display when a DADF a Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit and a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit are installed The display will vary depend ing on the equipment installed If a copy key is touched for a mode that cannot be selected a double beep will be sounded Example of a Example of a Aaa oriented landscape oriented original original a EE is 2 20 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User
166. ations in the Scanner Destination Management menu however you will not be able to establish settings in the Setup menu The passwords for user and admin are both initially set to Xerox If you wish to change the passwords when first establishing the settings enter Xerox in Old Admin Password before you establish the settings A password must consist of alohanu meric characters and be no more than seven characters long Passwords are case sensitive After entering a password click Submit to set it After setting the password turn the machine power off and then back on When a password is set you will be prompted for the password when you attempt to access a Web page with protected settings For the User name enter user if you are accessing the page as a user or admin if you are accessing the page as an administrator For detailed information on setting passwords refer to Help Condition Setting Screen of Scanner Mode The condition setting screen of scanner mode is displayed by pressing the IMAGE SEND key refer to page 1 14 while the print mode copy mode or job status screen appears in the touch panel 1 In the explanations that follow it is assumed that the ini tial screen that appears after pressing the IMAGE SEND key is the condition setting screen shown below If you have set the display to show the address directory page 4 21 when the IMAGE SEND key is pressed touch the CONDITION SET TINGS key in
167. atus button in the Tray Status dialog box of the Paper tab the current tray information paper size paper type and quantity of paper remaining will be displayed Selecting a Color Mode setting The following example shows how to set Color Mode to Automatic printing in the Color tab of the printer driver properties 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 on page 3 1 2 Click the Color tab a Color Management IER Main Color Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting the Printer Drivers 3 Select Automatic from the Color Mode list When Color Mode is set to Automatic the print driver Color Mode identifies the colours in each page and automatically Automatic switches to Color mode when colours other than black SEE and white are used in a page or Gray Scale when only black and white are used To turn on automatic switch ing select Automatic for the Color Mode setting When Automatic is selected and mixed black and colour pages are printed a slower printing speed will result 4 Click the Apply button 5 Click the OK button Printing in Color Mode will now always take place Automatic Using the Help file to view explanations of the settings To view on screen explanations of the settings in the printer driver open the Help file Opening Help in Windows The example screen shows the Xerox PCL5c in Windows Me Watermarks Color Configuration l General Details Colo
168. ay Up to 36 characters can be displayed in the message screen regardless of the number of characters that have been entered up to 50 characters of an e mail address are displayed e You can also manually enter the address of a Scan to E mail destination or select multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission page 4 27 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 25 Network Scanner Operation 4 26 About pressing the START key in the following procedure If you are scanning a colour original in colour press the COLOUR COPY START key If you are scanning a colour or black and white original in black and white press the BLACK COPY START key Using the DADF 12 Press the COLOUR COPY START key or the BLACK COPY START key Scanning begins If scanning is completed normally the machine sounds a beep and the image is transmitted Using the document glass 12 Press the COLOUR COPY START key or the BLACK COPY START key The original is scanned and the READ END key appears 13 If you have another page to scan change pages and then press the START key Repeat this sequence until all pages have been scanned You can change the exposure setting as needed for each page refer to page 4 36 If no action is taken for one minute scanning automatically ends and the image is transmitted The time to transmission can be set using Scanner mode timeout after last scan page 4 68 in the key operator programs If
169. ay appear indicating the number of originals which must be returned to the DADF tray Return the originals to the DADF tray and press the START key for colour or black and white copying as appropriate for the job being resumed User Maintenance for copying To ensure good service from this product over a long period of time it is recommended that the following maintenance procedures be performed on a regular basis CAUTION Do not use flammable spray to clean the machine If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical components or the fusing unit inside the machine fire or electrical shock may result Wipe with a clean soft cloth If necessary moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent When finished wipe dry with a clean cloth NOTE When cleaning do not use thinner benzene or similar volatile cleaning agents These may degrade or discolour the housing If you find that a dirty image results when a copies are made using the DADF wipe the original scanning area the area that contains the long narrow glass shown at left Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 81 Copier Operation Cleaning the Original Scanning Area If you find that black or white lines appear when you make copies using the DADF use the accessory glass cleaning tool to clean the original scanning area 1 Open the DADF and remove the glass cleaning tool 3 Replace the glass cleaning tool in its st
170. b pages 1 Open the Web browser on your computer Supported browsers e Internet Explorer 5 5 or later Windows 5 1 or later Macintosh e Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later 2 Inthe Address field of your Web browser enter the IP address of the machine as a URL REE RAREST Input the IP address previously specified for this product Eile Edit View Favorites I If you do not know the IP address see page 4 60 Back Eoman Stop Address hte 192 168 0 1 When the connection is completed the following Web page will appear in your Web browser 4 4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide About the Web Page About the Web Page When you access the Web page in the machine the following page will appear in your browser A menu frame appears on the left side of the page When you click an item in the menu a screen appears in the right frame that allows you to establish settings for that item For overviews of each of the menu items refer to Chapter 3 Printer Operation For detailed explanations of the procedures for establishing settings click Help in the menu frame Menu Frame WorkCentre C226 Microsoft Internet Explorer Click the menu items displayed OLEN ee here to configure the Q a 2 Pseach Jeres Aua O 2 A LUBA corespo nding Address http 13 138 24 206 EJ co Edit and delete ee XEROX TO WorkCentre C226 stored transmission Pirin meni l E Machine Information Image
171. be included in the OTHERS count Default Job ID Use this setting to select the default user name and job name that appear in the machine s operation panel Note that if Always Use This ID is not selected the Windows login name and the job name set in the application will be automatically used The names that appear here will also appear in the operation panel in the dialog box that appears when printing is executed User Name Use this setting to select the default User Name that appears in the machine s operation panel If Always Use This ID is selected the name entered here will appear in the machine s operation panel If Always Use This ID is not selected the Windows login name will be automatically used Up to 16 characters can be entered Default setting User name unknown Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 25 Printer Operation Job Name Use this setting to select the default Job Name that appears in the machine s operation panel If Always Use This ID is selected the name entered here will appear in the machine s operation panel If Always Use This ID is not selected the job name set in the application will be automatically used Up to 30 characters can be entered Default setting Job name unknown Always Use This ID This allows you to select whether to automatically obtain the User Name and Job Name displayed in the machine s operation panel or whether to use the names entered in
172. ble NetBEUI When using this product in a network that uses the NetBEUI protocol set this pro gram Default setting Enable Reset the NIC This program is used to reset all setting items of NIC Network Interface Card namely Print Server Card of this product to the factory default settings If any of the NETWORK SETTINGS were changed prior to execution of this program you must turn off the main switch after exiting the key operator program wait briefly and then turn on the main switch to make the factory default settings take effect Colour adjustments This program is used to automatically adjust the colour tone of each colour cyan magenta yellow and black Auto colour calibration The Auto Colour Calibration program enables automatic colour gradation correction when the colour is off The colour gradation may not be sufficiently corrected after one correction cycle If so execute the program again When the AUTO COLOUR CALIBRATION key is touched the following display will appear Key Operator Programs Auto Colour Calibration Use 11 X17 Or A3 Paper For This Adjustment Press Execute To Print The Test Patch Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Description of Setting Programs After the EXECUTE key is touched and a test patch printed a message appears ask ing you to begin automatic adjustment Place the test patch on the document glass as shown below and touch the EXECUTE key NOTES
173. bles in accordance with the instructions given on the package or container Keep all consumables away from the reach of children Never throw toner toner cartridges or toner containers into an open flame Xvill Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Radio Frequency Emissions United States Canada Europe Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will required to correct the interference at his own expense Changes and modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by Xerox may void the user s authority to operate this equipment Shielded interface cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with worldwide EMC regulations Product Safety Certification This product is certified by the following Agency using the Safety standards listed Agency Standard Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL60950 3 Edition USA Canada NEMKO IEC60950 3 Edition 1999 This product w
174. busy 1 Make sure the machine is in fax mode When the IMAGE SEND key light is on the machine is in fax mode If the light is not on press the IMAGE SEND key When the network scanner option is installed touch this key to return to the initial screen of fax mode or scanner mode whichever mode was selected last To switch to fax mode from scanner mode touch the SCANNER FAX key 2 Load the original If you have loaded the original on the document glass you can only send one page by manual transmission 3 Set the original size resolution exposure and other scanning conditions as needed e Manually Setting the Scanning Size see page 5 13 e Selecting the Resolution see page 5 14 e Selecting the Exposure see page 5 16 4 Lift the extension phone The SPEAKER key can also be used See One touch dialing on page 5 17 5 Dial the number of the other party or touch a one touch key If the condition settings screen appears touch the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key to display the address directory screen HES oe ee O So You cannot use a group key or a one touch key that includes a sub address and passcode 6 Speak to the other party when they answer If you used the SPEAKER key to dial lift the extension phone to talk Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Using an Extension Phone 7 After the other party switches to fax reception press your BLACK COPY START key 8 Replace the extensi
175. c Settings for Network Scanning Select the method for assigning a file name to a scanned image File Naming Select the method for assigning a file name to a scanned image In File Naming click the items that you wish to use in the file name Sender Name and Date amp Time are initially selected If you are going to send images to the same recipient more than once we recommend that you also select Session Page Counter or Unique Identi fier to prevent sending multiple files with the same name which would result in each successive file overwriting the previous file Selecting an e mail subject E mail Subject only used for Scan to E mail This setting is not necessary if you will not be using Scan to E mail The setting is used to enter the subject that appears in the recipient s e mail program when you perform scan to E mail Enter a subject when using Scan to E mail within 80 characters Only one subject can be entered If nothing is entered Scanned image from lt Device Name gt will appear The name that appears in lt Device Name gt is the name stored in Name in the screen that appears when you click Information in the menu frame If aname has not been stored the product name will appear E mail Server and DNS Server Settings Scan to E mail and Scan to FTP use SMTP to transmit e mail therefore your SMTP server settings must be configured When configuring your SMTP server settings your DNS server sett
176. can check scanned document data by printing it out refer to Checking and clear ing document data in a memory box on page 5 54 NOTE When using F code polling memory do not set the reception mode to manual reception Scanning a document into an F code polling memory box The procedure for scanning a document into an F Code polling memory box page 5 82 is similar to the procedure for scanning a document into the polling memory public box Instead of touching the PUBLIC BOX key in step 5 of Scanning a document into memory Public Box for polling memory on page 5 38 touch the key of the memory box into which you wish to scan the document If document data has already been stored in that box anew document data will be added on to the existing data If you no longer need the existing data delete it as explained in Checking and clearing docu ment data in a memory box on page 5 54 When you touch the memory box into which you wish to scan the document the key is highlighted and selected as the scanning destination Marketing Group Xerox pBranch Ex public Bo NOTE When creating the memory box you can select whether to have the scanned document data automatically cleared after polling or left it in the box to allow repeated polling Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 53 Fax Unit 5 54 Checking and clearing document data in a memory box The procedure for checking document data in an F code polling
177. checkbox Default setting Not selected Color Adjustment Color Balance 5 aturatiors Brightness Speer T All Text to Black 4 Color Adjustment Contrast Image Use this item to adjust the brightness and contrast Brightness This indicates the brightness of colours The brightness can be set to a value from O to 100 Colours appear closer to white as the value is increased Default setting 50 3 38 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions Contrast This shows the amount of contrast between white and black The contrast can be set to a value from 0 to 100 The contrast increases as the value is increased Default setting 50 2 Defaults Returns the image adjustment settings to the default settings 3 Color Balance This item is used to adjust the colour saturation and strengthen or weaken the R red G green and B blue components of colour Saturation This adjusts the colour saturation Select a value between 0 and 100 Default setting 50 Red Strength Strengthens or weakens red Default setting 50 Green Strength Strengthens or weakens green Default setting 50 Blue Strength Strengthens or weakens blue Default setting 50 NOTE These cannot be changed if the colour mode was set to Gray Scale in step on page 3 37 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 39 Printer Operation Web Pages in the Printer
178. ck originals page 2 41 DUAL PAGE This is useful to copy the left and right pages of bound documents without shifting the COPY key document on the document glass page 2 42 CENTRING key Use this to centre the copied image on the paper page 2 44 COVERS key Use this to insert a different type of paper for use as front and back covers page 2 47 The DADF must be used When copying onto transparencies use this to automatically insert a sheet of copy TRANSPARENCY _ paper between transparency sheets page 2 45 INSERTS key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 37 Copier Operation OK key on the special modes screen COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS key IMAGE EDIT key B W REVERSE key Touch the OK key to return to the main screen of the copy mode Touch these keys to switch between the special modes menu screens The special modes menu consists of two screens Touch the key to switch to the screen below The special modes below can be selected in the second screen 2 2 O Special Modes Colour i Image Edit Adjustments BA B W Reverse Touch this key to display the colour adjustments menu screen This allows you to select the special functions shown below for colour adjustment when making colour copies page 2 51 Colour Adjustments RGB Adi Suppress Just i Background f Brightness Intensity Sharpness Colour Balance Touch this key t
179. codes see Entering Dialing a Fax Number with a Sub Address and Passcode on page 5 51 F code confidential reception is performed in the same way as normal reception see Basic Operations however you must inform the other party of the sub address SUB and passcode SID of your confidential memory box If a passcode is not pro grammed in the confidential memory box only inform the other party of the sub address SUB NOTE An F code confidential transmission can be used in combination with the broadcast transmission function page 5 30 or timer transmission function page 5 33 and can be stored in a program page 5 85 Printing a Document Received to an F Code Confidential Memory Box Faxes received in an F Code confidential memory box are printed out by entering the PRINT PIN 4 digit passcode 0000 to 9999 that was programmed when the box was created NOTES You can have a transaction report printed each time a fax is received in an F Code confidential box to inform you of the reception This setting is enabled in the key operator programs see the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide e Document data received to an F code confidential memory box is automatically cleared after printing e When a new fax is received to an F code confidential box while a previously received fax is still stored in the box the new fax is added on after the previous fax 1 In fax mode touc
180. computer or other electronic device including FAX machines to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges In order to program this information into your FAX machine refer to Own number and name set in the Fax Unit section of your Xerox WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide and follow the steps provided Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Data Coupler Information This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US XRXMM07BZSA1 If requested this number must be provided to the Telephone Company A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is desi
181. ction set in increments of 1 mm 1 8 Depending on the amount of memory installed it may not be possible to scan some original sizes page 4 1 4 Touch the outer OK key You will return to the initial screen Touching the inner OK key in the step above returns you to step 2 NOTE Youcan return to automatic detection by pressing the CLEAR ALL key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 35 Network Scanner Operation Selecting the Exposure You can adjust the exposure manually to match the type of original After loading the original in scanner mode follow the steps below The default setting for the exposure is AUTO Change the exposure 1 Touch the EXPOSURE key Exposurea La Resolution File Format 2 Select AUTO or MANUAL If you selected AUTO the exposure will be adjusted automatically Only for black and white scanning If AUTO is selected for colour scanning scanning will IEM place at exposure level 3 of the manual settings Somme Reduction If you selected MANUAL touch the 9 or 0 key to adjust the exposure For darker contrast touch the 2 2 _ key For lighter contrast touch the key S PEE me 3 Selecting the original type Touch the appropriate key for the type of original to be scanned The image will be processed according to the selected type When AUTO is selected in step 2 lf AUTO is selected in step 2 you can s
182. ction or enlargement has been selected the copy ratio will be reset to 100 when this function is selected Automatic two sided copying is not possible Original A3 11 x 17 size Copy A38W 12 x 18 size EEEE E nnns Pa n n n n nn nnn ce oarnneta nenna nann nnns Pa n n nnn nnn eee nnn n nn eee nnnm n nn 2 66 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Image Edit Menu 1 Touch the A3 FULL BLEED key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen The A3 FULL BLEED key will be highlighted to indicate that the function is turned on and the full bleed icon 3 will appear in the upper left of the screen 2 Touch the OK key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 3 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode 4 Load A3W 12 x 18 copy paper into the Bypass Tray Adjust the Bypass Guide to A3W width before loading the paper Remove any paper remaining in the tray Pull out the tray extension and wire extension see page 1 23 5 Touch the More key in the Paper Select display and then select the paper type in the Bypass Tray spa C Paper Selec 100 7 Envelope Copy Ratio J Touch the PLAIN key or the HEAVY PAPER key If you touched the HEAVY PAPER key touch the HEAVY PAPER1 key or the HEAVY PAPER2 key as appropriate for the weight of the paper you loaded see step 3 on page 1 36 About the steps that follow Se
183. d 6 To check the destinations that you have stored in the group touch the ADDRESS REVIEW key A list of your selected destinations is displayed You can delete a displayed destination by touching it When a message appears asking if you want to delete the destination touch the YES key The number of destinations in the group appears to the right of the ADDRESS key 8 Check the name of the key refer to step 15 on page 4 45 The characters appearing next to the KEY NAME key will be displayed in the group key To change these characters touch the KEY NAME key This step is not necessary if you do not wish to change the characters 9 Touch the EXIT key when you have finished programming the group key If you wish to program another group key touch the NEXT key When you touch the EXIT key you will return to the screen of step 2 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 49 Network Scanner Operation Editing and Deleting Group Keys If you need to delete group key or change its name or one of its stored destinations perform the following procedure 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key and then touch the DIRECT ADDRESS key refer to steps 1 to 3 on page 4 42 2 Touch the AMEND DELETE key e To edit a group key follow steps 4 and 5 e To delete a group key follow steps 6 and 7 e When you have finished editing or deleting touch the EXIT key 4 Touch the
184. d descriptions for program settings start on page 4 65 4 64 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting Programs 6 Touch the OK key to return to the screen of step 4 lf you wish to use another program touch the key for that program in the screen of step 4 7 Press the CLEAR ALL key to exit the program Setting Programs The setting programs for the network scanner feature of the machine are explained here Network scanner settings The following programs are available e Default display settings e The number of direct address keys displayed setting e Initial resolution setting e Scan complete sound setting e Default sender set e Compression mode at broadcasting e Initial file format setting e Maximum size of e mail attachments e Scanner mode timeout after last scan e Default exposure settings e Disable of address direct entry Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 65 Network Scanner Operation Default display settings You can select the initial display that appears when you press the IMAGE SEND key to change to scanner mode or when you press the CLEAR ALL key in scanner mode Normally the initial display is set to the Condition setting screen page 4 19 The following three selections are available e Condition setting screen e Address directory ABC e Address directory Group When an address directory ABC or Group is selected the selected index of that address directory page 4 22
185. d one 128 MB or 256 MB memory module must be added for image memory For more information see page 4 1 3 Touch the OK key You will return to the initial screen colour 100x100dpi Ni 150x150dpi 200x200dpi 300x300dpi NOTES The initial factory resolution setting is LOWER If desired you can change the initial setting to a different setting using the key operator program Initial resolution setting page 4 66 e The resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun Selecting the File Format When you send an image to one or more recipients using Scan to E mail or Scan to FTP the FILE FORMAT key enables you to temporarily override the individual file for mat settings FILE TYPE COMPRESSION MODE stored for each recipient and send the image to all of the recipients using a single file format setting PROGRAMMED is initially selected which means that the file format settings stored for each recipient are used 4 38 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting the File Format 1 Touch the FILE FORMAT key File Format E rd rid aT TO 3 Select the file tyoe and the compression mode The settings are selected separately for colour scanning and black and white scanning Touch the COLOUR key or the B W key to select the appropriate setting screen File format settings for colour scanning C One Page Per File Compression Mode High G4 Colour Xerox
186. data of a single job is so large that it cannot be held in memory When there are other jobs occupying memory notice pages may tend to be printed more frequently even for jobs with small amounts of data e When a print job is sent to the printer and the number of print hold jobs has reached the maximum of 99 jobs e When different paper sizes have been selected for printing within a print job and one or more of the sizes cannot be delivered to the selected exit tray or to the sta pler compiler In these cases printed paper will be delivered partly to the specified destination tray or compiler and partly to another exit tray e When a function is selected that has been disabled using the key operator pro grams such as disabling of two sided printing disabling of the staple function or disabling of a specified exit tray e An invalid account number is entered when the auditing mode has been set Disabling of notice page printing You can use the PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE PRINTING of the key operator program to disable notice page printing See page 3 55 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 65 Printer Operation Print Area The print area of this product is shown below Approx 4 3 mm 11 64 The print area is the entire page excluding a margin A of 4 3 mm 11 64 at each edge The actual print pprox 4 3 mm 11 64 area may vary depending on the printer driver used and the type of software application Approx 4 3 mm 11
187. der the checkbox can be entered Enter the information necessary for authentica tion in these text boxes If you are entering a host name be sure to enter the IP address of your DNS server in the DNS settings below DNS Setup a _ Primary DNS Server Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server here if required Secondary DNS Server Enter the IP address of your secondary DNS server here if required Timeout Seconds Enter a time out period from 0 60 seconds that the system will wait for as it attempts to connect to the primary server The default is 20 seconds If no con nection is made the system will then look for the secondary server if it has been set up If not the system will stop attempting to connect Domain Name Enter the Domain Name of the DNS Server to be used to search for host names within 64 characters Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 9 Network Scanner Operation Setting Up Destination Information To store the name and address of a destination as a one touch key click Destination or one of the transmission methods in the Web page menu frame Destination can also be used to edit or clear stored destinations Refer to page 4 15 A total of 500 destinations can be stored including E mail FTP and Group destina tions Among these a combined total of 100 Scan to FTP destinations can be stored The stored destinations appear as one touch keys in the touch panel of the machine when you
188. destinations it is convenient to program those destinations into a group key page 4 14 10 Touch the ADDRESS REVIEW key and check the destinations When the ADDRESS REVIEW key is touched only the Sees entered destinations are displayed If you need to delete ahh sai Directory kear aT zug her T P ri a destination touch its key Touch the OK key to return to the initial screen 11 Continue from step 12 of Basic Transmission Method page 4 26 NOTES To cancel a broadcast transmission when selecting destinations press the CLEAR ALL key e When you perform a broadcast transmission the compression mode set with the key operator program Compression mode at broadcasting page 4 67 is used as the file compression mode for all destinations The default settings are MEDIUM for colour scanning and HIGH G4 for black and white scanning Destination address entry with global address search 1 Touch the GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH key The server change screen is displayed If only one LDAP server has been set the global address search screen is displayed Proceed to step 4 Server Change To search the highlighted server proceed to step 3 4 30 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Destination Input Methods 3 Touch the OK key 4 Enter a keyword for search l Global Address Search MAJ 1245 5 Touch the SEARCH key p Condition f settings f
189. ding a Fax after Talking Manual Transmission 5 62 Using an Extension Phone to Receive a Fax 0c eee eee 5 63 Receiving a Fax After Talking Manual Reception 5 64 Programmi N O seras e E E 5 66 Storing Editing and Deleting Auto Dial Keys and Programs 5 66 Storing One TOUCh KEYS 60 26 24406265heoutsikvde bap a hake bs 5 68 Editing and Deleting One Touch KeyS 00 0c eee eee nee 5 72 SWN aA GOURD KEV srera rea wa ad Gees A a ee ed ee A 5 74 Editing and Deleting Group KeyS 0 00 0 c cee eee 5 76 SONG a NOG FAN wisi aire io i oan Shah ae es ee ee ee wey ee ets 5 78 Editing and Deleting Programs 2 00 ee ees 5 80 SLOMNG a Group NAE 2 5 sa asdang dh eek geese ee EEEE E a ae 5 80 Programming Editing and Deleting F Code Memory Boxes 5 81 Programming an F Code Memory Box 00 0c eee eee 5 82 Setting for F Code Polling Memory Boxes Polling Times 5 84 Setting for F Code Confidential Transmission Memory Boxes Print PIN 5 85 Setting for F Code Relay Broadcast Memory Boxes Recipient 5 86 Editing and Deleting a Memory Box naana 5 88 Printing Programmed Information aaa eee 5 89 Enenng GHaracle ars aro ee cat der as ae Gnd a aaa Sw a S 5 90 Entering alphabetical characters nasaan aana 5 90 Entering numbers and symbols aaaea eee eens 5 93 TROUDICSNOOUNG 22
190. disk When you touch this key a message will appear to confirm that you want to delete the data Check the message and then proceed with the deletion If you are using the job retention function page 3 48 exercise caution when using this program Output method when memory is full When the internal memory becomes full with printer data further printing is not possi ble thus the print data stored to that point is printed This program is used to set the condition for printing The factory default setting is 1 SET Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 55 Printer Operation Default paper type for Bypass Tray This program is used to set the default paper type for paper loaded in the Bypass Tray in printer mode NONE a default paper type is not selected PLAIN HEAVY PAPER or TRANSPARENCY can be selected If HEAVY PAPER is selected select HEAVY PAPER 1 or HEAVY PAPER 2 If TRANSPARENCY is selected select SPEED MODE or QUALITY MODE The factory default setting is NONE Job queuing This program is used to allow new print jobs to be received while a print job is in progress Normally the program is enabled so that new print jobs can be received Interface settings These programs are used to control data transmitted to the parallel port or network port of this printer Port switching method The machine can use the three ports shown below for printing This program is used to select when switching betwee
191. diting and Deleting a Memory Box 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key and then touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 5 67 2 Touch the F CODE MEMORY BOX key refer to step 2 on page 5 82 3 Touch one of the memory box keys POLLING MEMORY CONFIDENTIAL or RELAY BROADCAST on the amend delete line lower line see step 3 on page 5 82 4 Touch the memory box key that you wish to edit or delete Select Memory Box To Amend Delete Polling Memory Marketing Group Fax Information e The memory box edit delete screen appears e yj mark indicates that data has been stored e Amemory box cannot be edited or deleted when data is stored in the box 5 Touch the keys as needed to edit or delete the information F Code Memory Box Polling Memory Exit No 005 Sub Address f 22233311 351212 Polling Times Unlimited e Edit a memory box in the same way as you programmed it e To delete a memory box touch the DELETE key at the upper right of the screen a message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion e The print PIN must be entered to edit or delete a confidential memory box e Amemory box cannot be edited or cleared while it is being used for transmis sion 5 88 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Printing Programmed Information Printing Programmed Information NOTE You can print out lists of the One touch keys Group keys Programs Memory boxes that have been sto
192. djust Strengthens or weakens one of three primary colours red R green G or blue B 1 Touch the RGB ADJUST key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen plor Adjustments Colo Balance 2 Select a colour from R RED G GREEN and B BLUE Colour ae Adjustments Rgb Adjust Only One Colour Can Be Adjusted Only one primary colour can be adjusted 3 Adjust the selected colour Caa Touch the to strengthen the selected colour or touch the key to weaken the colour When the key is touched the colour adjustments menu icon 4 will appear at the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on 2 52 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Colour Adjustments Menu 4 Touch the OK key inside OK key on the RGB ADJUST setting screen Return to the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen 5 Touch the OK key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 6 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow lf a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 In either case press the COLOUR COPY START key to begin copying To cancel the RGB ADJUST function select the RGB ADJUST function again and touch the CANCEL key step 2 or 3 Sharpness Sharpens or softens image outlines 1 Touch the SHARPNE
193. documents try such measures as lowering the resolution mode e You can use the key operator program Maximum size of e mail attachments page 4 68 to set a limit for the size of image files sent by Scan to E mail e If the power is turned off or a power failure occurs while a document is being scanned in the DADF the machine will stop and a document misfeed will occur After the power is restored remove the document as explained on page 2 79 Destination Input Methods In the section Basic Transmission Method a destination is specified with a one touch key steps 10 to 11 This machine however provides the following destination input methods e Manual entry Enter the e mail address directly only for Scan to E mail e Global address search Search for an e mail address in an Internet or intranet directory database You can also enter multiple addresses for a broadcast transmission Destination address manual entry 1 Perform steps 1 through 9 of Basic Transmission Method on page 4 23 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 27 Network Scanner Operation 2 Touch the E MAIL ADDRESS key E MAIL ADDRESS CANCEL If you make a mistake touch the key to move the cursor n back to the mistake and then enter the correct character 4 Touch the FILE FORMAT key If you do not need to change the file format go directly to step 7 H NOTE The initial file format setting can be changed with the k
194. dress Search to select an e mail address from the Global Address Book Display Name Optional Enter a key name no more than 18 characters for the destination The key name will appear in the machine s touch panel If you don t enter a key name the initial 18 characters of the Full Name will be stored as the key name File Format for Colour Select the file format and compression mode for transmission of images scanned in colour PDF Middle compression is initially selected The selec tions are as follows PDF High compression PDF Middle compression PDF Low compression JPEG High compression JPEG Middle compression JPEG Low compression File Format for B W Select the file format and compression mode for transmission of images scanned in black and white PDF G4 is initially selected The selections are as follows PDF uncompressed PDF G3 PDF G4 TIFF uncompressed TIFF G3 TIFF G4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 11 Network Scanner Operation Scan to E mail destinations can also be stored edited and cleared from the touch panel of the machine pages 4 42 to 4 48 To perform Scan to E mail the e mail server settings must first be established Refer to page 4 7 Storing destinations for Scan to FTP Click FTP in the menu frame of the Web page to store destinations Configure the settings for the destination FTP server for Scan to FTP in this screen When you have completed all of the entries click Submit The en
195. dure is not possible if you are on a pulse dial line and your extension phone cannot produce tone signals To find out whether your extension phone can produce tone signals refer to the manual for your extension phone 1 If you are on a pulse dial line set your phone to issue tone signals Refer to your phone s manual to set the phone to issue tone signals If your phone is already set to issue tone signals proceed to the next step 2 Press the key on the extension phone s keypad and then press the key twice Fax reception is activated 3 Replace the extension phone NOTE The one digit number that is used to activate fax reception from an extension phone initially set to 5 is called the remote reception number You can change this number to any number from 0 to 9 with the key operator program See the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 65 Fax Unit Programming This section explains the procedures for programming and the information pro grammed in auto dial keys one touch and group keys programs user indexes and memory boxes Auto dial keys one touch keys and group keys user indexes and memory boxes are stored edited and deleted at the operation panel of the machine This section explains the procedures for storing editing and deleting using the operation panel Storing Editing and Deleting Auto Dial Keys and Programs 5 66 NOTE
196. during scanning of the origi scanning of the originals you can select nals and a message appears asking you whether you want to continue the job and whether you want to continue copying or print only those originals that were cancel scanned or cancel the job If you con tinue the job copies will only be made of the originals that were scanned and thus all originals cannot be copied at once 2 84 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide NOTE 3 Printer Operation Basic Printing Procedures This section explains how to configure printer driver settings at your computer and provides basic information on printing For printer driver installation see the Xerox WorkCentre C226 Quick Start Guide Setting the Printer Drivers NOTE This section describes the method of changing the printer driver settings from your computer If you have not yet installed the printer driver PCL5c or PostScript read the Printer Installation section in the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide and install the printer driver from the CD ROM The WorkCentre C226 comes standard with a WorkCentre C226 PCL Print Drivers and Printer Network Utilities CD ROM The WorkCentre C226 PS Driver CD ROM is available with the purchase of the optional PostScript Kit Printer driver settings in Windows selecting and setting print conditions Change the settings using the printer properties Windows 95 98 Me The procedure for adjusting the sett
197. e operation take place at night or another specified time see page 5 33 The other machine ze 2 Permits polling of z 1 Polling ask other machine ay Sy to send document WL 4 Document data is automatically VLA sent to your machine 3 Document data previously l scanned into memory Serial Polling Group keys and the broadcast transmission function page 5 30 can be used to suc cessively poll multiple fax machines in a single operation Up to 100 machines can be polled In this case the sequence of operations in the above diagram is successively repeated for each sending machine selected NOTE The receiving machine bears the expense phone charges of polling transmission Polling memory This feature allows your machine to automatically send a document previously scanned into memory when another machine calls and polls your machine The other machine 2S 1 Polling request transmission 4 Document data is automatically sent to other machine l 3 Document data previously scanned into memory Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 35 Fax Unit Using the Polling Function NOTE NOTE 5 36 A document should not be loaded in the machine when the following operation is per formed When used in conjunction with the timer transmission function only one poll ing job can be stored If the other machine has a polling security function see Restricting polling access polling secur
198. e page 5 2 When using the machine be sure to keep the fax power switch turned on at all times Make sure the correct date and time have been set Make sure the correct date and time have been programmed in the unit If the date and time are wrong please correct them see page 1 39 It is important to set the correct date and time because they are used for such features as Timer Transmission page 5 32 Program the sender s name and sender s number The name and fax number of the user of the machine is programmed in Own number and name set in the Fax Unit section of the Xerox WorkCentre C226 System Admin istration Guide The programmed name and number are printed at the top of each transmitted fax page The sender s number is also used as an identification number when you use the Polling function to request transmission from another fax machine See Using the Polling Function on page 5 36 NOTE You can check your programmed name and number by printing out the Sender List Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 3 Fax Unit Connecting an Extension Phone NOTE You can connect a telephone to the machine and use it as an extension phone to place and receive calls like any normal phone When the other party has made the call the extension phone can be used to activate fax reception remote operation If you connect a combination teleohone answering machine to the machine you will not be able to use the answeri
199. e C226 User Guide iii 1 General Information Before Using the Product 200 cece eee 1 1 Installation REGUIFEMCIIS 6 24 244 4445 ve wanke dad e005 268 eae wae des 1 1 MOVINGEIAIS WMACIING wesna repenre oh tee aide Gh ea ae ha ae on 1 3 CANONS stax arses oer A E E A EEEE sor gaa Seas E eee 1 4 WAtrOOUCTIONG 4 4 we id oR ee Caer e st SRE ee ae eae 1 5 MAM Sel Si aie cope sor gt r as 8 cae eee wre acl ay kab went ay eon ed ce er ree ak GR ed 1 7 Energy saving features nana tN doer es dhe ow eb ed dee eat 1 8 Part Names and FUNCIONS 2 2dd 0 coc Given oetatecdetuwteae Mane teed dad 1 9 CTO R twice est rae ie oe aa pe ee aie Be ee an ee a ee a 1 9 AN TNO set reese E EE oh detec See oe ag ats anos See eee tne se a 1 11 Part names and functions of peripheral devices 1 12 Other optional equipment 0 0 0 0 cee ee 1 13 Operation PANG s c 42 aay meee een EEEE E aE dd Be Meee eco E oe 1 14 MSO VANS ws ate crested ath ta a cd arte dae a sks Bede thc oh yep ee 1 16 PRUIGITING MOGE es 0 oo we Senate ae ate Get Hara ge eB aan te a Baa ee Gow Ieee gee Btn Ge are Bann shes 1 18 Managing the Machine 0002 eee eee eee 1 21 LoOadINO PADE 4 2 00 4 dras 20 dae aoe eee a Aad 2 alee owe Oe eee ww a are 1 21 Loading paper in Paper Tray 1 0 2 cc ees 1 21 Changing the paper size in Paper Tray 1 0 00 e eee 1 22 Loading paper in the Bypass Tray 000 c eee ee ees
200. e Network 2 Input the IP Address previously specified for this product to the ADDRESS field of the browser El about blank Microsoft Interne File Edit View Favorites Ii e Fack Eamsand Stop Address tte 192 168 0 1 e Network Card e Services 4 Close the help a Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Input the IP address previously specified in this product If you do not know the IP address see page 3 64 When the connection is completed the Web page infor mation of this product will be displayed The Web page information is explained on page 3 42 3 Click the Help button under the menu frame For details of each function setting see the help under the menu frame The configuration settings are described in detail Select the setting or function you wish to use from inside the menu frame When you have finished accessing the Web page click the button in the upper right hand cor ner of the window 3 41 Printer Operation Items and outline of menu frame of Web pages The optional scan kit is required to use the network scanner function described in this section Menu frame A WorkCentre C226 Microsoft Internet Explorer TER Click the menu items File Edit view Favorites Tools Help ae displayed here to configure Q sack QJ x a A PO search P Favorites A media E 27 eS w z ba amp rel the corresponding settings Address a http 13 138 24 206 v Go
201. e SPECIAL MODES screen the screen of step 2 2 50 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Colour Adjustments Menu Colour Adjustments Menu The COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu in SPECIAL MODES enables the following parameters to be adjusted to modify the characteristics of a colour copy Settings adjusted with the colour adjustments menu do not affect black and white copying Special Modes Margin Shift I E ia Centring Special Modes Colour Adjustments f BA B W Reverse 2 Touch the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS key in the second SPECIAL MODES screen Colour Adjustments Suppress Background Rgb Adjust Sharpness Colour Balance Brightness Intensity Q RGB ADJUST Strengthens or weakens one of three primary colours R red G green or B blue page 2 52 SHARPNESS Sharpens or softens image outlines page 2 53 SUPPRESS Suppresses copying of lighter background areas page 2 54 BACKGROUND Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 51 Copier Operation COLOUR Adjusts the colour tone and density of colour copies page 2 55 BALANCE BRIGHTNESS This copier allows the level of brightness to be adjusted If brightness is selected colour tone can be darkened or lightened page 2 57 INTENSITY This copier allows the level of intensity to be adjusted If intensity is selected colour saturation can be made to be more vivid or more dull page 2 58 RGB A
202. e eee Sen aes Pee es 4 52 Editing and Deleting Sender Information 0 0 00 ce eee nee 4 53 Storing a Group INGEX as se somes dhs Men aaa ean es madam eeCEe amp aoe 4 54 Printing Programmed Information 0 000 eee eee ee eee 4 55 TFOUDICSNOOUNG soc os Sait cee swe cae wean seen 4 57 it YOUR E Mail ISHGtUIICG 3 fac cd an aa te tes eat oooh eat tee ee aw bd 4 59 If a Transmission Error OCCUrS a 0 6 40 0cedw da coard 4 Oeea Re ae aS 408 4 59 WOM OG GMAW le s aara oe eee tle Bas eda ee ae Me Se oe 4 59 Checking Me IP AGCreSS so tiene tund ound vat eur sae Shee eset s 4 60 Important Points When Using Scan to E Mail 000000 e eee 4 62 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Key Operator Programs 2 00000 eee eee neee 4 63 Key Operator Program Stes sonic crwee oe ae he ee od ON Oa eS he es 4 63 Using the Key Operator Programs 0 cc eee ees 4 64 Selling PhOGlaINS 24442605 obs beeen eae RY bene eE Ege hee ee ee 4 65 Network scanner SettingS 0 0 0 00 ccc eee ees 4 65 Default display settings 0 0 eee eee 4 66 The number of direct address keys displayed setting 4 66 Initial resolution setting 2 0 0 cc cee ee ees 4 66 Scan complete sound setting 0 0 0 cee eee eee 4 67 Defaut Sender SEU o45 c5cnceen tcc ieee eax terse Rie oes 4 67 Compression mode at broadcasting 000 eee eee 4 67 Initial file format setting
203. e fusing roller Cautions 1 Do not touch the photoconductive drum Scratches or smudges on the drum will cause dirty prints 2 The fusing unit is extremely hot Exercise care in this area 3 Do not look directly at the light source Doing so may damage your eyes 4 Four adjusters are provided on all optional Adjuster Caster stand paper tray units These adjusters should be lowered until they contact the floor When moving the machine with the optional stand paper tray be sure to raise the adjusters Also unlock the two casters at the front of the optional stand paper tray After moving the Lock Release machine lower the four adjusters until they reach the floor and lock the two casters 5 Do not make any modifications to this machine Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the machine 6 Since this machine is heavy it is recommended that it be moved by more than one person to prevent injury 7 When connecting this machine to a computer be sure to first turn both the computer and the machine off 1 4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Introduction 8 Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law The following items are normally prohibited from printing by national law Other items may be prohibited by local law e Money e Stamps e Bonds e Stocks e Bank drafts e Checks e Passports e Driver s licences BATTERY DISPOSAL THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS
204. e number of rings to any number from 0 to 15 1 If the number of rings is set to 0 2 the machine will receive faxes without ringing The number varies by region 2 In some regions 0 cannot be selected 2 Reception ends When reception ends the machine makes a beep sound The received fax is delivered to the top tray e If the machine has multiple output trays the key operator program can be used to change the output tray for fax reception e Each fax is offset from the previous fax in the output tray to allow easy separation Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Sending the Same Document to Multiple Destinations in a Single Operation Broadcast Transmission If received data cannot be printed If the machine is out of paper or toner or if a paper jam occurs or the machine is busy printing a copy or print job received faxes will be stored in memory until printing is possible When printing is possible the faxes will print automatically however if the machine has run out of paper touch the OK key in the touch panel after adding Jao paper When a received fax is stored in memory the DATA light to the right of the IMAGE SEND key will blink You can also use the transfer function to have another fax machine print the received data See Using the Transfer Function on page 5 47 Advanced Transmission Methods This section explains fax featu
205. e numeric keys to enter the five digit key operator code number Key Operator Code 4 Touch the PRINTER SETTINGS key Follow these steps to select the program that you wish to use aaa In the following steps the setting screens for the CS C selected program will appear Refer to the program explanations on page 3 55 and following and then fol Key Operator low these steps to select a setting for the program 5 Make desired settings for the selected program Detailed descriptions for program settings start on page 3 55 3 52 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Procedure for using key operator programs 6 Press the CLEAR ALL key to exit the program You will exit the key operator programs and return to the main screen Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 53 Printer Operation Key operator program menu The key operator programs are accessed via the following menu structure Refer to this menu when changing the settings explained on the following pages Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 DEFAULT SETTINGS ER ASLETTER SIZE AUTO CHANGE PORT SWITCHING METHOD eb O O O 2 O t Q O gt eb xX t b LL INTERFACE SETTINGS IE gt ENABLEUSBPORT PRINTER SETTINGS E NETWORK SETTINGS ENABLE Netware COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS AUTO COLOUR CALIBRATION RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS INITIALIZE AND OR STORE SETTINGS gt STORE CURRENT CONFIGURATION RESTORE CONFIGURATION
206. e one touch key in the ABC index For information on the ABC index refer to Index keys on page 5 9 4 Touch the OK key 5 68 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing Editing and Deleting Auto Dial Keys and Programs 5 Touch the INDEX key Direct Address Individual No 001 Index Select The Custom Index Where You Register This Address e Select one of the upper row of keys USER 1 through USER 6 to deter mine the location of the one touch key when the GROUP index is displayed instead of the ABC index refer to page 5 9 e The lower keys are for selecting whether to include the one touch key in the FREQUENT USE index e f you touch the wrong key simply touch the correct key 7 Touch the OK key 8 Touch the FAX No key The fax number entry screen appears Corporation Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 69 Fax Unit 5 70 NOTES 9 Use the numeric keys to enter the fax number Direct Address Individual No 001 Fax No Enter The Fax No Via The 10 Key Pad Then Press Ok PE 0666211221 To insert a pause between digits of the number touch the PAUSE key The pause appears as a hyphen Refer to Pause time setting in the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide to set the duration of the pause If you make a mistake press the C key to clear one digit at a time and then enter the correct digit s If you
207. e page 2 21 Extend the copy receptacle and then begin copying To cancel the A3 11 x 17 FULL BLEED function touch the A3 FULL BLEED key again on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen step 1 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 67 Copier Operation Multi page enlargement This function is used to enlarge an original image to a size larger than A3 11 x 17 and print divided images onto multiple sheets of copy paper Example Copy enlarged image on 8 sheets of A3 11 x 17 paper Overlap of sections of image water e There will be a margin around the edges of each 4 8 1 2 x Copy e The original image will be divided and copied onto multiple sheets of paper Areas for overlapping the copies will be made along the leading and trailing edges of each copy 11 size 1 Touch the MULTI PAGE ENLARGEMENT key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen The MULTI PAGE ENLARGEMENT setting screen will appear 2 Select the size system for multi page enlargement Touch the or key to display the size settings of the desired size system A system Image Edit Multi Page Enlargement Enlargement Size Original Size amp A Size Orientation Multi Page Enlargement Enlargement Size Original Size amp B Size 2 68 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Image Edit Menu Inch system Image Edit Multi Page Enlargement Enlargement Size Original Size amp Orientation 3 Set the enlargemen
208. e printer driver properties window that appears when you print from an application or when you select Properties from the printer driver icon menu Click a tab in the properties window to adjust the settings on that tab The following explains how to adjust settings when the properties window is opened from an application The windows that are shown are the PCL5c printer driver in Windows Me Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 15 Printer Operation The printer driver window shown in the following explanation has the following options installed Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit Saddle Stitch Finisher Punch Module Frequently used settings 3 16 The following screen appears when the Main tab is selected The settings and buttons in the screen are explained below Main Paper Advanced watermarks Color Copies m User Settings 2 Factory Defaults ta MV Collate pan 4 fe Document Style m 1Sided E 2Sided Book C 2Sided Tablet Left z 3 Pamphlet Style Staple Tiled Pamphlet None F M Punch m N Up Printing I No Offset 1 Up Job Control Borde L Bad Auto Job Control review Copies Set the number of copies Any number from 1 to 999 can be set Default setting 1 Colour mode display This displays the selected colour mode for printing Three colo
209. e top staple if it is bent If bent staples remain a staple jam will occur again Push the staple box in until it clicks into place Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 65 General Information 1 66 NOTE 16 Push the Saddle Stitch Finisher back against the main unit Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to ensure that stapling is performed properly Disposal of hole punch scrap when the punch unit is installed 1 Unlatch the Saddle Stitch Finisher and slide it away from the main unit 2 Pull out the punch scrap collecting container and empty it Discard the punch scraps in a plastic bag or other con tainer taking care not to let the scraps scatter Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Saddle Stitch Finisher Misfeed in the Saddle Stitch Finisher When a misfeed occurs in the Saddle Stitch Finisher remove the misfed paper follow ing the procedure below 1 Unlatch the Saddle Stitch Finisher and slide it away from the main unit NOTE The Saddle Stitch Finisher and the machine are connected at the rear Exercise caution when pulling them apart 2 Remove the misfed paper from the main unit After removing the misfed paper open and close the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit to reset the jam indicator Misfeed in the transport area fusing area and exit area step 1 of Fusing area on page 1 50 or step 4 on page 1 51
210. eb page select the Enable Password Protection of this Web Site checkbox in the screen that appears when Passwords is selected in the menu frame Enter the administrator password in the Old Admin Password text box and click the Submit button Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 69 Network Scanner Operation Specifications Type Two sided originals Optical resolution Output resolution Output modes Halftone processing File format File creation method Scan destinations Supported client PC operating systems Management system Web browser Network protocol LAN connectivity Supported mail system Number of destinations Number of senders 4 70 Colour scanner Possible 600dpi Colour 100 x 100 150 x 150 200 x 200 300 x 300 600 x 600dpi Black and white 150 x 150 200 x 200 300 x 300 400 x 400 600 x 600dpi 1bit pixel Black and white 24bit pixel Colour 8 bits per colour Error dispersion Black and white 150 200 300 400 600dpi Colour scanning File type PDF JPEG Compression mode LOW MEDIUM HIGH Black and white File type PDF TIFF scanning Compression mode NONE MEDIUM G3 HIGH G4 One page per file One file for all pages scan to FTP scan to E mail Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Ser vice Pack 6 or later Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Home Edi tion Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003 Uses built in Web server Internet Explorer 5 5 or late
211. ed No response from the receiving party Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line A transmission was cancelled while in progress or a stored transmission job was cancelled The memory became full during quick on line transmission The memory became full during reception The transmitted document was over 1500 mm 59 long and therefore could not be received Manual transmission was not successful because a jam occurred The connection was broken because the polling passcode was not correct The machine that was polled does not have a polling function The other machine refused the polling operation or your machine broke the con nection when polled because no data was in memory The other machine refused an F code polling operation or your machine broke the connection when polled because no data was in its F code memory polling box Your machine broke the connection because the other machine specified an F code polling sub address that does not exist in your machine Your machine broke the connection because an incorrect passcode was sent for an F code transmission Your machine broke the connection because the specified sub address for an F code memory box does not exist Your machine broke the connection because the other machine sent an incorrect passcode for F code polling F code polling was attempted however the other machine did not have an F code polling memor
212. ed Tablet Left z Pamphlet Style Staple Tiled Pamphlet None z M Punch 7 No Offset Job Control Auto Job Control review 7 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 17 Printer Operation 6 N Up Printing Each page is reduced to allow multiple pages to be printed on each sheet of paper The pages are printed in Z order on each sheet The following five settings are available 1 Up 2 Up 4 Up 6 Up 8 Up Default setting 1 Up Example 4 Up Border This setting is greyed out when 1 Up is selected Select whether or not to print a border around each page when a setting other than 1 Up is selected Default setting Not selected User Settings The user can store up to 30 sets of settings allowing the settings to be easily changed by simply selecting the desired set Default setting Factory Defaults Save Save the settings under the name that appears in User Settings Up to 20 characters can be entered for the name If none of the settings have been changed the settings are still the factory defaults this button will be greyed out When Delete appears in the button it can be clicked to delete a stored set of user settings Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions D Auto Job Control review Select this to have the job control screen constantly displayed when printing from the printer driver Default setting Not selected Main Paper Adva
213. ed SEW easgar el eee toda eae Cue emer dade J 3 29 POLOG fis se a ce et eae yds fe eo 8 E al Bc dev oe dete ngs ee 3 29 POSTOCI sae G d ar Saou wild eae eed be eee a en Se eee 3 31 watermark Settings 1 5 a00 us ec ceuweee et kee aoa e hea 3 33 COlOr Seting Serenar pee le oe ee ee oe SRS Eo Y 3 35 Web Pages in the Printer 000 eee eee eee 3 40 Printer Configuration Through the Network 000 eee een ees 3 40 Environment required for accessing Web pagesS 2005 3 40 Accessing Web pages and displaying help 200005 3 40 Items and outline of menu frame of Web pages 0085 3 42 System INTONMALON s 63 6 2 eth its Sarde eee dad a a Saree eS 3 42 DEVICE SCID 24 tte te veeenes 4 beet wee he ee bee eos cee 3 43 NGCIWONK SEUD merar euron pecan da Bae s ook ewe eases tae Bead 3 44 Printer Configuration Settings 0000000 ee 3 44 Making Configuration Settings 0 0 0 ccc ees 3 44 Operation procedure common to all printer configuration settings 3 45 DeTaUlSCUINGS wv 7scadewsan teat eneveaa carne ee tame eee anari 3 46 GOODIES peatni Se bette oe oben a bee aa 3 46 ONENA 2 4 4 3 avo dati 4 dle ae eA os Rawanda hee ah eb 4d aa 3 46 DelaullDaderSIZe 3 tv crw ace Ecene soe ere GPa edd eine 3 46 Dela CUIDUT TAY s s eaediee tata date wlan SS Bide hts hoe oo Se 3 46 Default paper type 2 cinaeve cooked BRGY eee eee tia he 3 47 POLSON rae hae sos Ae ee were
214. ed jobs are completed If scanning is completed normally the machine makes a beep sound to inform you that the transmission job is stored and JOB STORED appears in the message display Using the document glass 7 Press the BLACK COPY START key The original is scanned and the READ END key appears in the touch panel If you have another page to scan change pages and then press the BLACK COPY START key Repeat this sequence until all pages have been scanned You can change the resolution and exposure settings as needed for each page see pages 5 15 and 5 17 If the BLACK COPY START key is not pressed within approximately one minute scanning will end automatically and the transmission will be stored 9 After the last page is scanned touch the READ END key Sa The machine makes a beep sound to inform you that the Pg No 2 transmission job is stored and JOB STORED appears in the message display The destination is automatically ess Read End called and the document transmitted after previously stored jobs are completed Open the document glass cover and remove the document Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 21 Fax Unit 5 22 NOTES e Cancelling transmission To cancel transmission while SCANNING ORIGINAL appears in the display or before the READ END key is touched press the C key or the CLEAR ALL key To cancel a transmission job that is already stored press the JOB STATUS
215. ed report e Confidential reception Print out notice page Not print out notice page The Transaction Report shows the date of transmission the time transmission began the other party s name the duration of the operation the number of pages and the result NOTES The list count appears in the column of the Transaction Report and a serial number appears in the FILE column These numbers are not related to the transaction e f desired you can have part of the document printed on the transaction report This setting is enabled in the key operator programs See Original print on transaction report in the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 95 Fax Unit Note O G O oO X Z O NO RESPONSE BUSY CANCEL MEMORY OVER MEM FULL LENGTH OVER ORIGINAL ERROR PASS NG NO RX POLL RX POLL FAIL NO F CODE POLL RX POLL NG F PASS NG BOX NO NG F POLL PASS NG RX NO F CODE POLL Q1 96 Information appearing in the TYPE NOTE column Information such as the type of transmission and type of error appears in the TYPE NOTE column of the Transaction Report or Activity Report The following notes may appear Explanation The transaction was completed normally Communication took place in G3 mode Communication took place in G3 ECM mode Communication took place in Super G3 mode The received data was forward
216. ee page 1 46 e When a misfeed occurs touch the INFORMATION key to display detailed information for misfeed removal A Check locations A B and C in the diagram B at left to remove the original 1 Removing misfeeds from each location Check location A Document feeding area cover Open the document feeding area cover and gently remove the misfed original from the DADF tray Close the document feeding area cover Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 79 Copier Operation Check location B Open the DADF and rotate the two release rollers in the direction of the arrow to make the original feed out Close the DADF and gently remove the original If the misfed original is small Such as an A5 original or if the misfeed occurred in the reversing tray open the DADF right side cover and gently remove the original Close the DADF right side cover Remove the misfed original from the exit area If the misfed original cannot be easily removed from the exit area open the moveable part of the DADF tray and remove the reversing tray and then remove the original After removing a misfed original from the exit area be sure to attach the reversing tray securely to the exit area 2 80 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide User Maintenance for copying 2 Open and close the DADF cover Opening and closing the cover clears the misfeed dis play Copying cannot be resumed until this step is per formed A message m
217. eee XVI Operational Safety Information 1 0 0 0 00 0 cc eee ens xvii WalhteGnance NOrmal siradis were ove ea ae ee eed doe a ok ay 2 xviii Ozone Safety Information nannaa aaea eee eens xviii FOR CONSUMADIES eiai aran na bute kaa e eee eee R es xviii Radio Freg ency EMISSIONS u2 4560 0 2x odtncnddawrdekbou ned ape E XIX Product Satety Certitication ssassn me Saree ae oa ee er ewan ees we xix Regulatory Information for Fax Function XX UA rarere ra ne Gat ste cb a ats Ban Genoa Sha Os ae Wh te ede a N Be ee XX FAX Send Header Requirements 0 00 eee nes XX Data Coupler Information 0 0 00 eee eee xxi Ca AT EA tes ah aus E A Si E Le ee ce om xxii EUDE s eenreres amainar ishn eaae Aa ara E ee 28 tue ae XXIl Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive xxii Environmental Compliance 22000008 xxiii UJSAENCIOY Slal graan a a E EA a a E EA E A xxiii Canada Environmental Choice 0 0 00 ccc ees xxiii EUrODE RENOV 40204 5 4 tes yee aes he a e a a A A ae ee S XXIV legal CODICS 64 6 fees tetas eee eed see cae eae XXIV WE fa oases Ss Ge tee eA cesta aE alt hs Sp As Geta ee ga ead es eg as XXIV CANO0Gst 2 ee eee es eG eee Cee ee hone Vee ee ee XXV TMG COUMMG eass 625 Gat Aesd be Dea a a A cee eee ed banter ele ore ee area ears XXVvi Product Recycling and Disposal 0000eeeaee XXVI Xerox WorkCentr
218. elect the origi nal type from TEXT PRTD PHOTO TEXT PHOTO or TEXT 4 36 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting the Resolution When MANUAL is selected in step 2 If MANUAL is selected you can also select from PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO or MAP in addition to IB tex Photo the selections available for AUTO Printed Photo In the event that moir occurs in the scanned image touch the MOIRE REDUCTION checkbox to select it This will help reduce the occurrence of moir You will return to the initial screen Printed Photo Selecting the Resolution The resolution for scanning an original can be selected Load the original in scanner mode and then follow the steps below The default setting for the resolution is LOWER Change the resolution 1 Touch the RESOLUTION key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 37 Network Scanner Operation B W 150x150dpi 200x200dpi B 300x300dpi 400x400dpi P 600x600dpi 2 Touch the desired resolution key Colour 100x100dpi 150x150dpi 200x200dpi 300x300dpi 600x600dpi Five selections are available for the resolution Touch the desired resolution key under black and white or colour depending on the original to be scanned The selected key is highlighted NOTE To use colour 600 x 600 dpi one 256 MB and one 128 MB memory module or two 256 MB memory modules must be added to the printer controller an
219. eleted and you return to the screen of step 2 If you touch the NO key you will return to the screen of step 2 without deleting the data Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 41 Fax Unit Restricting polling access polling security If you wish to prevent unauthorised fax machines from polling your machine turn on the polling security function When this function is turned on polling permission will only be granted if the fax number of the polling machine as programmed in that machine matches one of the fax numbers you have programmed in your machine as passcode numbers Up to 10 fax numbers can be programmed as passcode numbers To turn on the polling security function and program passcode numbers use the key operator program as explained in Passcode number setting in the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide NOTES gt fyou do not use the polling security function the document will be sent to any fax machine that polls you e To use polling memory with polling security enabled the sender s number of the polling machine must be programmed in that machine and in your machine Own Number Sending This function prints the date time your programmed name your programmed fax number and the transmitted page number at the top centre of each page that you fax All pages that you fax include this information Example of fax page printed out by the receiving machine 11 JUN 2004
220. elopes is 75 to 90 g m2 or 20 to 23 Ibs e Special paper such as heavy paper 2 transparency film and envelopes cannot be output to the centre tray e Paper that cannot be output to the centre tray is output face up to the left tray 1 32 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Loading Paper Paper that can be used for automatic two sided printing Paper used for automatic two sided printing paper that can be fed through the Duplex Module must meet the following conditions Paper type Plain paper as specified on page 1 30 Paper size Must be one of the following standard sizes A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 BSR or A5 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Paper weight 64 to 200 g m2 or 17 to 54 lbs NOTES Special papers as described above cannot be used for automatic two sided printing Heavy paper up to 200 g m2 54 Ibs can be used e The image quality and toner fusibility of special papers may change due to ambient conditions operating conditions and paper characteristics resulting in image quality inferior to that of Xerox standard paper e Various types of plain paper and special paper are sold Some of these cannot be used in the machine Please consult your retailer or your dealer when buying paper Setting the paper type except the Bypass Tray Follow these steps to change the paper type setting when the paper type has been changed in a paper tray Fo
221. ement Size Original Size amp A Size Orientation Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 69 Copier Operation A suitable orientation for placement of the original and the number of sheets of paper required for the enlarged image are displayed based on the selected Original size and enlargement size NOTES The paper size number of sheets required for the enlarged image and the ratio are automatically selected based on the selected original size and enlargement size The paper size and ratio cannot be selected by the operator e The relations between the original size and enlargement size selected by the operator and the automatically selected paper size number of sheets and ratio are shown on page 2 68 e fno paper trays have the size of paper that was automatically selected Load XXX paper will appear Change the paper in one of the trays or the Bypass Tray to the indicated size of paper 5 Place the original on the document glass in accordance with the indicated orientation page 2 4 Multi page enlargement is only possible using the docu ment glass 6 The DADF cannot be used for this function 7 Touch the OK key inside OK key on the MULTI PAGE ENLARGEMENT setting screen Return to the IMAGE EDIT menu screen 8 Touch the OK key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 9 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode Abou
222. enance would be required In this event stop using the machine unplug the power cord and contact your Xerox dealer Note Letters and numbers appear in above When you contact your Xerox dealer please tell your dealer what letters and numbers appear Printer plugged in Plug the printer into a grounded outlet The printer is warming up Warm up time is approximately 99 seconds Wait until the READY indicator lights up Message indicating need to load paper Load paper page 1 21 displayed READY indicator off The machine does not operate Message indicating need to replace the Replace the toner cartridge page 1 42 toner cartridge displayed Message indicating a paper misfeed dis Remove misfed paper page 1 46 played Copying printing is not possible Incorrect Bypass Tray paper size 1 56 A message appears saying that the power must be turned off and then turned on A message appears saying that this type of paper cannot be used for two sided copying Incorrect display of paper sizes A3W A3 B4 A4R 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 or 8 1 2 x 11 R only Turn off the power switch wait about 10 seconds and then turn on the switch again If the same message appears after turning the power switch off and on sev eral times it is possible that the machine needs service In this event contact your dealer Two sided printing is not possible on spe cial paper
223. ent glass 2 2 5 11 automatic 2 sided copying from 2 24 copying from 2 27 scanning 4 26 document style 3 17 2 Up Pamphlet 3 17 N Up 3 18 Tiled Pamphlet 3 17 document type preview color mode 3 36 dual page copy 2 42 DUAL PAGE COPY key 2 37 dual page scan 5 43 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder See DADF Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit 1 13 misfeed 1 53 Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit 1 12 loading paper 1 29 misfeed 1 53 specifications 1 30 E edge erase 2 41 editing F code memory box 5 87 group keys 4 50 5 76 memory box 5 88 one touch keys 4 46 5 72 programmed sender information 4 17 programmed transmission destinations 4 15 programs 5 80 sender information 4 53 E MAIL ADDRESS key 4 20 e mail server settings 4 7 e mail subject 4 7 enable EtherTalk 3 58 enable NetBEUI 3 58 enable NetWare 3 57 enable network port 3 56 enable parallel port 3 56 enable TCP IP 3 57 enable USB port 3 56 enlargement See reduction enlargement envelopes Index loading 1 26 printing 1 27 erase centre 2 41 edge 2 41 ERASE key 2 37 error code table scanning 4 59 exit area misfeed 1 50 exit tray 1 13 3 28 exposure adjustment copying 2 25 fax 5 8 5 16 5 17 scanning 4 36 EXPOSURE key 4 20 exposure settings default scanning 4 68 Exposure tab 2 3 2 25 extension phone connecting 5 4 using 5 67 face up and face down output 1 13 fax data forward 1 38 Fax Expansion Memory 1 13 FAX JOB key 1 18 fax mode 5 6 fax transmission cancelling
224. er Black toner NOTES There may be cases that copy images become light or uneven before the message is displayed depending on the way the machine is used If this occurs take out the toner cartridge by following the same steps as replacement shake it horizontally to even out the toner in the cartridge and re insert the toner cartridge If copy images do not improve even after following this procedure replace the toner cartridge with a new cartridge e If one of the toners is out including black toner colour copying will not be possible If Y M or C runs out but BK toner remains black and white copying will still be possible Follow these steps to replace the toner cartridge that is out of toner 1 Open the front cover Arrangement of colour toner cartridges Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Replacing the Toner Cartridges 2 Lift the cartridge lock lever toward you Example Replacing the yellow toner cartridge 3 While holding the lock lever on the toner cartridge pull the toner cartridge toward you Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown in the illustration and pull it out of the machine 4 Remove a new toner cartridge from the package and shake it horizontally five or six times NOTE Shake the toner cartridge well to ensure that the toner flows well and will not stick to the inside of the cartridge Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 43 General
225. er Unit as shown in the illustration taking care not to tear the paper Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Misfeed Removal Make sure that there is no misfed paper in the machine Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal 11 Gently close the Duplex Module Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine Misfeed in the upper or lower tray To remove misfed paper from the upper tray or lower tray follow steps 1 through 5 of Misfeed in the stand 1 Tray Unit beginning on page 1 52 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 55 General Information Troubleshooting Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user If you are unable to solve the problem by checking the list turn off the power switch unplug the power cord Problems related to general use of the machine are described below For problems related to the copy function see page 2 83 For fax printer and network scanner problems see the manuals for those functions For peripheral device problems see the explanation of the device If the message CALL FOR SERVICE CODE appears in the touch panel turn off the power switch wait about 10 seconds and then turn the power switch back on If the message still appears after turning the switch off and on several times it is likely that a failure has occurred and maint
226. er the dimen sions of the paper To set the paper size when an extra size of paper is loaded in the Bypass Tray see page 1 35 1 Perform steps 1 through 4 of Setting the paper type at left 2 Touch the key to display the paper size setting screen Custom Settings i Tray 3 Type Size Setting Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Loading Paper 3 When the loaded paper size appears in the display if you loaded an INCH based size such as 8 1 2 x 11 touch the size key to highlight it and then touch the OK key to complete the procedure 4 If an irregular size of paper was loaded after the EXTRA key was touched touch the j key in the screen of step 2 to display the following screen year EEJ a Jy y 182 63927297 v When the screen opens the X key will be highlighted Use the and touch keys to enter the X dimension Next touch the Y key to highlight it and enter the dimensions for Y The permitted range for the X dimension is 139 to 432 mm 5 1 2 to 17 inches and the permitted range for the Y dimension is 182 to 297 mm 7 1 4 to 11 3 4 inches When both have been entered touch the OK to complete the operation Setting the paper type and paper size in the Bypass Tray Follow the steps below to set the type and size of the paper loaded in the Bypass Tray 1 For copy mode or printer mode touch the appropriate key When copy mode is selected waa 1OUCh the More key in t
227. ergy Star aetiis As an ENERGY STAR partner Xerox Corporation has determined that the basic configuration of this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency The ENERGY STAR and ENERGY STAR MARK are registered United States trademarks The ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is a team effort between U S European Union and Japanese governments and the office equipment industry to promote energy efficient copiers printers fax multifunction machine personal computers and monitors Reducing product energy consumption helps combat smog acid rain and long term changes to the climate by decreasing the emissions that result from generating electricity Xerox ENERGY STAR equipment is preset at the factory to enter a low power state and or shut off completely after a specified period of use These energy saving features can reduce product energy consumption in half when compared to conventional equipment Canada Environmental Choice i s VIR onn Terra Choice Environmental Serviced Inc of Canada has verified that this product conforms to all applicable Environmental Choice EcoLogo requirements for minimized impact to the environment As a participant in the Environmental Choice program Xerox Corporation has determined that this product meets the Environmental Choice guidelines for energy efficiency Environment Canada established the Environmental Choice program in 1988 to help consumers identify envi
228. errupt copying page 2 77 the following message will appear Ready To Copy When Interrupt Copying Is Finished Press Cancel 9 When the copy job is finished press the key ACC C key 1 20 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Loading Paper Managing the Machine Loading Paper The message ADD PAPER or OPEN TRAY AND ADD PAPER will appear when paper runs out during operation Follow the procedure below to load paper NOTES Donotuse curled or folded paper Doing so may cause a misfeed e For best results use paper supplied by Xerox See pages 1 30 1 45 e When you change the paper type and size in Paper Tray 1 you must change the paper type and size settings as explained in Setting the paper type except the Bypass Tray on page 1 33 e Do not place heavy objects or press hard on any tray which is pulled out Loading paper in Paper Tray 1 1 Pull out Paper Tray 1 Gently pull the tray out until it stops Load a stack of paper no higher than the indicator line about 500 sheets of the recommended paper for colour 80 g m2 or 21 lbs or approximately 500 sheets of Xerox standard paper 80 g m2 or 21 Ibs 3 Gently push tray 1 into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 21 General Information 4 Set the paper type If you change the paper type be sure to set the paper type refer to Setting the paper type
229. es touch the COLOUR TONE ENHANCEMENT checkbox The following restrictions apply when colour tone enhancement is selected Colour tone enhancement cannot be selected at the same time as COPY OF COPY mode above Brightness adjustment page 2 57 and single colour copying page 2 60 are not possible The DADF cannot be used It can be used when making black and white copies 3 Ifa setting other than AUTO has been selected in step 2 manually adjust the copy exposure mamm Touch the _ _ key to make darker copies NOTES Recommended exposure levels for the text mode 1 to 2 Dark originals such as newspaper 3 Normal density originals 4 to 5 Originals written with pencils or light colour characters e Colour adjustment menu As special functions for colour copying the following colour image adjustments can be made page 2 51 RGB ADJUST SHARPNESS SUPPRESS BACKGROUND COLOUR BALANCE BRIGHTNESS INTENSITY Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 27 Copier Operation 4 Use the numeric keys to set the desired number of copies alLa Le MEE x Eoee 5 Press the Colour Copy Start 00 or Black Copy Start O key To return to the automatic exposure mode touch the Exposure tab and select AUTO NOTE The exposure level for automatic exposure adjustment can be changed using the Image quality adjustment key operator program Reduction Enlargement Zoom Reduction a
230. es 5 81 through 5 88 for the procedures for creating editing and deleting memory boxes Up to 30 end receiving machines 30 one touch keys or group keys can be pro grammed in the F code relay broadcast memory box A document received from a relay request machine is initially stored in the memory box of your machine Your machine the relay machine also prints the document thus the document is first stored as a print job and then as transmission jobs to each of the programmed end receiving machines The document data is automatically cleared after transmission to all end receiving machines is completed End receiving machines are programmed using auto dial keys one touch keys or group keys If you need to program an end receiving machine that has not been programmed in a one touch key program the number in a one touch key first and then create the memory box Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Using an Extension Phone Using the F Code Relay Request Function your machine requests a relay broadcast Ask the operator of the other F Code machine the relay machine to create an F Code relay broadcast memory box that contains the end receiving machines to which you wish to send a fax and ask for the sub address SUB and passcode SID of that box When you dial the relay machine to send the fax enter the sub address and passcode after the fax number The fax will be stored in the relay machine s memory box and the relay machine
231. essage es Paper ous 2 Sided Cod LOAD xxxxxx PAPER will appear If the message appears load paper in a paper tray with paper of the required size Even if the message above is displayed copying can be performed onto the currently selected paper Note The following requirements must be satisfied Originals of a standard size A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R or A5 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 are set and the auto paper select function is enabled If originals of a size other than the sizes above are to be copied manually select the desired paper size by touch ing the More key in the Paper Select display and then touching the desired paper size selection key The selected key will be highlighted and the paper selection screen will close To close the paper selection screen without making a selection touch the OK key 4 Select the desired output mode see page 2 18 a The sort mode is the default mode Copy Copy Output 1 Sided FB cotlates 2 Sided stapled 2 Sided ___ UUncol lated J Nore rP Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Normal Copying 5 Use the numeric keys to set the desired number of copies Up to 999 can be set If you are only making a single copy the copy can be made with the copy number display showing 0 Use the C clear key to cancel an entry if a mistake has been made 6 Press the COLOUR COPY START 00 or BLACK
232. evers and sliding them to the paper size to be loaded The guide plates A and B are slidable Adjust them to the paper size to be loaded while squeezing their lock levers 1 22 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Loading Paper 4 Load paper into the tray 5 Gently push tray 1 into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine 6 Set the paper type of the paper that was loaded in the 1st tray If you loaded a different type of paper from the previous paper be sure to set the new paper type as explained in Setting the paper type except the Bypass Tray on page 1 33 Changing paper size in Paper Tray 1 is now complete NOTE fthe size slide position step 2 of page 1 22 is not set correctly after changing the paper size or if the paper type page 1 33 is not set correctly incorrect paper selection or paper misfeeding may occur Loading paper in the Bypass Tray The Bypass Tray can be used to feed the same paper specified for Paper Tray 1 or for Special papers For paper types that can be used in the Bypass Tray see the specifi cations for the Bypass Tray in the paper tray specifications page 1 30 Up to 250 sheets of Xerox standard paper or up to 100 postcards can be set in the Bypass Tray NOTES After loading the paper in the Bypass Tray be sure to set the paper type and size step 4 if these were changed e Do not use inkjet paper This may cause misfeeds in the fusin
233. ey operator program Initial file format setting page 4 67 5 If you wish to scan in colour touch the COLOUR key If you wish to scan in black and white touch the B W key The file format settings differ for colour and black and white Be sure to select a correct file format for the type of scan you will perform 4 28 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Destination Inout Methods 6 Select the file type and the compression mode Scanning in colour File Type Compression Mode The file format is initially set to File type PDF Compression mode MEDIUM Scanning in black and white COJTONE HT ay Gt BITS LAbe BITS BROLWSE The file format is initially set to File type PDF Compression mode HIGH G4 7 Touch the outer OK key The destination selection screen will appear 8 Select where you put the destination Select Addressee Type Normally touch the TO key However if you are performing a broadcast transmission and wish to CC or BCC the document to the entered e mail address touch the CC or BCC key After touching one of the keys you will return to the initial screen 9 If you wish to enter another e mail address repeat steps 2 through 8 If you are not performing a broadcast transmission go directly to step 11 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 29 Network Scanner Operation NOTE f you frequently use broadcasting to send documents to the same group of
234. f the sub address and passcode that the other machine sends match the sub address and passcode programmed in your machine for that box Therefore to allow communication you must inform the other party of the sub address and pass code of the memory box Likewise to send a document to a memory box in another machine or use polling to retrieve a document from that memory box you must know the sub address and passcode of that memory box Box names are used only to man age boxes in the machine you do not need to inform the other party of a box name the other party only needs to know the sub address and passcode This machine uses the term sub address for the location of the memory box and the term passcode for the authorization number of the memory box however the prod ucts of other manufacturers may use different terms When asking the other party for a sub address and passcode you may find it useful to refer to the 3 character alphabet ical terminology used by the ITU T This machine ITU T F code polling memory F code Confidential box F code Relay Broadcast box Function Sub address SEP SUB SUB Passcode PWD SID SID 5 50 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Transmission Between Machines Supporting F codes Entering Dialing a Fax Number with a Sub Address and Passcode When transmitting to a memory box in another fax machine the sub address and passcode must be entered after the other machine s fax number Enter the other m
235. fed from the Bypass Tray See page 1 28 See page 1 28 See page 1 30 Each tray can hold approximately 500 sheets of the recommended paper for colour 80 g m2 or 21 Ibs or approximately 500 sheets of Xerox standard paper 80 g m2 or 21 lIbs Push this release up to open the left side cover See page 1 10 and are peripheral devices For a description of these devices see page 1 10 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Interior WG NK x a SS eS Q 5 Fusing unit Toner images are fused here CAUTION Toner cartridge page 1 42 Right side cover Right cover of paper tray Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide ZI CIS eS Vis A ME The fusing unit is hot Take care in removing misfed paper Open when a misfeed has occurred in the paper feed area Open this cover to remove paper misfed in the paper tray Part Names and Functions The toner cartridge must be replaced when indicated on the operation panel see General Information Part names and functions of peripheral devices ay SSM High Capacity The High Capacity Feeder provides the added convenience of having 3 500 sheets of Feeder A4 or 8 1 2 x 11 paper 80 g m2 or 21 Ibs available Stand 1 Tray This stand has one paper tray It can hold
236. fied that the copies are acceptable the job can be resumed from the machine s operation panel The trial set of copies is included in the total number of sets If the copies are not acceptable the job can be deleted without printing Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 23 Printer Operation PIN 5 digit identification number A PIN number can be programmed in the printer driver for increased security when printing jobs from the hold job list When this is done the PIN number must be entered at the machine s operation panel to print a job in the job hold list e Hold After Print mode with password Password entry on the operation panel of the printer is needed for additional printing of the hold job e Hold Before Print mode with password Password entry on the operation panel of the printer is needed to start printing e Proof Print mode with password Password entry on the operation panel of the printer is needed to print the remaining sets after printing one set The first set is printed without password entry Default setting Normal Print Notify Job End Select whether or not you wish to be notified about printing completed This function only operates when the Xerox Print Status Monitor is running Even if selected the function will not operate when the Xerox Print Status Monitor is not running Default setting Selected 3 Defaults Returns the settings in the job control window to the default sett
237. follow steps 6 and 7 e When you have finished editing or deleting touch the EXIT key 4 46 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Editing and Deleting One Touch Keys 4 Touch the key corresponding to the information you wish to change change the information in the same way as you stored the information on pages 4 42 to 4 46 Direct Address Amend Delete No 001 abcd abcd com PDF High G4 Colour PDF Medium 5 Make sure that your changes are correct and then touch the EXIT key If you wish to change another one touch key repeat steps 3 through 5 The following steps are for deleting a one touch key 6 Touch the DELETE key If you wish to delete another one touch key repeat steps 3 6 and 7 PDF High G4 Colour Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 47 Network Scanner Operation NOTES Ifyou cannot edit or delete a one touch key If you attempt to edit or delete a one touch key in the following situation a warning message will appear and editing deletion will not be possible In this event delete the one touch key from the group or cancel or change the hyperlink e mail selection The one touch key is included in a group key The one touch key is included as a hyperlink e mail destination for Scan to FTP e Destinations for Scan to FTP that are stored in one touch keys cannot be edited or deleted from the touch panel of the machine Use the Web page to edit or delete these destinatio
238. for Scan to E mail make sure this key is highlighted page 4 29 If the key is not highlighted touch it so that it is highlighted If you wish to send CC Carbon Copy copies of a Scan to E mail transmission to other recipients in addition to the main recipient touch this key so that it is highlighted and then select the CC destinations page 4 29 If you wish to send BCC Blind Carbon Copy copies of a Scan to E mail transmis sion to other recipients in addition to the main recipient touch this key so that it is high lighted and then select the BCC destinations Other recipients will not be informed that a copy was sent to the BCC recipients page 4 29 This shows the one touch keys that have been stored on the selected index card The key type is indicated by the icon at the right Ey Scan to E mail TO Scan to E mail CC Gi Scan to E mail BCC lal Scan to FTP Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 21 NOTE 5 Display switching keys CONDITION SETTINGS key GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH key ABC lt gt GROUP key Q Index keys 4 22 Network Scanner Operation This can be changed to 6 8 or 12 using the key operator program The number of direct address keys displayed setting page 4 66 If desired you can use the key operator program Default display settings page 4 66 to set the default screen to the group address directory In cases where the one touc
239. for storing auto dial numbers in a group index is explained in step 6 on page 5 69 and the procedure for switching between the ABC index and the group indexes is explained on page 5 9 5 80 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Programming Editing and Deleting F Code Memory Boxes 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key and then touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 5 67 2 Touch the CUSTOM INDEX key Direct Address Program Custom Index F Code Memory Box 3 Touch an index key USER 1 to USER 6 You can enter a name for the selected index Custom Index Custom Settings Select The Key To Be Custom Named When touched the letter entry screen appears 4 Enter a maximum of 6 characters for the index name Use the key to clear the displayed name and then enter the desired name Refer to page 5 90 for the procedure for entering letters When finished touch the OK key The new name appears in the screen of step 3 5 If you wish to program another index name repeat steps 3 and 4 When finished touch the OK key To change a user index name re enter the name as explained in steps 3 and 4 Programming Editing and Deleting F Code Memory Boxes The procedure for programming a memory box for F code transmission is explained here There are three types of F code memory boxes F code polling memory page 5 52 F code confidential transmission page 5 56 and F code relay broadc
240. from 1 to no pi V Collate Selection Cancel 3 4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting the Printer Drivers Print window in Windows XP a General Select Printer Add Printer Status Ready C Print to file Location Comment Find Printer Page Range All Number of copies tion Curent Page O Pages 1 65535 Collate H 2 Enter either a single page number or a single GH 2 A page range For example 5 12 3 In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 click the Properties button In Windows 2000 click the displayed tab In Windows XP Server 2003 click the Preferences button NOTE For detailed explanations of the following settings see Setting the Printer Driver Properties on page 3 15 Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color Copies m User Settings f Factory Defaults Collate sens GF Document Style 1 Sided 25ided Book 2Sided Tablet Left Pamphlet Style Staple Tied Pamphlet z None z E Bunch pNUpPriting J7 No Offset 1 Up Job Control F Border r Finishing Binding Edge a J Auto Job Control review 4 Click the Color tab and select Gray Scale for the Color Mode setting Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color r Orignal Type Photo Print Priority Dr oto awing Thin line Speed eb Page Custom T All Text
241. function is convenient when sending important documents that you only want a specific person to see or when multiple departments share a single fax machine 1 Document data together Sub address OOOO with a sub address and passcode ato lt SJ SOR 2 Check sub address and passcode fos I O 1 5 UE Xz Z O m Passcode NOTES a Data is only printed if correct 3 Data is read into the confidential passcode is entered memory box reception is permitted As the above diagram shows receiving document data to the machine s F code confi dential memory box is called F code confidential reception and sending document data to another machine s F code confidential memory box is called F code confiden tial transmission e Refer to pages 5 81 through 5 88 for the procedures for creating editing and deleting F code confidential memory boxes e Take care not to forget the print PIN programmed in the F code confidential memory box If you forget the passcode consult your dealer Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide F Code Confidential Transmission F Code Confidential Transmission F code confidential transmission is performed in the same way as a normal transmis sion however you must enter the sub address SUB and passcode SID after the fax number of the other machine You can omit the passcode if the other machine does not use a passcode For the procedure for entering sub addresses and pass
242. g for images containing combinations of text photos graphs etc Custom Color Mode Select thecolour mode for printing Selecting Printing Functions Color Mode z Gip Brint Bront S pe ed All Text to Black Color Adjustment When Automatic is selected a decision is made page by page If colours other than black are used colour printing takes place If only black is used black and white printing takes place This is convenient when colour and black and white pages are mixed together however the print speed is slower Default setting Color The image of the page layout in on page 3 16 varies as follows depending on the colour mode setting Displayed on tabs other than the Watermarks and Color tabs When set to Automatic When set to Color Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 37 Printer Operation Print Priority Select whether priority is given to speed or quality when printing Quality Select this when you want a high quality image even if more time is required for printing 1 This cannot be selected if only standard memory 128 MB is installed This can only be selected when the Color Mode above is set to Gray Scale Speed Select this when you wish to print quickly even if the image quality is inferior Default setting Speed All Text to Black When you wish to have all colour text printed in black select this
243. g to adjust the angle of the text of the currently selected watermark Select any angle from 90 to 90 Default setting 45 6 Edit Fonts Use this setting to select the font of the currently selected watermark Edit Color Use this setting to adjust the colour of the font of the currently selected watermark Transparency Text Select this checkbox when you wish to have the characters of the watermark printed faintly in the background of the text Default setting Selected On First Page Only Select this checkbox when you want to have a watermark printed on only the first page of a print job Default setting Not selected As Outline Only Select this checkbox when you want to print only the outline of the characters of a watermark Default setting Not selected This setting cannot be selected when setting is selected Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions Color settings When the Color tab is selected the following screen appears The settings and but tons in this screen are explained below Main Paper Advanced watermarks Color Original Type Color Mode Automatic Me 3 a Eint Priority Speed Drawing Thin line Web Page Custom All Text to Black Use this setting for images containing combinations of text photos graphs etc E Custom Original Type This displays the currently selected document type and
244. g unit Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 23 General Information 1 Open the Bypass Tray When loading paper that will extend past the end of the tray pull out the tray extension to support the paper and to allow the paper sensors to properly sense the paper size Be sure to pull the tray extension all the way out If the tray extension is not pulled all the way out the size of the paper loaded in the Bypass Tray may not display correctly lt P To support papers that extend past the tray extension Zs pull out the wire extension ST ome Z 4A ZL 2 Set the Bypass Tray guides to the width of the copy paper 3 Insert the copy paper all the way into the Bypass Tray Do not force the paper in Place the copy paper face up If the Bypass Tray guides are set wider than the copy paper the inside of the machine may become soiled resulting in smudges on succeeding copies Special purpose papers other than Xerox recommended transparency film must be fed individually Multiple sheets of Xerox recommended transparency film can be loaded in the Bypass Tray 1 24 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Loading Paper 4 Set the type and size of the paper loaded in the Bypass Tray If you loaded a different type of paper from the previous paper be sure to set the new paper type as explained in Setting the paper type and paper size in the Bypass Tray
245. gned to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant WARNING Ask your local Telephone Company for the modular jack type installed on your line Connecting this machine to an unauthorized jack can damage Telephone Company equipment You not Xerox assume all responsibility and or liability for any damage caused by the connection of this machine to an unauthorized jack You may safely connect the machine to the following standard modular jack USOC Ru 11C using the compliant telephone line cord with modular plugs provided with the installation kit The Ringer Equivalence Number or REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local Telephone Company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US XRXMM07BZSA1 The digits 07 are the REN without a decimal point e g 07 is a REN of 0 7 For earlier products the REN is separately shown on the label If this Xerox equipment causes harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required Bu
246. gs click the OK button to close the printer properties window NOTE Using the Bypass Tray When the paper source is set to the Bypass Tray be sure to set the paper size and paper type on the machine s operation panel This procedure is explained on page 1 23 7 Click the OK button in the Print window in Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 or the Print button in Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Printing using optional peripheral equipment The procedure for printing from WordPad using optional peripheral equipment is explained below If you do not have any documents created in WordPad create a doc ument that can be used for test printing 1 This is a standard accessory program in Windows 1 Open a document created in WordPad 3 12 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting the Printer Drivers 2 Select Print from the File menu of WordPad The Print window appears File Edit View Insert Fe Hew Ctrl Open Ctrl 0 Save Ctrl 5 Save As Print Ctrl P Print Preview Page Setup Recent File Send Exit Print window in Windows Me Printer Name Xerox C226 E Properties Status Default printer Ready Type xerox WorkCentre C226 Where LPT1 Comment Print to file Print range Copies All Number of copies fi Pages from f to r ek p M Collate Selection Cancel Print window in Windows XP n General Select Printer E
247. gs are explained from page 4 3 on The settings must be established by the network administrator Such settings must be effected by the system administrator who has the special network related backgrounds e The explanations in this section assume that the person who will install the product and the users of the product have a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows e For information on the operating system please refer to your operating system manual e This section assumes that several options have been installed Options required to use the network scanner function e Scan kit e Memory To use the network scanner function in colour up to 300 dpi or B W mode up to 600 dpi For printer controller Add one 256 MB module Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 1 Network Scanner Operation To use the network scanner function in colour or B W modes up to 600 dpi For printer controller Add two 256 MB modules For image memory Add one 256 MB module 4 2 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide About the Network Scanner Function About the Network Scanner Function The Scan Kit adds network scanner functionality to your machine A machine with the network scanner functionality can scan a paper document photograph or other printed information into a data file and send the file to a file server or personal com puter over a corporate network intranet or the Internet You can select from the following two transmission methods depending o
248. h keys cannot all be displayed on one screen this shows how many screens are left Touch the W9 keys to move through the screens This displays the Condition setting screen page 4 19 which is used to set various conditions This feature makes it possible to search for an e mail address in an Internet or intranet directory database page 4 30 To use this function the IP address or network name of the LDAP server must be set as well as an account name and password These settings are configured by accessing the Web server in the machine from a computer Click LDAP in the Web page menu frame to display the LDAP Setup screen Touch this key to switch between the alphabetical index and the group index One touch key destinations are stored on each of these index cards alphabetical index or group index Touch an index key to display the card Group indexes make it possible to store one touch keys by group with an assigned name for easy reference This is done with the custom settings refer to page 4 17 Frequently used one touch key destinations can be stored on the FREQUENT USE card for convenient access Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Basic Transmission Method Sending an Image Basic Transmission Method 1 Make sure the machine is in scanner mode When the IMAGE SEND key light is on the machine is in scanner mode If the light is not on press the IMAGE SEND key When the optional Fax Unit is ins
249. h the 1 gt 2 Sided key Example of a Example of a portrait oriented landscape oriented Original Original 7 1 When making automatic two sided copies of a one sided A3 11 x 17 or B4 8 1 2 x 14 size portrait original or when the front and back side of a two sided original are copied backwards a Inthe 2 Sided Copy display touch the More key b Touch the BINDING CHANGE key 2 24 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Exposure Adjustments 4 Touch the OK key Make selections and proceed as in steps 3 to 7 on pages 2 22 and 2 23 Exposure Adjustments This copier has seven exposure modes to choose from AUTO TEXT PRTD PHOTO TEXT PHOTO TEXT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO and MAP AUTO This is the standard initial setting for this copier When a black and white copy is made the exposure is automatically adjusted to obtain the best image quality When a full colour copy is made the image is adjusted in the same way as when TEXT PRTD PHOTO initial settings is selected TEXT PRTD PHOTO TEXT PHOTO TEXT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO and MAP The exposure can be manually adjusted in 9 steps 1 Touch the Exposure tab 2 Select AUTO TEXT PRTD PHOTO TEXT PHOTO TEXT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO or MAP depending upon the original type L_ Example stone oe a The TEXT PRTD PHOTO key is selected Enhancement Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 25 Copier Operation NO
250. h the SPECIAL MODES key and then touch the MEMORY BOX key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen ere te eT at Special Modes f The memory box menu screen appears terory box To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 57 Fax Unit 2 Touch the PRINT DATA key Confidential Reception 3 Touch the memory box key that has the document data you wish to print Ga e A mark appears to the right of memory boxes that have received document data ae A memory box cannot be selected while it is being used for transmission 4 Press the numeric keys to enter the 4 digit print PIN As each digit is entered changes to If the print PIN you entered is correct the message ahi ee enacts PRESS START TO PRINT DATA appears a Ifthe print PIN is not correct the message PIN IS NOT J VERIFIED appears and you return to the entry screen To return to the screen of step 3 touch the CANCEL key 5 Press the BLACK COPY START key Printing begins A NOTE f received data remains in an F code confidential memory box the memory box cannot be deleted 5 58 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide F Code Relay Broadcast Transmission F Code Relay Broadcast Transmission The F Code relay broadcast function allows the machine to act as a relay machine for a br
251. has been set for the machine can be found in this list Follow the procedure below to check the IP address using NIC PAGE e Using the key operator programs The IP address can be verified using the key operator programs To use this procedure consult your key operator e How to use the NIC Manager utility on the WorkCentre C226 PCL Print Drivers and Printer Network Seiting Utilities CD ROM NIC Manager on the WorkCentre C226 PCL Print Drivers and Printer Network Setting Utilities CD ROM can be used to configure and check the IP address Checking the IP address from the CUSTOM SETTINGS screen of the operation panel 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key The custom setting menu screen will appear 3 64 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Notice Page Printing 4 Touch the NIC PAGE key Printer PROCESSING PRINT DATA appears in the message settings List screen and printing begins To cancel printing touch the NIC Page CANCEL key Appendix This section contains product specifications and other technical information Notice Page Printing A notice page will be printed when the current print job cannot be run due to a system limitation and an explanation of the limitation is too lengthy to be shown in the mes sage display A notice page will describe the limitation and other possible ways instead of possibilities to run the job A notice page will be printed in the following cases e When the print
252. hat is humid at a high tempera ture or an extremely low temperature Paper damp Adjust the contrast using DISPLAY CONTRAST of custom settings page 1 37 The contrast on the touch panel is too high or too low Is LCD contrast properly adjusted 1 58 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Peripheral Devices Saddle Stitch Finisher This section explains procedures for using the peripheral devices such as the Saddle Stitch Finisher Saddle Stitch Finisher The Saddle Stitch Finisher can automatically place two staples for centreline binding of prints or copies and fold them along the centreline An optional hole punching unit is available for installation into the finisher Part names and functions Stapler compiler Paper to be stapled is stacked temporarily When printing on post cards or envelopes remove the output from here Offset tray Output which is stapled or offset will be delivered to this tray Saddle stitch tray Saddle stitched output is delivered here 4 Top cover Open for misfeed removal Stapler section Open the front cover and pull out this section to replace the staple cartridge or to remove jammed Staples Front cover Open to replace the Staple cartridge to remove the misfed paper or to remove jammed staples NOTES Donot press on the Saddle Stitch Finisher particularly the offset tray e Use caution when near the offset tray during printing
253. he C key and re enter alle the number You can also use the REDIAL key or an ENG i auto dial number w If you need to insert a pause between digits when dial ing out from a PBX or when dialing an international num ber touch the PAUSE key in the upper right corner of the screen Each time you touch the PAUSE key a hyphen appears and a 2 second pause is inserted The PAUSE key is also be used to link numbers together this is called chain dialing Enter a number touch the PAUSE key to enter a hyphen and then enter another number with the numeric keys or by pressing a one touch key The linked numbers will be dialed as one number The duration of each pause can be changed with the key operator program 5 20 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Sending a Fax Using the DADF 7 Press the BLACK COPY START key Scanning begins lf there are no previous jobs in progress and the line is free the machine will dial the receiving machine and N begin transmission as soon as the first page is scanned Transmission will take place while any remaining pages are scanned See Quick On line on page 5 24 If there is a previously stored job or a job is in progress or if the line is being used all pages of the document are scanned into memory and stored as a transmission job This is called memory transmission the destination is automatically called and the document transmitted after previously stor
254. he SPEAKER key to dial and transmit a fax manually During dialing it changes into the PAUSE key and after touching the SUB ADDRESS key it changes into the SPACE key Touch this key to redial the number most recently dialed with the numeric keys or a one touch key After dialing this key changes into the NEXT ADDRESS key Touch this key to display the address directory screen Touch this key when you want to use an auto dial number one touch dialing or group dialing Touch this key to enter a sub address and passcode when using F code transmission page 5 56 When performing a broadcast transmission page 5 30 touch this key to check your selected destinations The selected destinations will appear and any unneeded desti nations can be deleted This key appears when the network scanner option is installed Touch the key to switch between the scanner screen and the fax screen When the fax screen appears FAX is highlighted When the scanner screen appears SCANNER is highlighted Fax Unit SPECIAL MODES Two sided Original icon display ORIGINAL RESOLUTION EXPOSURE Special function icon display Touch this key to set one of the following special functions e Timer transmission page 5 32 e Polling page 5 34 e Dual page scan page 5 43 e Program page 5 44 e Memory box page 5 38 Icons appear here when you touch the ORIGINAL key and select two sided scan ning The
255. he IP address can be verified using the key operator programs To use this procedure consult your key operator The key operator programs cannot be used when DHCP is being used 3 How to use the NIC Manager utility on the Software CD ROM NIC Manager on the Software CD ROM can be used to configure and check the IP address For detailed instructions see the online manual Print Server Card Users Manual on the Software CD ROM To view the online manual Print Server Card Users Manual specify the following path substitute the letter of your CD ROM drive for R R Tool Manual English Checking the IP address from the CUSTOM SETTINGS screen of the operation panel 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key The custom setting menu screen will appear 2 Touch the LIST PRINT key 4 60 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Checking the IP Address 3 Touch the PRINTER TEST PAGE key Printer Test Page Sending Addr js List Fax 4 Touch the NIC PAGE key Printer PROCESSING PRINT DATA appears in the message Pe screen and printing begins To cancel printing touch the CANCEL key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 61 Network Scanner Operation Important Points When Using Scan to E Mail Be very careful not to send image data files that are too large Your mail server s system administrator may have placed a limit on the amount of data that can be sent in one e mail transmission If
256. he Paper Select display of the main screen of copy mode When printer mode is selected Touch the PAPER SELECT key in the main screen of GREE printer moce Paper Select i Condition Settings Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 35 General Information 2 Touch the key for the desired paper type When copy mode is selected The key for the selected paper type will be highlighted J Paper Select Copy Ratio f The steps that follow differ depending on the paper type selected Follow the steps for the selected type e f you touched PLAIN go to step 6 e If you touched HEAVY PAPER go to step 3 e f you touched TRANSPARENCY go to step 4 e f you touched ENVELOPE go to step 5 3 Touch HEAVY PAPER 1 or HEAVY PAPER 2 and go to step 6 Heavy Paperl 106g m 200g m Heavy Paper2 201g m 300g m For the types of heavy paper that can be used see page 1 32 4 Touch SPEED MODE or QUALITY MODE for the transparency film and go to step 7 Quality Mode e SPEED MODE is for fast printing e QUALITY MODE is for a high quality image 1 36 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Custom Settings 5 Touch the type of envelope and go to step 7 DL 6 If you inserted a non standard size of paper in the Bypass Tray remove the checkmark from ENABLE AUTO SIZE DETECTION and then touch the EXTRA SIZE tab When the screen opens the X key will be highlighted
257. he electrical outlet and contact your local Xerox Service Representative or Service Provider immedi ately Maintenance Information Do not attempt any maintenance procedure that is not specifically described in the documentation that is supplied with your copier printer Do not use aerosol cleaners The use of cleaners that are not approved may cause poor performance of the equipment and could create a dangerous condition Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in this manual Keep all of these materials out of the reach of children Do not remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws There are no parts behind these cov ers that you can maintain or service e Do not perform any maintenance procedures unless you have been trained to do them by an autho rized local dealer or unless a procedure is specifically described in the user manuals Ozone Safety Information This product will produce ozone during normal operation The ozone produced is heavier than air and is dependent on copy volume Providing the correct environmental parameters as specified in the Xerox installation procedure will ensure that the concentration levels meet safe limits If you need additional information about ozone please request the Xerox publication Ozone by calling 1 800 828 6571 in the United States and Canada In other markets please contact your authorized local dealer or Service Provider For Consumables Store all consuma
258. he image of the originals may be rotated as needed 3 Select the layout Select the order in which the originals will be arranged on the copy The arrows in the above diagram indicate the directions in which the images are arranged Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 65 Copier Operation 4 Select whether or not to add borderlines When the BORDER LINE checkbox is selected border lines are added around the borders of the images 5 Touch the OK key inside OK key on the MULTI SHOT setting screen Return to the IMAGE EDIT menu screen 6 Touch the OK key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 7 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow lf a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 To cancel the multi shot function touch the CANCEL key on the multi shot setting screen step 2 A3 11 x 17 Full bleed In other copy modes image loss will occur along the copy edges When the A3 11 x 17 FULL BLEED function is used the full image of an A3 11 x 17 size original will be copied onto ASW 12 x 18 size copy paper The A3 11 x 17 FULL BLEED function can only be used when the original is placed on the document glass The DADF cannot be used Reduction or enlargement cannot be selected with this function If redu
259. hing the EXIT key returns you to the screen of step 4 on page 5 67 Touching the NEXT key returns you to the screen of step 1 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 79 Fax Unit Editing and Deleting Programs To edit or delete a previously stored program follow steps 1 to 3 beginning on page 5 66 touch the AMEND DELETE key in the screen of step 4 and then follow these steps 1 Touch the PROGRAM key 2 Touch the program you wish to edit or delete Direct Address Amend Delete Exit Select Program To Amend Delete Program gt Address Directory Program For Xerox Email News Group j Abys Fax Format amp e When you touch the program name the edit delete screen for the selected program appears e Touching the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key returns you to the screen of step 1 3 To edit the program follow the same procedure as for storing the program To delete the program touch the DELETE key and then touch the YES key in the confirmation screen that appears Storing a Group Index Auto dial keys one touch keys and group keys are normally stored in the ABC index To make auto dial keys more convenient to use you can store a group of auto dial keys in a group index and assign a name to that index When you switch to the group indexes USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 USER 4 USER 5 and USER 6 appear You can assign any name up to 6 characters long to each of the USER indexes The procedure
260. ication Union ITU which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services Memory Boxes and Sub Addresses Passcodes Required for F code Transmission Memory boxes can be created in the memory of fax machines that support F Code communication These boxes are used to store faxes received from other machines and documents to be transmitted when a polling request is received Fax machines that support F code transmission enable the creation of a memory box in the unit s memory Up to 50 memory boxes can be created for a variety of pur poses and a name can be assigned to each box A sub address that indicates the box s location in memory must be programmed and if desired a passcode can also Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 49 Fax Unit be programmed to control access to the box A sub address must be programmed however a passcode can be omitted 7732123 Sub address location in memory select any number up to 20 digits 11245 7732123 Document on om 7732123 Product Box name used to manage 7 Product Planning Planning boxes in your machine Dept Dept Select a name of up to 18 characters Reports Section Y Passcode key Select any number up to 20 digits Manager anager aia Ea oa Mii Public Box HU T 6 L115 The Public Box is used for normal serial polling see Using Polling Memory on page 5 38 When communication occurs involving a memory box the communication will only take place i
261. icons can be touched to open function selection screens Touch this key when you wish to manually set the size of the original to be scanned or scan both sides of the original Touch this key to change the resolution setting for the original to be scanned The selected resolution setting will be highlighted above the key The initial factory setting is STANDARD Touch this key to change the exposure setting for the original to be scanned The selected exposure setting will be highlighted above the key The initial factory setting is AUTO When a special function such as polling or dual page scan is selected a special func tion icon appears here Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Fax Mode Condition Settings Screen Address directory screen alphabetically ordered The screen below appears initially when the address directory is set as the initial screen using Default display settings in the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide Condition gt Settings One touch key This shows the one touch keys that have been stored on the selected index card display The key type is indicated by the icon at the right One touch keys in which a fax num ber is stored are indicated by a icon The display is initially set to show 8 keys This can be changed to 6 or 12 using the key operator program Display In cases where the one touch keys cannot all be displayed on one screen this
262. imer transmission screen appears Special Modes 3 Select the day of the week Touch the 4 key or the y key until the desired day is selected The initial setting is no selection If you select this setting the transmission will be performed as soon as Day Of The Week o the specified time arrives Select the time Touch the 4 key or the key until the desired time appears 4 Select the time in 24 hour format Example 11 00 P M 23 00 The current time appears at the top of the screen If the time is not correct press the CLEAR ALL key to stop operation and adjust the date and time Refer to page 1 39 5 Touch the outer OK key You will return to the screen of step 1 and a timer trans mission icon will appear next to the EXPOSURE key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 33 Fax Unit 6 Perform the desired transmission operation The steps that follow will depend on the type of transmission The following operations can be performed in a timer transmission e Normal transmission e Broadcast transmission e Polling e Serial polling e F code polling e F code confidential transmission e F code relay request transmission NOTES Other operations can be performed after a timer transmission is set up If another operation is in progress when the specified time arrives the timer transmission will begin when the job in progress is completed e Ifa timer transmi
263. ing Information Programmed in the Web Page Passwords 4 18 Condition Setting Screen of Scanner Mode 4 18 Condition setting screen 1 eee 4 19 Address directory SCreen 1 eee 4 21 Sending an Image 20 0c eee eee eee eee 4 23 Basic Transmission MCINOG 20 vv 206 ae Arte Oba oe Ge oe 4 23 Destination Input Methods 0 0 cc eee 4 27 Destination address manual entry 0 0 00 cee eee 4 27 Destination address entry with global address search 4 30 scanning and Transmitting a Two sided Original 00000 4 32 Scanning SENINGS c 2 4 60s week hee eae Ca ere are we es 4 34 Manually Setting the Scanning SIZe 2 6 eee 4 34 Selecting INE EXPOSUNSs erasi eed ty are doles cbt ow Ahk 2 als aetna ik de 4 36 Change the exposure 0 0 ce ee eens 4 36 Selecting the Resolution 0 eer EA ENE eee eee 4 37 Change the resolution srecne inetre r ee eee 4 37 Selecting the File Format 1 2 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee eens 4 38 Cancelling an E Mail FTP Transmission 4 41 Storing Editing and Deleting from the Touch Panel 4 42 storing One Touch Keys Only Addresses for Scan to E mail 4 42 Editing and Deleting One Touch KeyS 0000s 4 46 Programming a Group Key 4 i n taco b ed oat hea eel a eae ee 4 48 Editing and Deleting Group KeyS 0 0 cee eee eee 4 50 Stonn Sender INIOMNAON 65 anon ava wwe be ho
264. ing a docu ment to multiple locations Full fax numbers entered with the numeric keys cannot be stored ina group key First program the num ber in a one touch key and then store it in a group key Redialing The machine keeps the last fax number dialed with the numeric keys in memory You can redial the y Address last number dialed by simply touch Ppt Directory ing the REDIAL key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 17 Fax Unit NOTES On hook dialing EEEE Touch the SPEAKER key listen for Speaker A JR the dial tone through the speaker and then dial Faxes must be sent manually when using on hook dialing See page 5 62 On hook dialing is not possible using a one touch key that includes a sub address and passcode or a group key A total of 500 one touch dial and group keys can be programmed see page 5 66 Programmed one touch keys and group keys are stored on index cards A one touch key or group key can be easily accessed by touching the index key Refer to page 5 9 To prevent calling or sending a fax to a wrong number look carefully at the touch panel and make sure you program the correct number when programming an auto dial number After storing a number you can also print out the stored number see page 5 89 to make sure it was stored correctly Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Sending a Fax Basic Operations This section explains basic operations such
265. ings 3 24 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions Defaults Account Humber 4 Hold After Print Default Job ID Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color ETALK to Hold Before Print User Name Copies User Settings fi pa Factory Defauts sf Proof Print M Collate Cave G EIN A ipM Notify Job End I No Offset fii tsi Job Control mE P Auto Job Control review C ae el Job Hame Always Use This ID m Finishing Binding Edge Left ea Staple m N Up Printing 4 Account Number When the AUDITING MODE of the key operator program is turned on a count can be kept of the number of sheets printed by each account Account numbers for this purpose are programmed using the key operator program for the printer sheet count To program an account number see Key operator programs When the ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING key operator program is turned on printing is not permitted after the page count reaches the limit When the CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS of the key operator program is turned on printing will not take place if an invalid account number is entered or if printing is executed without entering an account number If you want printing be allowed even if a valid account number is not entered turn this setting off In this case pages printed by an invalid account number will
266. ings in Windows Me is explained in the following 1 On the Start menu select Settings and then Printers 2 Right click the installed printer driver and select Properties Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 1 Printer Operation NOTE 3 Set each item For setting items see the printer driver help For information on viewing Help see page 3 3 An example showing how to set Color Mode to Automatic printing is given on page 3 2 4 Click the OK button Windows NT4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 The procedure for adjusting the settings in Windows XP is explained in the following 1 Select Printers and Faxes from the Start menu 2 Right click the installed printer driver and select Printing Preferences 3 Set each item For setting items see the printer driver help For information on viewing Help see page 3 3 An example showing how to set Color Mode to Automatic printing is given on page 3 2 4 Click the OK button Settings for the Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit Saddle Stitch Finisher 3 Tray Unit and other optional peripheral equipment can be accessed by right clicking the installed printer driver selecting Properties and then selecting the Configuration tab If you use this product as a network printer and you have installed the Xerox Print Status Monitor the configuration of peripheral devices will be automatically set by clicking Auto Configuration If you click the Update Tray St
267. ings will also be necessary if you entered a host name in the Hostname or IP Address box when stor ing destinations for Scan to FTP To configure your e mail server and DNS server settings click SMTP Setup or DNS Setup in the Network Scanning Setup screen see Network Scanning Setup screen on page 4 6 or click Services in the menu frame Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 7 Network Scanner Operation When you have completed all of the entries click Submit The entries will be stored File Edit View Favorites Tools Q sack z x EE A F Search Se Favorites A media 4 bs Ki baa 9 rel Address S http 13 138 24 206 Bo WorkCentre C22 System Information Image Send XEROX Services Setup DNS SMTP SNMP Kerberos Management e Destination o E mail DNS Setup re 192 168 0 2 o Desktop gt o Group Secondary DNS Server Primary DNS Server e Sender Timeout seconds 20 e Network Scanning _ Domain Name w2003test qa Setup F o Custom Directory Submit 5 Device Setup e Information e Passwords e Log Status Message o Alerts Message Network Setup Click here SMTP Setup Ee a Primary SMTP Server Enter an IP address for the primary e mail server or a host name If you will be using Scan to E mail be sure to enter this information Secondary SMTP Server Enter an IP address for the secondary e mail server or a h
268. initial setting is 2 MB Solution The limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB in the key operator program Consult your key operator and select a suitable limit Cause The amount of data that can be sent in one e mail transmission is sometimes limited by the administrator of the mail server Even if the amount of data sent is within the limit setting explained above if it exceeds the limit set by the administrator of the mail server the data will not be delivered to the recipient Solution Decrease the amount of data sent in the e mail transmission reduce the number of pages scanned Ask your mail server administrator what the data limit is for one e mail transmission Refer to page 4 62 Transmission takes a long time Cause When there is a large amount of image information the data file is also large and transmission takes a long time 4 58 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide If Your E Mail ls Returned Solution In order to select resolution and data compression settings that are suited to the purpose of transmission and create image data that is well balanced in terms of resolution and file size pay attention to the following points Resolution STANDARD HIGHER HIGHEST The default setting is LOWER If the original does not contain photographs illustrations or other halftone images STANDARD mode will give you a more workable scanned image HIGHER or HIGHEST should only be selected when the original inc
269. ise to the paper feed position Misfeed in the High Capacity Feeder When a misfeed occurs in the High Capacity Feeder remove the misfed paper follow ing the procedure below 1 While holding the tray release lever carefully slide the High Capacity Feeder away from the main unit until it stops AN E a Release lever Y 2 Remove any misfed paper from the main unit and the High Capacity Feeder Upper right side cover If the misfed paper is stuck inside the machine and cannot be removed open the side cover and then remove the misfed paper See Misfeed in the transport area fusing area and exit area on page 1 49 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 75 General Information 3 Open the top cover 4 Remove the misfed paper Be sure not to tear the misfed paper during removal After removing the misfed paper close the top cover 5 Push the High Capacity Feeder towards the main unit and latch it into place Gently push the High Capacity Feeder back in until it stops 6 If misfed paper is not found in step 2 pull the tray out 1 76 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide High Capacity Feeder 8 Gently push the tray back into place The paper feed table automatically rises to the paper feed position Make sure that the paper misfeed screen is cleared and the normal message screen appears Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 77 Ge
270. isplay NOTE f the message ROTATE ORIGINAL FROM B TO m is displayed change the orientation of the original as indicated in the message When the message above is displayed copying can be done without changing the orientation but the image will not fit the paper correctly 6 Use the numeric keys to set the desired number of copies Up to 999 can be set If you are only making a single copy the copy can be made with the copy number display showing 0 Use the C clear key to cancel an entry if a mistake has been made Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 29 Copier Operation 7 Press the COLOUR COPY START 9000 or BLACK COPY START O key If you placed the original on the document glass set the output to Sort you must touch the READ END key after all pages of the original have been scanned step 7 on page 2 23 To cancel the auto image mode touch More on the Copy Ratio display then touch the AUTO IMAGE key again to clear the highlighted display Manual selection The preset ratios maximum 400 minimum 25 can be selected with the enlarge ment and reduction keys In addition the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 50 to 200 in increments of 1 NOTE When the DADF is used the ratio can only be set within the range 50 to 200 1 Place the original in the DADF tray or on the document glass pages 2 4 to 2 10 2 Touch the More key in the Copy Ratio display Me
271. isplayed 4 66 N Up printing 3 78 Border 3 18 O offset function 2 78 OFFSET key 1 60 l 6 offset mode 3 22 one touch dialing 5 17 5 22 one touch key display 4 21 5 9 one touch keys deleting 5 72 editing 5 72 editing and deleting 4 46 storing 5 68 storing Scan to E mail 4 42 on hook dialing 5 18 operation panel 1 14 5 5 printing from 3 48 optional equipment 1 13 original checking size of 5 12 minimum maximum size 5 10 orientation 2 7 scanning area 5 10 Original guides 2 2 ORIGINAL key 4 20 Original size deleting 2 10 selecting 2 8 storing 2 10 using stored 2 12 Original size detection function 2 6 Original sizes 1 6 Original tab 2 3 2 8 Originals acceptable 2 3 Originals setting using DADF 2 4 using document glass 2 5 Output printing 3 28 Output display 2 3 output method when memory is full 3 55 output restrictions copy mode 2 16 output tray default printing 3 46 overlays 3 31 own number sending 5 42 P Page Protection checkbox 3 31 pamphlet copy 2 60 2 71 Paper Select display 2 3 2 14 2 22 paper select auto 2 14 2 22 paper settings 3 26 paper size settings 3 26 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Index custom 3 27 default 3 46 paper size changing 1 22 paper sizes 1 6 1 30 Paper tab 3 26 paper trays selecting 3 28 specifications for 1 30 paper type 3 63 default 3 47 setting except Bypass Tray 1 33 Bypass Tray 1 35 paper types 1 30 selecting 3 28 special 2 35 p
272. ission This feature enables you to set up a transmission or polling operation to be performed automatically at a specified time up to a week in advance This is convenient when you will be out of the office or for transmission at off peak nighttime rates A combined total of 50 timer transmission and memory transmission jobs can be stored NOTES After a timer transmission is performed the information image destination etc is automatically cleared from memory e To perform a timer transmission the document must be scanned into memory It is not possible to leave the document in the DADF tray or on the document glass and have it scanned at the specified time of transmission e To set the date and time in the machine refer to page 1 39 You can check the machine s currently set time in the screen of steps 3 and 4 below e Only one polling timer operation can be set up at a time If you wish to set up multiple timer polling operations combine the machines to be polled into a serial polling operation with a timer setting see page 5 34 5 32 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Automatic Transmission at a Specified Time Timer Transmission Setting Up a Timer Transmission 1 In fax mode touch the SPECIAL MODES key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen k peto eat 3 oe ee i ji a Special Modes 2 Touch the TIMER key The t
273. itching is selected the prints or copies will be stapled at the centre and deliv ered to the saddle stitch tray The stapling positions orientation paper size for sta pling and stapling capacity are shown below 3 20 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Stapling positions Top left corner of printouts Lower left corner of printouts Centre left two positions of printouts UOI EJUSIIO WeIOd Saddle stitch on centrefold line Top left corner of printouts Lower left corner of printouts Centre left two positions of printouts uole uUsUO deospue Saddle stitch on centrefold line Available paper sizes A4 B5 and 8 1 2 x 11 Stapling capacity For each size up to 30 sheets can be stapled Same as above Same as above Paper in the portrait direction cannot be saddle stitched Available paper sizes A3 B4 AAR 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 and 8 1 2 x 11 R Stapling capacity Up to 30 sheets of A4R or 8 1 2 x 11 R paper can be stapled up to 25 sheets of other paper sizes Same as above Same as above Available paper sizes A3 B4 A4R 11 x 17 and 8 1 2 x 11 R Stapling capacity For each size up to 10 sheets can be stapled Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color Selecting Printing Functions Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Copies fi a MV Collate Gp Document Style 1 Sided 2Sided Bock 2Sided Tablet Pamphlet Style Tiled
274. itially stored it C EMail3 EMail4 Eao Delete C When finished be sure to click Submit to save your changes To delete the selected destination click Delete under the Destinations List Name A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion C EMail1 Click Yes to delete EMail EMail3 EMail4 Edit m Delete cc Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 15 Network Scanner Operation NOTE If you attempt to edit or delete a programmed destination in the following situation a warning message will appear and eaiting deletion will not be possible The destination is included in a group If the destination is being used for a current transmission cancel the transmission or wait until it is completed and then edit or delete the destination If the destination is included in a group delete the destination from the group and then edit or delete the destination Storing Sender Information Scan to E mail 4 16 NOTE To store the sender information Sender Name E mail Address that is displayed when the recipient receives your e mail click Sender in the menu frame and then click Add Information for up to 20 different senders can be stored Select a sender from the stored senders using the touch panel of the machine when you send an image page 4 23 The selected sender appears in the sender column of the recipi ent s e mail software
275. ity on page 5 42 use the key operator program to program your own fax number and ask the operator of the other machine to appropriately program your fax number in that machine 1 In fax mode touch the SPECIAL MODES key and then touch the POLLING key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen The POLLING key is highlighted and the polling icon appears To cancel polling touch the POLLING key once again so that it is not highlighted 2 Touch the OK key You will return to the initial screen 3 Dial the number of the other fax machine or touch an auto dial key one touch or group key If the condition settings screen appears touch the ewe ADDRESS DIRECTORY key to display the address E directory screen gt 2 y If you are performing serial polling touch the NEXT ADDRESS key and repeat this step When performing serial polling an auto dial key that includes a sub address or passcode page 5 49 cannot be selected Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Transmission and Reception Using the Polling Function 4 When you have finished entering the destination s press the BLACK COPY START key JOB STORED appears in the touch panel D The fax is received from the other machine and printed out NOTE To cancel the operation Press the JOB STATUS key and then cancel the operation See Cancelling
276. key of the item you wish to change to edit the item follow the same steps as for one touch keys on page 4 42 Direct Address Amend Delete No 002 Group Name ABCD Group 4 50 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Editing and Deleting Group Keys To edit a destination stored in a group key touch the ADDRESS key The following screen appears Direct Address Group Select Address The one touch keys stored in the group are highlighted To add another one touch key to the group touch the key to highlight it To delete a one touch key from the group touch the key so that it is no longer highlighted 5 Make sure the edited information is correct and then touch the EXIT key A aan to change another group key repeat steps 3 Initial The following steps are for deleting a group key 6 Touch the DELETE key If you wish to delete another group key repeat steps 3 6 and 7 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 51 Network Scanner Operation NOTE If you cannot edit or delete a group key If you attempt to edit or delete a group key in the following situation a warning message will appear and editing deletion will not be possible The one touch key you wish to change or delete is currently being used for transmission If the key is being used for a current transmission cancel the transmission or wait until it is completed and then edit or delete the key Storing Sender Information 4 52 U
277. kland Berkeley and San Jose If the San Fran cisco office creates a relay broadcast memory box and programs the Oakland Berke ley and San Jose offices as end receiving destinations the overall phone charges will be lower than if the Seattle office uses the normal broadcast transmission function page 5 30 This function can also be combined with a timer setting page 5 33 to take advantage of off peak rates allowing a further reduction in phone charges Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 59 Fax Unit 5 60 NOTES Transmission by the relay machine is called F code relay broadcast transmission and transmission from the relay request machine to the relay machine is called relay request transmission e To create an F code relay broadcast memory box and program edit and delete end receiving machines refer to pages 5 81 to 5 88 When creating a box a passcode SID can be omitted e The relay request machine only bears the expense of sending the document to the relay machine The relay machine bears the expense of sending the document to each of the end receiving machines Using the F Code Relay Broadcast Function NOTE your machine is the relay machine When a document Is received from a relay request machine the F code relay broad cast function transmits the document to the end receiving machines using a memory box only if the sub address and passcode sent by the relay request machine are cor rect Refer to pag
278. l correspondence mode can help alleviate these problems e If errors frequently occur when sending a fax to a foreign country try each of modes 1 to 3 and select the mode that enables the best transmission 15 When you have finished programming the one touch key touch the EXIT key If you wish to program another one touch key touch the NEXT key Touching the EXIT key returns you to the screen of step 2 on page 5 67 _initiaa J Touching the NEXT key returns you to the screen of 0666211221 3456 987654 step 1 on page 5 68 33 6 kbps NONE Editing and Deleting One Touch Keys If you wish to delete a one touch key or change the fax number name or other infor mation programmed in a one touch key follow steps 1 through 3 beginning on page 5 67 and then perform the following procedure 1 Touch the AMEND DELETE key e To edit a one touch key follow steps 3 and 4 e To delete a one touch key follow steps 5 and 6 e When you have finished editing or deleting touch the EXIT key 5 72 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing Editing and Deleting Auto Dial Keys and Programs 3 Touch the key corresponding to the information you wish to change change the information in the same way as you stored the information on page 5 68 Direct Address Amend Delete No 001 4 Make sure that your changes are correct and then touch the EXIT key he You will return to the screen of step 2 If yo
279. l be displayed in the key Only the first 18 characters of the name entered in step 1 will be displayed If you need to change the name that will be displayed in the key touch the KEY NAME If you do not wish to change the name this step is not necessary eMOOMMERegistration Is Completed Refer to page 5 90 for the procedure for entering charac ters 14 Check the transmission settings The initial transmission settings are TRANSMISSION SPEED 33 6 kbps and INTERNATIONAL CORRESPONDENCE MODE NONE To change either of the settings touch the MODE key If you do not wish to change the settings this step is not necessary After touching the MODE key you can change either of the two settings When finished touch the OK key Transmission speed Speed selections are 33 6 kbps 14 4 kbps 9 6 kbps and 4 8 kbps The higher the number the faster the transmission speed NOTE Set the transmission speed only when you know what speed is most suitable such as when you are sending a fax to a foreign country and telephone line conditions are bad If you do not know the line condition do not change this setting Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 71 Fax Unit International correspondence mode Selections are NONE MODE 1 MODE 2 and MODE 3 NOTES gt When sending a fax to a foreign country telephone line conditions can sometimes distort the fax or interrupt the transmission Selecting the right internationa
280. l transfer ink ribbon should not be fed through the DADF Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged crumpled or folded or have loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them Setting Originals When using the DADF 1 Adjust the original guides to the size of the originals 2 4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting Originals 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF tray Set the originals all the way into the feed slot Do not exceed the maximum height line marked on the original guide When using the document glass Open the document cover place the original face down on the document glass and then gently close the document cover NOTES Do not place any objects under the original size detector because they may damage it or the original size may not be detected properly e Ifan original has been placed in the DADF tray of the DADF remove it Otherwise the original in the DADF tray will be scanned instead of the original on the document glass How to place the original Place the original in the appropriate position shown below according to its size Cen tre the original on the centring scale Original scale Original scale gt Centring scale Centring scale Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 5 Copier Operation NOTE Original size detection function One of the four groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original si
281. ld immedi ately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network e The AC power outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible e Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm e Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations e Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Points to Check and Program After Installation e Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines e Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak e Do not install or use the machine near water or when you are wet Take care not to spill any liquids on the machine Before Using the FAX Feature This section contains basic information about using the fax features of this product Please read this section before using the fax features Points to Check and Program After Installation After installing the unit and before using it as a fax machine check the following points and program the required information Make sure the fax power switch is turned on In addition to the machine power switch the machine also has a fax power switch se
282. lect is normally used for both Paper Source and Paper Type If you wish to use the optional High Capacity Feeder select it in the following window Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color m Paper Size c Paner Selection 8 511 in Paper Source Letter z Auto Select o Custom Raper Ues Auto Select zZ m Fit To Paper Size I Fit To Page Tray Status Print Letter on Letter Output Center Tray feast m Image Orientation Portrait Different Paper C Landscape T Rotate 180 degrees Transparency Inserts 3 14 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions If you wish to specify a paper tray select the tray from the Paper Source list in the Paper Selection field Example Selecting the High Capacity Feeder Auto Select ai Bypass Tray Tray Traye 5 To change the colour mode click the Color tab and select the desired mode from the Color Mode list 6 Adjust the image quality settings as needed page 3 38 If not needed go directly to step 7 7 Click the OK button in the Print window in Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 or the Print button in Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Setting the Printer Driver Properties This section explains how to configure settings in the printer driver The settings are changed in the software application Selecting Printing Functions Almost all printer settings are configured in th
283. ler referring to step 4 on played page 1 63 Check the stapling position setting See pages 1 72 and 1 73 Message to check the staple unit dis Remove jammed staples See page 1 played 63 Message to add staples displayed Replace the staple cartridge See page 1 61 Check that a staple cartridge has been installed See page 1 61 Stapling cannot be performed includ Different size paper included Stapling cannot be performed onto differ ing saddle stitch ent size paper Is the paper badly curled preventing sta Differences in paper quality and type pling may result in bad curling of output paper Take the paper out of the tray or Bypass Tray turn it around and reload it so that the top and bottom edges are reversed The punch hole The punch function is not set to the cor Check the allowed hole punch positions positions are not rect punch positions correct 1 70 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Saddle Stitch Finisher Message to check the Punch Module aia of punch scraps See page 1 displayed Mixed paper sizes Punching is not possible when different Cannot be paper sizes are mixed together punched Paper is badly curled and the output Differences in paper quality and type paper is not punched may result in bad curling of output paper Take the paper out of the tray or Bypass Tray turn it around and reload it so that the top and bottom edges are reversed When a hole Punch
284. lighted 2 Touch the OK key You will return to the initial screen Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide F Code Polling Memory 3 Enter the fax number sub address and passcode of the other fax machine To use a one touch key touch the ADDRESS DIREC TORY key to display the address directory Daoa sey epia y 50 lt Refer to steps 2 through 5 of Entering Dialing a Fax Number with a Sub Address and Passcode on page 5 51 for the procedure for entering sub addresses and passcodes 4 Press the BLACK COPY START key JOB STORED appears on the screen After communicating with the other machine your machine prints the received document data NOTES gt Cancelling a transmission e Press the JOB STATUS and cancel the transmission in the same way as when cancelling a stored transmission See Cancelling a Fax Transmission on page 5 27 e Only one F code polling timer operation can be stored see page 5 33 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 55 Fax Unit F Code Confidential Transmission 5 56 F Code confidential transmission provides a secure means of faxing confidential docu ments The sub address and passcode programmed in the memory box restrict the recipients of the fax and once received in the memory box the fax can only be printed by someone who knows the print passcode see Setting for F Code Confidential Transmission Memory Boxes Print PIN on page 5 85 This
285. ll print About the offset function This function offsets each set of copies from the previous set in the output tray making it easy to separate sets of copies Offset can function for output to the centre tray or in the offset tray of the Saddle Stitch Finisher Offset function ON Offset function OFF FB A Touch the More key in the Output display Centre Tray 2 18 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Normal Copying 3 Touch OFFSET 4 Touch OK p 5ed To copy E ils Output Sort E 3 R Centre pa f Tray Selecting the output tray When the LEFT TRAY key in the above illustration is highlighted copies are output to the tray on the left side of the machine the left tray When the CENTRE TRAY key is highlighted copies are output to the centre tray Touch the key of the tray you wish to use for copy output Turning on the offset function The offset function operates when a checkmark appears in the OFFSET checkbox which is displayed by touching the CENTRE TRAY key If a checkmark doesn t appear touch the checkbox Offset width Approximately 30 mm 1 3 10 A3W 12 x 18 paper cannot be offset Automatic two sided copying from the DADF When a Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit and a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit are installed the following automatic two sided copy functions are possible The copy paper is turned over autom
286. llows you to adjust the densities of four colours cyan magenta yellow and black The density range is divided into eight levels for each colour from 1 lowest density areas to 8 highest density areas The density can be adjusted one level at a time or eight levels at once Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 55 Copier Operation A Use these keys to select the colour to be adjusted C cyan M magenta Y yellow Bk black If only the area around the letter inside a key is highlighted the settings have been changed from the factory default settings C Use these keys to change the densities of all eight levels at once When either key is touched the indicator lines of all eight levels will move up or down one step C Use these keys to adjust the densities of each of the eight density levels When one of the keys is touched the corresponding indicator line will move up or down one step Touch the a key to increase the density of the corresponding level or the key to decrease the density e Use this key to return the densities of all eight levels to the initial settings The initial colour balance settings are the values set with key operator program Initial colour balance setting For this reason the initial settings may not necessarily be 0 the middle indicator position for all levels The initial setting of each level is shown by a grey indicator When the colour balance setting is adj
287. ls One sided copies not copying onto a cover A Back cover Two sided originals AS nS A Front cover Selections for front cover back cover or front and back cover can be made 1 Touch the COVERS key on the SPECIAL MODES screen The COVERS setting screen will appear jll etc will also appear in the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on The covers icon 2 48 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Special Modes 2 Select cover placement Special Modes f3 Covers CANCEL Print On Front Cover Yes Front Back Front Back Select FRONT BACK or FRONT BACK on the touch panel 3 Indicate whether the front cover sheets are copied on or not Select YES or NO on the touch panel If YES is selected the first page of the document will be copied onto the front cover sheet 4 Touch the OK key on the COVER setting screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 5 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode 6 Load the cover paper to be used into the Bypass Tray Load the same size of paper as the paper to be used for the copy job If the Saddle Stitch Finisher is to be used for stapling heavy stock cannot be used for the covers see page 1 32 Paper within the range of the stapler must be used About the steps that follow See pages 2 13 through 2 19 NOTE Be sure to place the originals in the DA
288. ludes a photograph and you want to give priority to the quality of the photograph Note that scanning in HIGHER or HIGHEST mode will produce a larger file size than the other modes If Your E Mail Is Returned If a Scan to E mail is not successfully transmitted an e mail informing you of this fact is sent to the sender selected at the time of transmission If this happens read the e mail and determine the cause of the error and then repeat the transmission If a Transmission Error Occurs If a transmission error occurs when you send a scanned image a message informing you of the error and an error code will appear in the touch panel on the machine Error Code Table Error Code Description of the Error CE 01 The optional network interface card Print Server Card is not installed or is out of order CE 02 Cannot find the specified mail server or FTP server CE 03 The server was unavailable during the scanning of the original CE 06 Cannot find the specified mail server POPS server Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 59 Network Scanner Operation Checking the IP Address There are three ways to check the IP address 1 Using LIST PRINT in CUSTOM SETTINGS in the operation panel Select NIC PAGE to print a list of the machine settings The IP address that has been set for the machine can be found in this list Follow the procedure below to check the IP address using NIC PAGE 2 Using the key operator programs T
289. ly appears is the lowest num ber from 1 to 8 that has not yet been programmed Keane When the PROGRAM NAME key is touched the letter A entry screen appears Enter up to 18 characters for the name Resolution Special Refer to page 5 90 for the procedure for entering letters 5 78 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing Editing and Deleting Auto Dial Keys and Programs 2 Touch the SETTINGS key Program For Xerox Address Resolution Special Modes 3 Touch the keys as appropriate to store the frequently used settings For the detailed procedures for each of the settings refer to the explanations of those features on the following pages e RESOLUTION page 5 14 e EXPOSURE page 5 16 e ADDRESS DIRECTORY page 5 30 e SPECIAL MODES e POLLING page 5 36 e DUAL PAGE SCAN page 5 44 NOTE Upto 100 destinations can be stored in a program However you cannot directly enter fax numbers with the numeric keys A destination must be programmed in an auto dial key one touch key or group key before it can be stored in a program 4 Touch the OK key Your settings are displayed Make sure they are correct Program No 1 Registration Is Completed 2 Addresses Dark Resolution Fine Exposure Original Special Dual Page s Modes Scan 5 When you are finished touch the EXIT key If you wish to store another program touch the NEXT key Touc
290. ments 5 11 loading envelopes 1 26 loading paper 1 21 1 Tray Unit 1 28 3 Tray Unit 1 28 Bypass Tray 1 23 Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit 1 29 Paper Tray 1 1 27 loading postcards 1 26 Log 3 44 lower tray misfeed 1 55 machine maintenance for copying 2 79 machine part names 2 1 Main tab 3 16 manual reception 5 63 5 64 manual transmission 5 62 margin shift 2 39 3 30 MARGIN SHIFT key 2 37 margins scanning 4 77 maximum file size Scan to E mail 4 68 media special 1 32 memory box 5 49 editing and deleting 5 88 memory transmission 5 24 message display 2 2 Index scanning 4 19 mirror image 2 59 2 61 misfeed 3 Tray Unit 1 53 Bypass Tray 1 48 Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit 1 53 Duplex module 2 Tray Unit 1 53 exit area 1 50 fusing area 1 50 High Capacity Feeder 1 75 paper feed area 1 47 reversing tray 2 2 Saddle Stitch Finisher 1 67 stand 1 Tray Unit 1 52 transport area 1 49 Tray 1 1 47 upper or lower tray 1 55 misfeed removal 1 46 mode select key 1 18 multi shot 2 59 2 64 multi page enlargement 2 60 2 68 N network printer configuration 3 40 network scanner settings 4 65 Network Scanning Setup screen 4 6 network scanning See also scanning network settings enable EtherTalk 3 58 enable NetBEUI 3 58 enable netware 3 57 enable TCP IP 3 57 IP address setting 3 57 reset the NIC 3 58 network setup for Web page 3 44 No Offset 3 22 Normal Print 3 23 notice page 3 65 Notify Job End 3 24 number of direct address keys d
291. mode and printer mode Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Auditing Mode Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled The procedure for using the machine for copying functions when the Auditing Mode has been enabled for the copier functions is explained below When the account counter is turned on for fax or network scanner functions a message will appear prompting you to enter your account number each time the touch panel is changed to the main screen of the function Enter your account number as explained below and then proceed with the job e When the account counter is turned on for the printer function you must enter your account number in the setting screen of the printer driver on your computer in order to print When the account counter is turned on the following messages appear on the touch panel There are two types of prompts depending on whether the account counter was turned on for both the colour copy and the black and white copy modes or only for colour copy mode NOTES Account counter enabled for both the colour copy and the black and white copy modes Enter Your Account Number The account counter is enabled only for the colour copy mode When the key ACC C key or the COLOUR COPY START key is pressed this message appears Enter Your Account Number For The Colour Mode Press Cancel To Change To B W Mode Auditing Mode For Colour CANCEL TE menea nma Pam Pertti
292. n 4 Touch the DATA STORE key Data Store 5 Touch the PUBLIC BOX key This specifies that the document will be scanned into the Public Box 6 Set the original size resolution exposure and other scanning conditions as needed See Manually Setting the Scanning Size on page 5 13 7 Press the BLACK COPY START key The document is scanned If other document data has previously been stored the new data will be added on Ge after the old data If you used the document glass and have another page to scan change the pages and then press the BLACK COPY START key again Repeat this procedure until all pages have been scanned and then touch the READ END key that appears in the message screen When the document data has been stored in the Public Box JOB STORED appears on the screen after which you will return to the initial screen NOTE To cancel scanning To cancel scanning of a document while scanning is in progress press the C key To delete a document that has already been scanned see Deleting document data from the Public Box on page 5 41 NOTE The machine has been initially set to automatically clear document data from the Public Box after polling takes place and the data is sent to the polling machine You can use the key operator program to change this setting so that the data is not automatically cleared and polling can take place repeatedly Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 3
293. n If reduction or enlargement has been selected the copy ratio will be reset to 100 when this function is selected e This function will not work when non standard size paper is used e This function can only be used with A4 8 1 2 x 11 or A3 11 x 17 paper Original size to 130 x 90 mm 3 x 5 Four copies are made on a sheet of A4 8 1 2 x 11 size paper Eight copies are made on a sheet of A3 11 x 17 size paper Eight copies are made on a sheet of A4 8 1 2 x 11 size paper 16 copies are made on a sheet of A3 11 x 17 size paper 10 copies are made ona sheet of A4 8 1 2 x 11 size paper 95 ratio 2 62 Original size to 100 x 150 mm 5 x 7 Two copies are made on a sheet of A4 8 1 2 x 11 size paper Four copies are made on a sheet of A3 11 x 17 size paper Original size to 65 x 70 mm 2 1 2 x 2 1 2 12 copies are made on a sheet of A4 8 1 2 x 11 size paper 24 copies are made on a sheet of A3 11 x 17 size paper Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Image Edit Menu 1 Touch the PHOTO REPEAT key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen The PHOTO REPEAT setting screen will appear Image Edit Photo Repeat Cancel OK Original Size Repeat Type E L Size Post Card AA 8 4x11 A3 11x17 148x105mm C 3x 5 When any one of the keys is touched the photo repeat icon gzs3 etc
294. n when a checkmark v appears next to the key A check mark will appear or disappear by alternate touches of the checkmark box In the following screen Tray 1 can be used in print copy and fax modes Tray 2 can only be used in the copy mode Custom Settings Tray Settings 2 Touch the key of the desired item to display its setting screen The settings accessed by touching the CLOCK key are explained here Custom Settings Address Control Detailed descriptions for program settings start on page 1 40 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 39 General Information 1 40 The procedure for setting the clock is shown below as an example Custom Settings Clock Adjust Year Month Day Hour Minute LJ Daylight Saving Time Setting 3 Touch the year month day hour or minute key and then use the or key to adjust the setting e Ifyou select a non existent date for example Feb 30 the OK key will grey out to prevent entry of the date e Select DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING checkbox to have the time auto matically change at the beginning and end of daylight saving time 4 Touch the OK key 5 To finish the setting operation touch the EXIT key Custom Settings About the settings Total count This displays the following sheet counts The number of sheets printed in copy print and fax modes 2 The number of sheets transmitted using the fax function and scanned using the netw
295. n FTP server you can have a transmission server to be e mailed notification automatically sent to the file recipient by e mail To have transmis Checkbox sion notifications sent select the checkbox The FTP server name will appear in the transmission notification as a hyperlink E mail Destination Select the recipient that you wish to notify of the file transmission to the FTP server To select a recipient here the recipient s e mail address must have been previously stored page 4 12 1 If you entered a host name in Hostname or IP Address you will need to enter the DNS server settings Refer to page 4 11 2 To perform Scan to FTP Hyperlink you must also enter the settings under SMTP Setup for the e mail server If you select the Enable Hyperlink to FTP server to be e mailed checkbox and select a previously stored recipient page 4 11 from E mail Destination you are able to have an e mail sent to the recipient informing them of the file format and location of the scanned image data A hyperlink to the file server to which the scanned image data was sent appears in the e mail and the recipient can click the hyperlink to go directly to the location where the image data is stored Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 13 Network Scanner Operation Storing Groups Scan to E mail If you are using Scan to E mail a scanned image can be sent to multiple destinations in a single operation To use this function you
296. n be received manually even when transmission is in progress 1 When the extension phone rings lift the extension phone and speak If you hear a fax tone through the extension phone do not speak and proceed to the next step 2 With the extension phone still lifted touch the FAX RECEIVE key ange Reception begins when the other party begins transmis ax Memory 100 ress T Fax Receive f 5 64 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Using an Extension Phone 3 Replace the extension phone A beep sounds when reception ends The received fax is printed NOTES fthere are stored print jobs the fax is printed after the stored print jobs e You can also talk on the extension phone and manually receive a fax while the machine is printing If the extension phone rings during printing lift the extension phone and speak To receive a fax press the IMAGE SEND key with the extension phone still lifted When you hear a fax tone through the extension phone touch the FAX RECEIVE key Activating fax reception from an extension phone remote reception After speaking on the extension phone you can activate fax reception from the exten sion phone This is called remote reception After soeaking or when you hear a fax tone through the extension phone perform the following procedure with the extension phone still lifted Remote reception is only possible when the call is made by the other party NOTE The following proce
297. n of Are the print orientation settings in the Correct the orientation in the printer driver the image is incor printer driver correct rect on the print The edges of the There are margins around the edges Change the print area or reduce the image printed image are of the paper where printing is not pos size missing sible Does the image overlap those margins Printer prints in Has reverse page order been selected Cancel the reverse order printing in the reverse order in the software application application software Printer stops inthe Has the tray full sensor activated and Remove the paper from the exit tray middle of a print stopped printing because too many job pages are in the exit tray Is the tray out of paper Load paper See page 1 21 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 61 Printer Operation Printing is not on Has paper selection been set to Auto Ensure that the desired paper is set ina desired paper size matic in the printer driver paper tray of the printer and select Auto Select in the paper selection of the printer driver Printer write error Is the timeout setting for the printer Set a longer time in the timeout setting in occurs when print driver too short the printer driver ing from the parallel port A notice page Is Has the number of hold jobs reached Delete unneeded hold jobs If you wish to printed when a print 99 delete all hold jobs use the DELETE THE job is sent
298. n ports will take place SWITCH AT END OF JOB or SWITCH AFTER I O TIMEOUT can be selected When SWITCH AT END OF JOB is selected the port will be automatically selected after each print job is completed When SWITCH AFTER I O TIMEOUT is selected the port will be automatically selected if the time set in the I O Timeout program elapses e Parallel port e USB port e Network port Enable parallel port This program is used to enable or disable printing from the parallel port Default setting Enable Enable USB port This program is used to enable or disable printing from the USB port Default setting Enable Enable network port This program is used to enable or disable printing from the network port Default setting Enable 3 56 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Description of Setting Programs 1 O timeout This program is used to set the length of time to wait for an I O to complete a job on the parallel port or the network port If the data stream to the port does not transmit data for a length of time exceeding the timeout the job will cancel and the next job will start processing The I O timeout setting is used to set the amount of time after which an I O timeout will occur when waiting for print data Default setting 20 seconds NOTE The allowable range of the time is 1 to 999 seconds Network settings These programs are set when this product is used as a network printer After you complete the setting f
299. n the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit and Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit NOTE Paper misfed from a paper tray may be extending out of the tray into the right side cover area In this case if the tray is drawn out of the machine the paper may become torn and difficult to remove To prevent this from happening always open the right side cover first and remove the misfed paper if it is extending into that area 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 of Misfeed in the stand 1 Tray Unit on page 1 52 2 Open the upper cover of the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit e T IN S lt a 3 Ved i A U E 3 Remove the misfeed from the upper part of the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit Hold the upper cover of the unit open while removing the misfed paper Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 53 General Information 1 54 4 Close the upper cover of the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit 5 Lift the exit tray if one is installed and open the cover of the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit 6 Remove the misfed paper While holding the exit tray up remove the misfed paper as shown in the illustration Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal 7 Close the cover of the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit and return the exit tray to its Original position 8 Remove a misfeed from the bottom of the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit Gently remove the misfed paper from the bottom of the Duplex Bypass Invert
300. n the event that the paper runs out during continuous printing This requires that the trays be loaded with the same size of paper To enable any function touch the check box key so that a checkmark V appears Keyboard select When using the fax function or network scanner function you can switch the arrange ment of the letter keys in the display keyboard that appear in the character entry screen when storing or editing destinations Select the arrangement of the letter keys that you find easiest to use The following three alphabet keyboard configurations are available e Keyboard 1 QWERT configuration e Keyboard 2 AZERTY configuration e Keyboard 3 ABCDEF configuration The default setting is Keyboard 1 Example Character entry screen when Keyboard 3 is selected DESTINATION NAME CANCEL Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 41 General Information Replacing the Toner Cartridges 1 42 When toner runs low WO000 TONER SUPPLY IS LOW appears in the display It is recommended that you keep a set of new toner cartridges so that you can replace them quickly when toner runs out Ready To Copy iO Toner Supply Is Low V If you continue to use the toner cartridge the toner will eventually run out the machine will stop and the following message will appear A Change The Toner Cartridge OOOO This indicates the colour of toner that is low Yellow toner Magenta toner Cyan ton
301. n the message that appears Address Review f Eao con 4 Touch the OK key in the screen of step 3 You will return to the screen of step 2 The number of selected destinations will appear next to the ADDRESS key 5 Check the name of the key refer to step 13 on page 5 71 The characters appearing next to the KEY NAME key will be displayed in the group key To change these characters touch the KEY NAME key This step is not necessary if you do not wish to change the characters The procedure for entering characters is explained on page 5 90 6 Touch the EXIT key when you have finished programming the group key If you wish to program another group key touch the NEXT key When you touch the EXIT key you will return to the screen of step 4 on page 5 67 To store another group touch the NEXT key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 75 Fax Unit Editing and Deleting Group Keys If you need to delete a group key or change its name or a one of its stored destinations in a group key first follow steps 1 through 3 beginning on page 5 66 and then perform the following procedure 1 Touch the AMEND DELETE key Amend Delete X 2 Touch the group key that you wish to edit or delete Direct Address Amend Delete Select Address To Amend Delete Eao crow e To edit a group key follow steps 3 and 4 e To delete a group key follow steps 5 and 6 e When you have finished editi
302. n to FTP Go directly to ini step 10 page 4 25 NOTES You can omit selection of a sender go directly to step 10 In this case the default sender information stored with the key operator program is automatically transmitted page 4 67 e Up to 20 senders can be stored using the Web page page 4 16 8 Touch a key to select a sender The touched key is highlighted If you made a mistake touch the correct key The highlighting will move to the new key The selected sender will be the sender of the e mail 4 24 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Basic Transmission Method 9 Touch the OK key 10 Touch the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key The address directory screen appears 11 Touch the one touch key for the desired destination TT em ne key you touched is highlighted If you touch the wrong key touch the key again to cancel the selection Bc The key display will return to normal When transmitting by Scan to E mail Make sure that the TO key is highlighted and then touch the one touch key of the destination If you wish to perform a broadcast transmission CC or BCC copies touch the CC or BCC key and then touch the one touch keys of the CC or BCC recipients NOTES Refer to pages 4 10 to 4 15 for information on programming one touch key destinations e When touching a one touch key corresponding information from the email destination screen is shown in the message displ
303. n using the address directory screen The key you touched is highlighted If you touch the wrong key touch the key again to cancel the selection The key display will return to normal 4 Continue from step 7 of Basic Procedure for Sending Faxes page 5 21 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Sending a Fax Faxing a Two Sided Original Follow the steps below to automatically send a two sided document 1 Make sure the machine is in fax mode i When the IMAGE SEND key light is on the machine is in fax mode If the light is not on press the IMAGE l SEND key When the network scanner option is installed touch this key to return to the initial screen of fax mode or scanner mode whichever mode was selected last Pressing the g IMAGE SEND key in a copy screen or printer screen returns you to the initial screen of fax mode To switch to fax mode from scanner mode touch the SCANNER FAX key see 8 on page 5 7 Place the original in the DADF tray see Using the DADF on page 5 11 3 Touch the ORIGINAL key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen When you touch the ORIGINAL key check the original size that appears in the key If the size was not detected correctly specify the correct size See Manually Setting the Scanning Size on page 5 13 4 Touch the 2 SIDED BOOKLET key or the 2 SIDED TABLET key as appr
304. n where you wish to send the scanned image data Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide The scanned information can be sent to a memory storage device on a network a designated directory on an FTP server Hereafter referred to as Scan to FTP in this section When sending scanned information to an FTP server an e mail message can also be sent to a preset e mail address to inform the recipient of the location of the scanned image data Hereafter referred to as Scan to FTP Hyperlink in this section The scanned information can be sent to an e mail recipient Hereafter referred to as Scan to E mail in this section There are limitations to the use of Scan to E mail A limit has been set in the Maximum size of e mail attachments of the key operator program for the maximum amount of data that can be sent using Scan to E mail page 4 68 4 3 Network Scanner Operation Settings and Programming Required for the Network Scanner Feature To use the Network Scanner feature settings for the E mail server DNS server and destination addresses must be established To establish the settings use a computer that is connected to the same network as the machine to access the machine s Web page The Web page can be displayed with your Web browser Internet Explorer 5 5 or later Windows 5 1 or later Macintosh or Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later Accessing Web Pages Use the following procedure to access the We
305. nced Watermarks Color Copies m User Settings fi Factory Defaults M Collate Save Gp Document Style ie inishing 4 en 1 Sided l Binding Edge 2Z Sided Book C 2 Sided Tablet Left Pamphlet Style Staple Tiled Pamphlet N one ha T Punch l No Offset Job Control Auto Job Control review Finishing Configure settings for staple or punch finishing Binding Edge When automatic two sided printing is performed the Binding Edge setting is used to determine how the left right and top edges of the front and back sides are positioned The relation between the document and each of the settings is as follows Default setting Left AB Original image Left Right Top Left binding Right binding Top binding G Binding edge Binding edge Binding edge Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 19 Printer Operation Staple None Do not staple 1 Staple Staple in one place 2 Staples Staple in two places When 1 Staple or 2 Staples is selected the Collate setting is automatically activated Default setting None Saddle stitch function The Saddle Stitch Finisher can automatically place two staples for centreline binding of prints or copies and fold them along the centreline lt Example gt Staple sort mode Collated sets of prints or copies will be stapled and delivered to the offset tray When saddle st
306. nction the scan kit scanner interface board and 256 MB or more of optional memory must be installed PS Kit This kit provides compatibility of PostScript level 3 to the printer To use this function 256 MB x2 optional memory must be installed Fax Unit This kit must be installed to use the fax function Fax Expansion Memory 8 MB This adds memory for use by the fax function 256 MB Memory Kit This adds memory that is used for the copy function printer function and scanner function Face up and face down output After printing the paper is delivered to the exit tray This product has two exit trays centre tray and left tray The paper specifications and output conditions differ for each tray however if the paper and output conditions are such that the paper can be delivered to either tray you can select the tray to which the paper will go e Paper exits to the centre tray face down only e Paper exits to the left tray face up only However if a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit has been installed face down output is also possible In this case face up or face down output is automatically selected according to the paper and output condi tions it is not possible to manually select face up or face down Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 13 General Information Operation panel 9 Touch panel Mode select keys and indicators PRINT key READY indicator DATA indicator READY indicator DATA i
307. nd B in the illustration B Front side of LOwer pressure A Rear side of fusing unit position fusing unit 3 Gently close the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit If the machine is not equipped with a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit close the side cover Loading paper in the stand 1 Tray Unit 3 Tray Unit NOTE 1 28 Upper tray middle tray lower tray Up to 500 sheets of paper recommended for colour or Xerox recommended plain paper can be loaded in these trays The method of loading paper is the same as for Paper Tray 1 in the main unit see the explanation on page 1 21 The stand 1 Tray Unit only has the upper tray If the size of paper being loaded is different from the previous size or is an extra size or if the paper type is different from the previous type you must change the paper tray settings in the custom settings Change the settings as explained in Setting the paper tyoe except the Bypass Tray on page 1 33 and Setting the paper size when an extra size is loaded on page 1 34 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Loading Paper Specifications stand 1 Tray Unit 3 Tray Unit Name Stand 1 Tray Unit 3 Tray Unit Paper size weight A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 Extra 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 64 to 105 g m2 or 17 to 28 lbs Paper capacity Paper recommended for colour 80 g m2 or 21 Ibs 500 sheets Xer
308. nd enlargement ratios can be selected either automatically or manually as described in this section Automatic selection auto image The reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically based on the original size and the selected paper size 1 Place the original in the DADF tray or on the document glass pages 2 4 to 2 10 NOTE Automatic ratio adjustment can only be used for the following original and paper sizes It cannot be used for other sizes However in the case of non standard original and paper sizes the sizes can be entered to make automatic ratio adjustment possible for those sizes page 2 8 Original sizes A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Paper size A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 A5 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 2 28 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Reduction Enlargement Zoom 2 Touch the appropriate key in the Paper Select display to select the desired paper size NOTE f paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the Bypass Tray 3 On the Copy Ratio display touch the More key 4 Touch the AUTO IMAGE key 5 Touch OK The AUTO IMAGE key will be highlighted and the best reduction or enlargement ratio for the original size and the selected paper size will be selected and displayed in the copy ratio d
309. nd inch systems These are shown in the tables below sizes in the AB system Sizes in the inch system 11 x 17 LEDGER 8 1 2 x 14 LEGAL 8 1 2 x 13 FOOLSCAP 8 1 2 x 11 LETTER 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 EXECUTIVE 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 INVOICE The meaning of R in original and paper size indications some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the portrait or landscape orien tations To differentiate between landscape and portrait the landscape orientation size indication will contain an R These are indicated as A4R B5R 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R etc Sizes that can be placed only in the landscape orientation A3 B4 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 do not contain the R in their size indication Size indication with R Landscape orientation Size indication without R Portait orientation Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Main Features Main Features Full colour copies with vivid colours based on digital technology Photos colour text and other originals are scanned by full colour CCD sensors and the acquired image information is output in vivid full colour at a resolution of 600 dpi using digital image processing technology The machine can also be used as a full colour network printer and a network scanner function can further be added as an option A range of optional units to enhance productivity A range of optional equipment is available to enhance pr
310. ndency Status Court Record Previous military service Physical or mental condition Exception United States military discharge certificates may be photographed Badges Identification Cards Passes or Insignia carried by military personnel or by members of the various Federal Departments such as FBI Treasury etc unless photograph is ordered by the head or such department or bureau Reproducing the following is also prohibited in certain states Automobile Licenses Drivers Licenses Automobile Certificates of Title The above list is not all inclusive and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt consult your attorney Canada Parliament by statute has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions 1 2 3 Current bank notes or current paper money Obligations or securities of a government or bank Exchequer bill paper or revenue paper The public seal of Canada or of a province or the seal of a public body or authority in Canada or of a court of law Proclamations orders regulations or appointments or notices thereof with intent to falsely cause same to purport to have been printed by the Queen s Printer for Canada or the equivalent printer for a province Marks brands seals wrappers or designs used by or on behalf of the Government of Canad
311. ndicator IMAGE SEND key LINE indicator DATA indicator COPY key 3 o OOO HOW The machine status messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel Selections made with the keys are confirmed by a beep that is sounded when a key is touched and highlighting of the selection key If a key that cannot be selected is touched double beep will sound Keys that are greyed out cannot be selected When using the touch panel first change the display to the mode that you wish to use printer mode copy mode network scanner mode or fax mode For details see page 1 16 Use to change modes and the corresponding display on the touch panel Press to enter the printer mode Print data can be received when this indicator is lit Lights up or blinks when print data is being received Also lights up or blinks when the machine is printing Press this key to switch the display between network scanner mode and fax mode See the sections for network scanner and fax Press to select the copy mode If this key is pressed and held while the main screen of the copy mode is displayed the total output count will be displayed Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide JOB STATUS key CUSTOM SETTINGS key Numeric keys key ACC C key P key C key BLACK COPY START 0 key CLEAR ALL key i COLOUR COPY START 0008 key Xerox WorkCentre C226 User
312. ne is busy or a transmission error occurs the data returns to print standby status in your machine 5 48 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Transmission Between Machines Supporting F codes Transmission Using F Codes This section explains F code transmission which gives you a convenient means of performing advanced operations such as relay broadcast transmission and confi dential transmission Normally these functions require that the other fax machine be a similar Xerox machine however F code transmission enables these functions to be performed with any other machine that supports F code transmission Please read those sections which are of interest to you Transmission Between Machines Supporting F codes This machine supports the F code standard as established by the ITU T Operations such as relay broadcast transmission and confidential transmission previ ously could only be performed with another Xerox fax machine however F Code communication makes it possible to perform these operations with fax machines of other manufacturers that support F Code communication Before using the functions explained in this section make sure that the other fax machine supports F Code communication and has the same functions as your machine the other machine may use a different name for the function The ITU T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications stan dards It is a department of the International Telecommun
313. neral Information 1 78 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 Copier Operation Before Making Copies This chapter provides basic information necessary for using the copier functions of the machine Please read this chapter before making copies Part Names and Functions The DADF Exterior Q Q DADF exitarea Finished originals are output here DADF tray Set the originals here for automatic feeding page 2 4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 1 Copier Operation Original guides Document feeding area cover DADF right side cover Reversing tray Document glass Adjust to the size of the originals page 2 4 Open to remove misfed originals in this area page 2 79 Open to remove misfed originals page 2 79 Pull out to remove misfed originals All originals which cannot be copied from the DADF tray must be copied here Touch Panel main screen of copy mode The main screen of copy mode shows messages and keys necessary for copying and settings that can be selected Touch a key to make a selection The main screen of the copy mode will be displayed when the COPY key is pressed Except when the custom set tings screen is displayed 4 JL2 3 le 5 suis Ow 7 8 mom x The screen at left shows the OE OO 09 Q Message display INTERRUPT key display area machine with the Duplex
314. nformation Is paper other than Xerox recommended_ Use Xerox recommended paper paper being used Paper curled or damp Is the paper curled and does it frequently misfeed in the Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit or Saddle Stitch Finisher Do not use curled or crimped paper If you do not use paper for a long time store paper in the wrapper in a dry loca tion Paper may be curled when output depending on the paper type and quality In some cases turning the paper over in the tray will reduce misfeeding due to Paper misfeeds Curling frequently Multiple sheets of paper fed simulta neously Remove the paper from the paper tray or the Bypass Tray fan the paper as shown in the illustration and then load it again Is paper other than Xerox recommended Use Xerox recommended paper paper being used Is paper size or weight out of the allow Use paper in the allowable range able range Moving the pressure adjusting levers of the fusing unit from the normal position to a weaker pressure position may help alle viate this problem page 1 27 Do wrinkles appear when printing enve Printed paper is lopes wrinkled or the image rubs off easily Return the pressure adjusting levers of the fusing unit to the normal position page 1 28 Is the pressure adjustment lever of the fusing unit out of position Be sure to store paper in the wrapper in a dry location and do not store paper in a location t
315. ng used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 In either case press the COLOUR COPY START key to begin copying To cancel the SINGLE COLOUR function select the SINGLE COLOUR function again and touch the CANCEL key step 2 Mirror image This function is used to print a mirror image of the original The images will be inverted in the right to left direction on the copies Original Copy 4 R aban 1 Touch the MIRROR IMAGE key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen The MIRROR IMAGE key will be highlighted to indicate that the function is turned on and the mirror image icon Ete will appear in the upper left of the screen 2 Touch the OK key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 3 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow Ilf a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 To cancel the MIRROR IMAGE function touch the MIRROR IMAGE again on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen step 2 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 61 Copier Operation Photo Repeat PHOTO REPEAT is used to produce repeated images of a photo on a single sheet of copy paper e Up to 24 repeats can be made on a single copy sheet The number of copies on a single sheet depends on the original size and copy paper size e Reduction or enlargement cannot be selected with this functio
316. ng machine function You can place calls from the phone even during a power failure Connecting an Extension Phone Insert the end of the extension phone cord into the extension phone socket on the rear of the machine Make sure you hear a click sound indicating that the cord is securely connected Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide A Look at the Operation Panel A Look at the Operation Panel 9 4 9 sie 6 D Touch panel Messages and keys appear on the touch panel Key input is accomplished by touching the keys e When a key in the touch panel is touched a beep sounds and the key is high lighted e Keys that cannot be selected in a screen are greyed out If touched a double beep will sound to alert you that the key cannot be selected Mode select Use these keys to change modes See step 1 on page 5 19 keys Numeric keys Use to enter fax numbers sub addresses passcodes and numerical settings see page 5 49 C Clear Use to clear a mistake when entering fax numbers sub addresses passcodes and numerical settings One digit is cleared each time you press the key When an original is being scanned this key can also be used to cancel scanning COLOR COPY Not used when using the machine as a fax machine For information on this key see START page 1 9 IMAGE SEND Press to switch to fax mode The initial screen of fax mode will appear When the network sc
317. ng or deleting touch the EXIT key 3 Touch the key of the item you wish to change to edit the item follow the same steps as for one touch keys on page 5 72 Direct Address Amend Delete No 002 Group Name Xerox Group Initial ef 2 Addresses 5 76 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing Editing and Deleting Auto Dial Keys and Programs e To edit the destinations stored in the group key touch the ADDRESS key The following screen appears Direct Address Group Select Address e The one touch keys stored in the group are highlighted To add another one touch key to the group touch the key to highlight it e To delete a one touch key from the group touch the key so that it is no longer highlighted e To show a list of the destinations stored in the group key touch the ADDRESS REVIEW key 4 When you have finished editing the group key touch the EXIT key in the screen of step 3 If you wish to edit another group key repeat steps 2 through 4 Deleting a group key 5 Touch the DELETE key lf you wish to delete another group key repeat steps 2 5 and 6 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 77 Fax Unit NOTE f you cannot edit or delete a group key If you attempt to edit or delete a group key in the following situations a warning message will appear and editing deletion will not be possible If the group is being used for a transmission currently in progress or a
318. ng the following table see your Xerox WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide The machine does Is the fax power switch Turn on the fax power Fax power switch on not operate turned on switch page 5 2 Is the telephone line properly Check the connections Line connection on connected page 5 1 Is the machine power switch Turn the machine power Page 1 9 turned on switch on Dialing is not possi ble Is the machine in fax mode Press the IMAGE Basic Procedure for SEND key to set the Sending Faxes on machine to fax mode page 5 19 Does the receiving fax machine have paper Check with the operator of the receiving machine The receiving machine does not receive your fax Ep Does the receiving machine support G3 transmission Are the sub address and passcode correct Is the receiving machine ready to receive Was the original size Check the transmittable Checking the Size of a detected correctly sizes Loaded Original on page 5 12 The transmitted Was the original placed so Make sure the originalis Loading a Document image prints out that the correct side is placed so that the cor on page 5 11 blank at the receiv scanned rect side is scanned ing side ar If the receiving machine is Check with the operator using thermal paper was the of the other machine thermal paper loaded with the wrong side out The transmitted Were line conditions
319. nned data will be cut off by the sender s informa tion however when both the sender and the receiver use the same size of paper the printed fax will neither be reduced nor split up and printed on two pages Length of scanned data Length of transmitted data Inside scanned data Faxing a Divided Original Dual Page Scan When an open book is scanned and faxed you can use this function to divide the two open pages of the book into two separate fax pages This function can only be used when the original is scanned using the document glass Your machine Book or sheet original The other machine Printed out as two separate pages Transmission to other machine Example Scanned original size Transmitted document A3 11 x17 the original is divided into two pages when scanned into memory Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Two A4 8 1 2 x11 pages 5 43 Fax Unit Selecting Dual Page Scan Follow the steps below and then send the fax 1 In fax mode touch the SPECIAL MODES key and then touch the DUAL PAGE SCAN key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen A A Dual Page Scan RI You will return to the initial screen 3 Place the original on the document glass and perform the transmission operation If you have more originals to scan after pressing the BLACK COPY START key and scanning the first
320. ns page 4 15 Programming a Group Key Scan to E mail destinations that have been stored in one touch keys can be stored in group keys Up to 300 destinations can be stored in a group key To program a group key from the Web page refer to page 4 14 NOTE Only one touch key destinations can be stored in a group key If you wish to store a destination that is not programmed in a one touch key first program the E mail destination in a one touch key refer to pages 4 42 to 4 46 and then store it in the group key 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key and then touch the DIRECT ADDRESS key refer to steps 1 to 3 on page 4 42 2 Touch the GROUP key 3 Follow steps 5 through 11 of Storing one touch keys pages page 4 43 to 4 44 to enter a GROUP NAME INITIAL and INDEX In step 5 touch the G4ROUP NAME key instead of the NAME key 4 Touch the ADDRESS key 4 48 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Programming a Group Key 5 Touch the index and keys as required and then touch the one touch keys of the destinations that you wish to store in the group Direct Address Group Select Address One touch keys that have been touched are highlighted If you touch the wrong key simply touch it again to cancel the highlighting and remove the destination from the group NOTE One group key cannot be stored in another group key Group keys appear greyed out and cannot be selecte
321. ns Auto Job Control review 3 19 collate 3 16 document style 3 17 Finishing 3 19 Main tab 3 16 Notify Job End 3 24 Retention 3 23 selecting 3 15 3 39 User Settings 3 18 PRIORITY key 1 78 priority transmission 5 26 programmed information printing 4 55 programming F Code Confidential Transmission Memory Box 5 85 F code polling memory box 5 84 Index F Code Relay Broadcast Memory Box 5 86 frequently used operations 5 44 group index 5 80 group keys 4 48 programs deleting 5 80 editing 5 80 storing 5 78 prohibit notice page printing 3 55 prohibit test page printing 3 55 Proof Print 3 23 PS Kit 1 13 PS Pass through 3 31 Public Box deleting document data from 5 41 printing document data in 5 40 Punch 3 22 PUNCH key 1 60 Pure Black Text selection 3 36 Q Quick On line 5 24 R READ END key 5 27 receive mode 1 38 receiving party is busy 5 25 reception automatic 5 28 manual 5 63 recipient 5 86 Red Strength 3 39 redialing 5 17 reduction enlargement 2 28 reduction enlargement automatic selection 2 28 relay machine 5 59 5 60 replacing staple cartridge 1 67 reset the NIC 3 58 RESOLUTION key 4 20 5 8 resolution settings copying 2 26 fax 5 14 5 15 printing 3 30 scanning 4 37 restore configuration 3 60 restricting polling access 5 42 l 8 Retention 3 23 Hold After Print 3 23 Hold Before Print 3 23 Normal Print 3 23 PIN 3 24 Proof Print 3 23 returned e mail 4 59 reversing single pass feeder 5 11 reve
322. nt at ULTRA FINE SUPER FINE or FINE resolution a lower resolution will be used if the receiving machine does not have that resolution Resolution settings Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Touch this key if your original consists of normal sized characters like those in this manual Touch this key if your original has small characters or diagrams The original will be scanned at twice the resolution of the STANDARD setting Touch this key if your original has intricate pictures or diagrams A higher quality image will be produced than with the FINE setting Touch this key if your original has intricate pictures or diagrams This setting gives the best image quality However transmission will take longer than with the other settings Touch this key if your original is a photograph or has gradations of colour Such as a colour original This setting will produce a clearer image than FINE SUPER FINE or ULTRA FINE used alone Half tone cannot be selected if STANDARD has been selected Fax Unit Selecting the Exposure The initial exposure setting is AUTO To change the setting follow these steps Change the exposure 1 Touch the EXPOSURE key Exposure E the exposure touch the exposure touch AUTO You will return to the initial screen NOTE When using the document glass to scan pages the exposure setting can be changed each time you change pages When using the DADF the ex
323. nt window in Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 or the Print button in Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting the Printer Drivers Automatic switching between colour and black and white The procedure for printing a document using automatic switching between colour and black and white is explained here using WordPad as an example If you do not have any documents created in WordPad create a document that can be used for test print ing You can have the print driver identify the colours in each page and automatically switch to Color mode when colours other than black and white are used in a page or Gray Scale when only black and white are used To turn on automatic switching select Automatic for the Color Mode setting 1 This is a standard accessory program in Windows 1 Open a document created in WordPad 2 Select Print from the File menu of WordPad The Print window appears Document WordPad File Edit View Inger Fe Hew Ctrl Open Ctrl 0 Save Ctrl 5 Save As Print Ctrl P Print Preview Page Setup Recent File Send Exit Print window in Windows Me Print Printer Status Default printer Ready Type Xerox WorkCentre C226 Name Xerox C226 ns Properties Where LPT1 Comment Print to file m Print range Copies All Number of copies hb C Pages komf to HE Bien no AEE Colete
324. nu p To Copy e A Preset reduction copy ratios are 70 81 and 86 for the AB system e 77 and 64 for the inch system B Preset enlargement copy ratios are 115 122 and 141 for the AB system 121 and 129 for the inch system 2 30 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Reduction Enlargement Zoom 100 f Auto Image e A Preset reduction copy ratios are 50 and 25 e B Preset enlargement copy ratios are 200 and 400 When the DADF is used the ratio can only be set within the range 50 to 200 The custom ratios set by the key operator appear in ratio menu 2 4 Use the reduction enlargement and ZOOM keys on the touch panel to set the desired copy ratio Zoom ratios Any ratio from 50 to 200 can be set in 1 increments Touch the key to increase the ratio or the key to decrease the ratio If you continue to touch either key for 3 seconds the ratio begins to change quickly NOTES gt Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the approximate ratio then touch the key to decrease the ratio or the key to increase the ratio e The message IMAGE IS LARGER THAN COPY PAPER may appear indicating that the selected copy ratio is too large for the copy paper size However if you press the START key a copy will be made e To set the horizontal and vertical copy ratios separately use the XY ZOOM feature See page 2 33 Xerox WorkCentre C22
325. o display the image edit menu screen This allows you to select the special functions shown below for image editing page 2 59 A copy can be made with black and white reversed page 2 50 This function can only be used for black and white copying Common operation procedure for using the special functions 2 38 1 Touch the Special Modes tab Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Special Modes 2 Touch the key for the desired special mode Example ENa To set the margin shift function r Centrin amp i If you touch the menu keys for colour adjustment or image editing you will go to the menu screen for selection of the corresponding functions Setting procedures for modes requiring setting screens start on page 2 39 The dual page copy centring transparency film with insert sheets B W reverse mirror image and A3 11 x 17 full bleed functions do not require setting screens Margin shift The margin shift function will automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 10 mm 1 2 in its initial setting One sided copying rae l Image shifted Image shifted The shift direction can be selected from right or Original to the right to the left left shift as shown in the illustration gt lt Margin Two sided copying Original Image shifted Image shifted to the right to the left E gt lt Margin Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 39 Copier Operation 2
326. o sided scanning icon display 4 20 TYPE NOTE column 5 96 l 10 U UCR Under Colour Removable 3 35 upper tray misfeed 1 55 user maintenance for copying 2 81 User Name 3 25 User Settings 3 18 Save 3 18 W warning message 5 98 Watermark As Outline Only 3 34 On First Page Only 3 34 Transparency Text 3 34 watermark preview 3 33 Watermark tab 3 33 Web page passwords 4 18 Web pages accessing 3 40 printer 3 40 required environment 3 40 X XY Zoom 2 33 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide
327. oadcast transmission The end receiving machines are stored in the machine s F Code relay memory box and when the machine receives a relay request from another F Code machine it will relay the fax to all of the stored end receiving machines The relay machine and the originating machine that requests the relay transmission must both support F codes however the end receiving machines programmed in the F code relay broadcast memory box do not need to support F codes Relay request machine sends document Relay machine your machine 1 Document is sent from machine requesting Sub address relay transmission OOOO 2 Check sub address and passcode es a x Match Does not match 3 Document data is read into relay broadcast memory box reception is permitted 4 Document is automatically transmitted to end receiving machines programmed in the relay broadcast memory box I I I l I l achine A 7 Receiving Receiving machine C The machine that originally sends the document is called the relay request machine and the machine that has a memory box containing the end receiving machines and which relays the received document to those machines is called the relay machine The relay machine also prints the document sent by the relay request machine For example corporate headquarters in Seattle wants to send the same document to branch offices in San Francisco Oa
328. oductivity such as duplex units for producing two sided output additional paper tray units to increase the number of available paper sizes and paper capacity and paper output units that are capable of stapling and saddle stitch binding Advanced image processing features based on digital technology The scanned image data is converted to digital data enabling the following advanced image processing features e Photo Repeat Up to 24 full size copies of a photo image can be made on a single sheet of paper page 2 62 e Multi shot Up to four original pages can be copied onto a single sheet page 2 64 e Pamphlet copy Copies of original pages are arranged in proper order for copying so that the copies can be centre stapled and folded into a pamphlet page 2 71 Pamphlet copy requires the Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit and Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit options If a Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed copies can be stapled in two positions along the centre of copies and folded at the centre Image processing manual exposure adjustment for optimal copying Image processing is optimized for the type of original being copied text photo mixed text and photo or map This along with the ability to manually adjust exposure makes it possible to obtain copies that are faithful to the original Standard offset function makes it easy to distinguish between sets of copies As sets of copies are delivered to the centre tray each set is
329. offset from the previous set for easy separation Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 7 General Information 6 PostScript compatible Installation of an optional PS kit gives PostScript compatibility PostScript 3 As an ENERGY STAR Partner Xerox has determined oneri that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency Energy saving features This product has the following two power reducing modes to help conserve natural resources and reduce environmental pollution Preheat mode Preheat mode automatically reduces the temperature of the fusing unit after the time set in the key operator programs elapses when the machine is on standby This allows the machine to use less power while on standby The machine automatically returns to normal operation when a key is pressed on the operation panel or when an original is placed to make a copy or send a fax Auto power shut off mode Auto power shut off mode automatically shuts off power to the fusing unit after the time set in the key operator programs elapses when the machine is on standby This mini mizes the power used by the machine while on standby When this mode activates the touch panel screen turns off To return the machine to normal operation press the mode select key the indicator of this key will be lit Auto power shut off mode can be configured in the key operator programs The mode is initially set factory default setting to activ
330. on phone Transmission begins Using an Extension Phone to Receive a Fax The machine normally receives faxes automatically after ringing page 5 28 however when an extension phone is connected you can set the reception mode to MANUAL RECEPTION This will allow you to talk to the other party first and then receive a fax This is convenient when you only have one telephone line and receive more voice calls than faxes You must answer all calls on the extension phone and activate fax reception after you verify that a call is a fax transmission NOTE The reception mode is initially set to AUTO RECEPTION If you have not connected an extension phone keep the reception mode set to AUTO RECEPTION Changing the reception mode to MANUAL RECEPTION 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key Receive Mode Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 63 Fax Unit 3 Touch the MANUAL RECEPTION key The MANUAL RECEPTION key is highlighted Auto Reception The reception mode is set to MANUAL RECEPTION NOTE To return the reception mode to AUTO RECEPTION touch the AUTO RECEPTION key in step 3 above Receiving a Fax After Talking Manual Reception When an extension phone is connected to the machine and you have set the reception mode to MANUAL RECEPTION page 5 63 you can talk to a person sending a fax manually and then begin fax reception without breaking the connection When the extension phone is in Fax mode A fax ca
331. onfidential Transmission on page 5 56 e The result of transfer is indicated on an activity report See Viewing the Communication Activity Report on page 5 98 Using the Transfer Function Program the fax number of the transfer destination Use the key operator program to program the number of the transfer destination See the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide Only one fax number can be programmed The transfer function cannot be used unless a number is programmed Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 47 Fax Unit Transferring received data 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key 2 Touch the FAX DATA FORWARD key If there is no data to transfer or a transfer number has not been programmed See the Fax Unit section of the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide a message will appear and transfer will not be possible The machine automatically dials the transfer destination programmed with the key operator program and begins Transfer The Received Data To Another Device transfer If you do not wish to transfer the data touch the NO key NOTES To cancel transfer Press the JOB STATUS key and then cancel the transfer in the same way as a transmission See Cancelling a Fax Transmission on page 5 27 The data that was going to be transferred will return to print standby status in your machine e Ifthe transfer is not possible because the li
332. opriate for the original you loaded i 2 Sided 4 2 Sided Booklet i Tablet 5 Touch the OK key You will return to the initial screen Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 23 Fax Unit 5 24 NOTES NOTE A two sided original icon appears next to the ORIGI NAL key Example The icon that appears when the 2 SIDED BOOKLET key is touched 6 Continue from step 4 of Basic Procedure for Sending Faxes page 5 20 e Booklets and tablets e Two sided originals that are bound at the Booklet Tablet side are booklets and two sided originals that are bound at the top are tablets e Two sided scanning turns off after the document is stored in memory Pressing the CLEAR ALL key will also cancel two sided scanning Quick On line When you use the DADF to send a multi page document and there are no previously stored jobs waiting or in progress and the line is not being used the machine dials the destination after the first page is scanned and begins transmitting scanned pages while the remaining pages are being scanned This transmission method is called Quick On line The messages SCANNING ORIGINAL and SENDING both appear until scanning of the final page is completed If the receiving party is busy the transmission will switch to a memory transmission Refer to the following section Storing transmission jobs memory transmission The machine is initially set facto
333. or one program you must exit the key operator pro grams turn off the main switch wait briefly and then turn on the main switch again before any other programs can be set The program that was set will be effective after the power is turned on NOTE For setting and modification of Network settings be sure to consult with the network administrator IP address setting When using this product in a network that uses the TCP IP protocol use this program to set the IP address IP address IP subnet mask and IP gateway of this product The program is set to ENABLE DHCP by factory default setting which obtains the IP address setting automatically When using this product on a TCP IP network be sure to turn on the Enable TCP IP program below If DHCP is used the IP address assigned to the machine may be changed automatically on occasion If this happens printing will not be possible Enable TCP IP When using this product in a network that uses the TCP IP protocol set this program Also set the IP address using the program IP address setting above Default setting Enable Enable NetWare When using this product in a network that uses the NetWare protocol set this pro gram Default setting Enable Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 57 Printer Operation 3 58 NOTE NOTE Enable EtherTalk When using this product in a network that uses the EtherTalk protocol set this pro gram Default setting Enable Ena
334. orage position Example of dirty print image AA Black lines White lines Original feed direction _ 2 82 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Whenever the machine stops or operation is not possible check the operation panel display for messages In most cases these messages will give sufficient information to return the machine to an operating condition In cases where this information is not enough check the list below for more information This section describes problems concerning copier features For troubleshooting specific problems related to the printer network scanner and fax features see the separate manuals provided for these features For problems related to other peripheral devices see page 1 56 Machine does not operate Are the START keys indicators off Copies are too dark or too light Is the exposure mode set to AUTO An appropriate resolution setting for the original has not been selected Is the original image too dark or too light If the indicators are not on the machine may be warming up Warm up should be completed in 99 seconds or less Select an appropriate resolution setting for the original being copied and adjust the copy exposure see page 2 25 The exposure level for AUTO can be adjusted using the Exposure adjust ment key operator program Contact your key operator Change the resolution setting to AUTO or manually select
335. oration of the default settings print the CUSTOM SETTINGS list page 1 37 and the key operator program list see Key Operator Pro grams in the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide This does not affect Colour adjustments in the PRINTER SETTINGS NOTE After this program is set exit the key operator program turn off the main switch and then turn on the main switch again after at least 3 seconds The program will be effective at this time Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 59 Printer Operation Store current configuration This program is used to store the CONDITION SETTINGS page 3 44 and the key operator program PRINTER SETTINGS of page 3 55 in memory The stored settings will remain in memory even if the main switch is turned off To read the stored settings use the following RESTORE CONFIGURATION program This does not affect Colour adjustments in the PRINTER SETTINGS Restore configuration This program is used to read the configuration that was stored using the STORE CURRENT CONFIGURATION program and restore it as the current configuration The currently set configuration will change to the configuration read from memory 3 60 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Description of Setting Programs Troubleshooting This section provides solutions to problems you may encounter when using the machine Be sure to read this section whenever you encounter a problem The following problems may not be
336. original size 1 Touch the Original tab Original Supply 2 sided Copy poo QB isi sisea esx J12 sided jixat C2 sided 2 Touch the CUSTOM SIZE key A4 t Paper Sel Custom p Size 100 3 Touch the STORE DELETE key 2 10 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing Deleting and Using Original Sizes 4 Touch the original size key that you wish to store or delete To store an original size touch a key that does not show shows the size that you wish to delete or change e Ifyou are storing an original size go to step 5 e To delete or change an original size go to step 7 5 Enter the X width and Y length dimensions of the original with the 4 keys X width is initially selected fale Enter X and then touch the J key to enter Y A width LJ of 64 to 432 mm can be entered in X and a length of 64 EA c to 297 mm can be entered in Y Store Delete 6 Touch the OK key The original size entered in step 5 is stored in the key selected in step 4 To exit touch the OK key 7 When you touch a key that shows an original size in step 4 a message screen appears that contains the keys CANCEL DELETE and STORE e To cancel the procedure touch the CANCEL key e To delete the selected original size touch the DELETE key e To change the original size stored in the key touch the STORE key The screen of step 5 will appear to let
337. oring 4 16 4 52 SENDER LIST key 4 19 4 24 sender s name 5 3 sender s number 5 3 sending auto dialing 5 22 cancelling 5 22 dual page scan 5 44 F code transmission 5 49 image rotation 5 25 manual transmission 5 62 own number sending 5 42 priority transmission 5 26 Quick On line 5 24 storing transmission jobs memory transmis sion 5 24 timer transmission 5 32 two sided original 5 23 setting destination information Scan to E mail 4 10 paper type except Bypass Tray 1 33 Bypass Tray 1 35 print contrast black and white 3 6 colour 3 9 3 12 printer drivers 3 1 3 2 scanning size manually 4 34 5 13 settings colour default document types 3 35 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Index e mail server and DNS server 4 7 exposure default scanning 4 68 paper size 3 26 sharpness 2 51 2 53 SHARPNESS key 2 53 single colour copying 2 59 2 60 size of loaded original 5 12 SMTP setup 4 8 sort copy output 2 17 2 18 SORT key 1 60 special media 1 32 Special Modes tab 2 3 2 37 special papers 2 35 specifications 1 Tray Unit 1 29 3 Tray Unit 1 29 Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit 1 30 paper trays 1 30 stand 1 Tray Unit 1 12 Staple 3 20 staple cartridge replacing 1 67 staple jam removal 1 63 STAPLE SORT key 1 60 staple sort mode 3 20 Stapling position reference 1 72 Stapling positions 3 27 stapling See Saddle Stitch Finisher status message 3 44 STOP DELETE key 1 18 store current configuration 3 60 Store settings 3 59 stored o
338. ork scanner function The number of sheets used by optional equipment such as the DADF and the Duplex Module of the Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit and the number of sheets stapled by the Saddle Stitch Finisher In the case of only Each sheet of paper that is A3 11 x 17 size or larger is counted as two sheets Each sheet of paper used for automatic two sided copying is counted as two sheets A3 11 x 17 paper is counted as four sheets When an optional Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit and a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit are installed Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Custom Settings Display contrast Screen contrast adjustment is used to make the LCD touch panel easier to view under various lighting conditions Touch the LIGHTER key to make the screen lighter or the DARKER key to make the screen darker List print Used to print a list of the settings configured in the fax printer and network scanner function Clock adjust Use this to set the date and time in the machine s built in clock This clock is used by functions that require date and time information The format of the printed date can also be changed Tray settings The paper type paper size enabled modes and automatic tray switching can set for each tray See page 1 33 for details on setting the paper type and paper size Auto matic tray switching to another paper tray is used to automatically switch to another tray with the same size and type of paper i
339. ossible Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 51 Fax Unit Creating a Memory Box for F Code Transmission Operations that use F Code memory boxes include F Code polling memory page 5 52 F Code confidential transmission page 5 56 and F Code relay broadcast trans mission page 5 59 To perform these operations a memory box for each type of transmission must be created Memory boxes are created in the custom settings Up to 50 boxes can be created The information programmed in each memory box varies slightly depending on the type of operation Refer to pages 5 81 to 5 88 for the procedures for creating editing and deleting memory boxes After you have programmed a memory box inform the other party of the box s sub address and passcode NOTE f you attempt to create a box when 50 boxes have already been created a message will appear and you will not be able to create the box First delete an unused box see Editing and Deleting a Memory Box on page 5 88 and then create the new box F Code Polling Memory F code polling memory allows one fax machine to call another fax machine and acti vate reception of a document that has been scanned into the other machine s F code polling memory box Calling another machine and activating reception is called F code polling and scanning a document into a memory box for another machine to retrieve by polling is called F code polling memory This function is approximately the same as
340. ost name No need to enter if a secondary e mail server is not set up Port Number Enter a Port Number for SMTP The default is 25 Timeout Seconds Enter a time out period from 0 60 seconds that the system will wait for as it attempts to connect to the primary server The default is 20 seconds If no con nection is made the system will then look for the secondary server if it has been set up If not the system will stop attempting to connect Reply E mail Address Enter an e mail address to which the machine returns an unsuccessful delivery message when the distribution has failed Only 1 e mail address can be entered The entered e mail address is also used for the sender e mail address Time Zone Select the time zone of the place to use this Network Scanning System A spe cific time zone is set after the selection SMTP Authentication Select this checkbox if an SMTP server that authenticates users during SMTP authentication will be used After selecting the checkbox the User Name and Password text boxes under the checkbox are enabled Enter the information necessary for authentication in these text boxes 4 8 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Basic Settings for Network Scanning Ns NO POP before SMTP Select this checkbox if an SMTP server that authenticates users during the POP before SMTP procedure will be used After selecting the checkbox the POP3 Server Port Number APOP User Name and Password text boxes un
341. ou touched are highlighted Standard Size If you wish to select an inch size touch the AB INCH key and then touch the desired original size key INCH is highlighted and inch size keys are displayed To return to the AB palette touch the AB INCH key once again Standard Size If the original size is a non standard size touch the SIZE INPUT tab and then enter the X width and Y length dimensions of the original with the 4 or y key The X dimension width is initially selected A pN Touch the Y L a length The range of original sizes that can be entered is as fol Size Input lows J key and enter the Y dimension Using the DADF Using the document glass X horizontal 143 to 432 mm 64 to 432 mm direction 5 3 4 to 17 2 1 2 to 17 Y vertical 130 to 297 mm 64 to 297 mm direction 5 1 8 to 11 3 4 2 1 2 to 11 3 4 3 Touch the OK key You will return to the initial screen Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 9 Copier Operation Storing Deleting and Using Original Sizes Up to 9 special original sizes can be stored Stored sizes can be easily called up and are not erased if the power is turned off Storing a frequently used original size saves you the trouble of manually setting the size each time you copy that size of document To cancel an original size storing using or deleting operation press the CLEAR ALL key Storing or deleting an
342. ould change the initial password set at the factory to a new password In addition take care to remember the new password as it must be entered the next time you open the Web page Two types of passwords can be established one for users and one for the administra tor When the Web page is accessed using the user password the Device Setup and Network Setup cannot be configured The password is initially set to Xerox When you first establish the passwords enter Xerox in Administrator Password and then enter the new password for the adminis trator and the password for users maximum of 7 characters per password passwords are case sensitive Click Submit to save the new passwords After setting the new passwords turn off and then turn on the machine power The next time you open the Web page you will be prompted to enter your password When accessing the Web page as a user enter user in User Name When access ing the Web page as an administrator enter admin in User Name Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 43 Printer Operation Log Status Message Use this to set up a schedule for sending specified count information such as the total count and the output counts for the printer and copy functions The e mail addresses of the recipients and the schedule must be entered Alerts Message This is used to send information on error conditions such as when the machine runs out of paper or toner or a misfeed or f
343. ox standard paper 80 g m2 or 21 Ibs 500 sheets Power supply Supplied from the main unit Dimensions 600 mm W x 642 mm D x 403 mm H 23 5 8 W x 25 9 32 D x 15 7 8 H not including the adjuster Approximately 22 5 kg or 49 6 Ibs Approximately 29 5 kg or 65 0 lbs Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice Loading paper in the Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit Upper tray The upper tray contains a Duplex Module that automatically turns print paper over for automatic two sided printing Middle and lower paper trays The middle and lower trays are paper trays Up to 500 sheets of paper recommended for colour or Xerox recommended plain paper can be loaded in these trays The method of loading paper is the same as for Paper Tray 1 in the main unit See the explanation on page 1 21 NOTE fthe size of paper being loaded is different from the previous size or is an extra size or if the paper type is different from the previous type you must change the paper tray settings in the custom settings Change the settings as explained in Setting the paper tyoe except the Bypass Tray on page 1 33 and Setting the paper size when an extra size is loaded on page 1 34 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 29 General Information Specifications Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit Name Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit Paper size weight A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 Extra 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x
344. page 1 67 oo Unit page 1 55 Misfeed in the DADF see page 2 79 inthe Copier Misfeed in the stand 1 Tray Operation section Unit or the 3 Tray Unit page 1 53 Misfeed in the t t Sy Misfeed in the High Capacity Feeder page 1 75 NOTE Received faxes are all temporarily stored in memory If a paper misfeed occurs received faxes cannot be printed When the misfeed is removed the received faxes will print out automatically NOTES Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal e If paper is accidentally torn during removal be sure to remove all pieces e Take care not to damage or leave fingerprints on the transfer belt when removing the misfed paper CAUTION The fusing unit is hot Take care in removing paper Upper fusing unit Fusing unit paper guide Transfer belt 1 46 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Misfeed Removal Misfeed Removal Guidance Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the INFORMATION key on the touch panel after a misfeed has occurred information Misfeed in the paper feed area NOTE Paper misfed from a paper tray may be extending out of the tray into the right side cover area In this case if the tray is drawn out of the machine the paper may become torn and difficult to remove To prevent this from happening always open the right side cover first and remove the misfed paper if it is extending into that area Misfeed in
345. pment Directive This Xerox product has been self certified by Xerox for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the following countries Austria Germany Luxembourg Sweden Belgium Greece Netherlands Switzerland Denmark Iceland Norway United Kingdom France Ireland Portugal Finland Italy Spain Czech Republic Poland Bulgaria Romania In the event of problems you should contact your local Xerox representative in the first instance This product has been tested to and is compliant with TBR21 a technical specification for terminal equipment for use on analogue switched telephone networks in the European Economic Area The product may be configured to be compatible with other country networks Please contact your Xerox representative if it needs to be reconnected to another country s network There are no user adjustable settings in the product NOTE Although this product can use either loop disconnect pulse or DTMF tone signaling it is recommended that it is set to use DTMF signaling DTMF signaling provides reliable and faster call setup Modification connection to external control software or to external control apparatus not authorized by Xerox will invalidate its certification xxii Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Environmental Compliance USA En
346. posure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun 5 16 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Convenient Dialing Methods Exposure settings Select this setting if your original consists mosily of dark characters This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original Select this setting if your original consists mosily of faint characters Convenient Dialing Methods The fax function includes a convenient auto dial feature one touch dialing and group dialing By programming frequently dialed numbers you can call and send docu ments to these locations by means of a simple dialing operation see page 5 22 There are two types of auto dialing one touch dialing and group dialing To program auto dial numbers refer to pages 5 68 and 5 74 One touch dialing Ro No 001 Xerox Corportation gt 0666211221 Simply press a one touch key and Oe then press the BLACK COPY E START key to dial the programmed location A name of up to 36 charac ters can be programmed for the location a maximum of 18 charac ters are displayed When using F code transmission a sub address_ Touch the ADDRESS DIREC and passcode can also be pro TORY key in the initial screen to grammed see page 5 49 display the above screen Group dialing Pwo 005 Kerox Group S Group 025 Multiple one touch dial locations can be programmed into a single one touch key This is convenient for successively send
347. printed originals are scanned Solution The screen that appears when the EXPOSURE key is touched includes a MOIRE REDUC TION checkbox Selecting this checkbox can reduce the occurrence of moir page 4 36 If you are using the document glass also try shifting the position and or angle of the original on the document glass The scanned image is fuzzy or has smudges Cause The document glass or the underside of the document cover is dirty Solution To clean the document glass and the underside of the document cover see page 2 81 The scanned image is clipped Cause The set original scanning size is smaller than the actual original size Solution Set the actual original size page 4 34 If you have intentionally set a smaller size than the actual original size place the original taking into account the guides for the set original size For example when scanning an A4 8 1 2 x 11 original using a B5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 setting align the original using the scale at the left edge to fit the area you wish to scan into the B5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 scanning area The scanned image is upside down or on its side Cause The original was not placed in the correct orientation solution Place the original in the correct orientation Refer to page 2 7 You wish to rotate the scanned image 90 Cause The orientation of the placed document cannot be changed Solution Use the ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES checkbox page 4 34 The
348. pter 5 Fax Unit and Chapter 4 Network Scanner Operation Address control Use this to store fax destinations fax numbers This is also used to store groups memory boxes and user indexes If the network scanner function is available e mail addresses user indexes and scanner senders can also be stored Receive mode Use this to configure fax reception settings auto man ual Fax data forward Faxes received to memory can be forwarded to another destination Keyboard select When using the fax function or network scanner func tion you can switch the arrangement of the letter keys in the display keyboard used for storing and editing destinations in the English character entry screen Key operator program These are programs that are used by the key operator administrator of the machine to configure machine set tings A key appears for these settings in the custom set tings menu screen For information on these settings see Key Operator Programs in the WorkCentre C226 System Administration Guide These settings can be configured if the fax function or network scanner function is available Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Custom Settings Operation procedure common to all custom settings 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key The custom setting menu screen will appear ep _ Je Pp sC BC J BO More information on setting procedures In the following type of screen a setting is turned o
349. r Windows 5 1 or later Macintosh Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later TCP IP UDP IP 10Base T 100Base TX Mail servers supporting SMTP 500 maximum 2 20 maximum Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Scanning margins Scanning margins When scanning an original the area indicated in the following diagram cannot be scanned Approx 3mm 1 8 Approx 3mm 1 8 oa Approx 3mm 1 8 Area that can Scan size Scanning be scanned setting margins Approx 3mm 1 8 Scan size gt setting Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 71 Network Scanner Operation 4 72 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 Fax Unit This section explains the fax functions of the product For safety precautions and gen eral information on using the machine such as loading paper clearing misfeeds han dling peripheral units and other functions see Chapter 1 The explanations in this manual assume that certain peripheral units are installed To Use this Product Correctly as a Fax Device Several points must be kept in mind when using this product as a fax device Please note the following Line connection Use the telephone cable supplied to connect the machine to a tele phone line Insert the end of the Line line cord with the core into the socket LINE socket on the machine as shown Insert the other end into the telephone line socket tet a Core i In some countries an adapter is For United Wall socket
350. r Management Sharing amp Main Paper Advanced Image Quality Overlays Resolution Settings NoOvely Graphics Mode E ee 7 7 7 z faeces Click Help to display the Margin Shift Help screen None yi You can search for information using various methods from the tabs Cancel Apply Help Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 3 Printer Operation Printing in black and white The procedure for printing in black and white is explained below using WordPad as an example If you do not have any documents created in WordPad create a docu ment that can be used for test printing To print in black and white select Gray Scale for the Color Mode setting Gray Scale uses only Bk black toner to produce a black and white image Colour docu ments are also printed in black and white 1 This is a standard accessory program in Windows 1 Open a document created in WordPad 2 Select Print from the File menu of WordPad The Print window appears Document WordPad File Edit View Insert Fe Hew Ctrl Open Ctrl 0 Save Ctrl 5 Save As Print Ctrl P Print Preview Page Setup Recent File Send Exit Print window in Windows Me Print hl Printer Name Xerox C226 gt Properties Status Default printer Ready Type Xerox WorkCentre C226 Where LPT1 Comment Print to file m Print range Copies All Number of copies fi H Pages
351. r of copies and press the START key When using the DADF Copying will start after all originals have been scanned The next step is not needed When using the document glass Replace the original with the next original and press the START key Repeat this operation until all originals have been scanned Then touch the READ END key When the pamphlet copy function is set the two sided copying mode will be automati cally selected To cancel the pamphlet copy function touch the CANCEL key on the pamphlet copy setting screen step 2 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Job Program Memory Job Program Memory Frequently used job programs can be stored in each of ten storage registers This is convenient for quick job recall without losing time manually reprogramming each aspect of a job Job programs can be recalled with ease and the programs are retained even when the power is turned off By programming frequently used copy set tings you can eliminate the bother of selecting the settings each time you use them for a copy job e Selection for functions stored as part of a job program will not be recalled as part of the program if the function has been disabled or changed by a key operator pro gram e To exit the job memory mode press the CLEAR ALL key on the operation panel or touch the EXIT key on the touch panel Storing a job program 1 Press the P key 3 Touch a number key from 1 to 10 on the
352. r on the document glass pages 2 4 to 2 10 2 Touch the More key in the Copy Ratio display on the touch panel Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 33 Copier Operation 5 Use the reduction enlargement and ZOOM lt keys to change the copy ratio in the horizontal X direction A fixed ratio key will not become highlighted when touched When the DADF is used the ratio can only be set within the range 50 to 200 The zoom keys can be used to change the ratio from 50 to 200 in increments of 1 Touch the key to increase the ratio or the key to decrease the ratio If you continue to touch either key for 3 seconds the ratio begins to change quickly XY Zoom Cancel NOTE Touch a reduction key or an enlargement key to set the approximate ratio then touch the key to decrease the ratio or key to increase the ratio 6 Touch the Y key 7 Use the reduction enlargement and ZOOM keys to change the copy ratio in the vertical Y direction as you did for X in step 5 XY Zoom Cancel Either copy ratio can be changed for fine tuning until the next step is performed 2 34 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Special Papers 8 Touch the OK key 9 Inthe Paper Select display select the paper tray with the desired paper size If the AUTO PAPER SELECT mode is on the appropri ate copy paper size will have been automatically selected based on the
353. r the paper types that can be used in each tray see page 1 30 To change the paper type setting for the Bypass Tray see page 1 35 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key The custom setting menu screen will appear 2 Touch the TRAY SETTINGS key The paper tray selection screen will appear Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 33 General Information NOTE 3 Select the paper tray for which the setting is to be made For the tray numbers see the tray specifications on page 1 30 If the desired tray is not on the display use or key Type Size to scroll the display until it appears 4 Select the type of paper that was loaded in the tray The currently selected paper type will be highlighted To change the setting touch the desired type Special paper such as transparency film envelopes and postcards can only be used in the Bypass Tray 5 Touch the OK key to complete the setting Setting the paper size when an extra size is loaded 1 34 When a paper tray is set to extra this informs the machine that an extra size is being used It does not inform the specific size To enter the specific size of the paper loaded follow the steps below For example if 8 1 2 x 11 size paper is loaded in the tray with the size slide set to extra you can use this procedure to set the paper size recognized by the machine to 8 1 2 x 11 size If you loaded an irregular size of paper you can ent
354. re 1 Touch the PAMPHLET COPY key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen The PAMPHLET COPY setting screen will appear The pamphlet copy icon l etc will also appear in the upper left corner of the screen to indicate that the func tion is turned on Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 71 Copier Operation 2 72 2 Designate the type of originals to be copied 1 sided or 2 sided Pamphlet Copy Original Left Right 1 Sided 2 Sided Binding Binding Select the 2 SIDED key when you are using the DADF to scan a two sided original Select the binding position left binding or right binding and touch the OK key inside OK key on the PAMPHLET COPY setting screen Return to the IMAGE EDIT menu screen Left Right Binding Binding Touch the OK key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode Place the original in the DADF tray or on the document glass pages 2 4 to 2 10 Ensure that the desired paper size has been automatically selected based on the Original size To select another size paper touch the More key in the Copy Ratio display then select the desired size and touch the AUTO IMAGE key The appropriate copy ratio will be selected automatically based on the original size and the paper size See step 2 on page 2 29 Make all other desired settings such as exposure or the numbe
355. red in the machine 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key Sending Address _List Fax 4 Touch the key of the list you wish to print Printing begins To cancel printing after it has begun touch the CAN CEL key in the message screen If you attempt to print a list when no data exists a warning message will appear Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 89 Fax Unit Entering Characters To enter or edit characters in setting screens such as auto dial key programming screens follow the steps below Characters that can be entered are alphabetical char acters special characters numbers and symbols Entering alphabetical characters Example Xerox aA 1 Touch the X key Characters cannot be l entered beyond the 4 mark ADDRESS NAME CANCEL To switch between upper case and lower case touch the ABC lt gt abc key When ABC is highlighted upper case letters are entered 2 Touch the ABC lt gt abc key If you make a mistake touch the key to move the cursor back one space and then enter the correct character You can also touch the AB ab lt gt 12 key during entry to enter a number or symbol 5 90 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Entering Characters 4 Touch the SPACE key Address Name E The cursor E moves forward and a space is entered 5 Touch the gt AAA aaa key Address Name OK s 6 Touch the a key Address Name Space gt
356. res for special situations and purposes Please read those sections that are of interest to you Sending the Same Document to Multiple Destinations in a Single Operation Broadcast Transmission NOTES This feature is used to send a document to multiple destinations in a single operation The document to be transmitted is scanned into memory and then successively trans mitted to the selected destinations This feature is convenient for such purposes as distributing a report to company branches in different locations Up to 100 destinations can be selected When transmission to all destinations has been completed the docu ment is automatically cleared from memory e Ifyou frequently use broadcasting to send documents to the same group of destinations it is convenient to store those destinations in a group key Group dialing is an auto dial function that enables multiple destinations to be stored in a single one touch key The procedure for programming group keys is explained on page 5 74 e When using a group key to send a fax the destinations programmed in the group key are counted as broadcasting destinations For example if five destinations are programmed in a group key and the key is touched for a broadcast transmission the broadcast transmission will have five destinations Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 29 Fax Unit m e e e Destination A recipient l ee ee i l J M A e e e e
357. ress Individual No 001 Select one of the upper row of keys USER 1 through USER 6 to determine the location of the one touch key when the GROUP index is displayed instead of the ABC index refer to page 4 22 The lower keys are for selecting whether to include the one touch key in the FREQUENT USE index If you touch the wrong key simply touch the correct key 11 Touch the OK key 12 Touch the ADDRESS key The E mail address entry screen appears Corporation 13 Enter the e mail address of the destination Up to 64 characters can be entered If you make a mistake touch the key to move the cursor back one space and then enter the correct character 4 44 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Storing One Touch Keys Only Addresses for Scan to E mail 14 Touch the OK key You will return to the one touch key programming screen REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED will appear highlighted to the right of No NOTE The ADDRESS line only shows 32 digits regardless of how many digits were actually programmed 15 Check the key name The characters appearing next to the KEY NAME key will be displayed in the key Only the first 18 characters of the name entered in step 5 will be displayed If you need to change the name that will be displayed in the key touch the KEY NAME key gt sa If you do not wish to change the name this step is not a No 001 MERETE E necessary File Format
358. rfaces may cause the prints to become smudged Use only envelopes which are flat and crisply folded Curled or poorly formed envelopes may be poorly printed or may cause misfeeds Print quality is not guaranteed in the area 10 mm or 13 32 from the edges of the enve lope Print quality is not guaranteed on parts of envelopes where there is a large step like change of thickness such as on three layer or four layer envelopes Print quality is not guaranteed on envelopes having peel off flaps for sealing the enve Cannot be used lopes Can be used Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers In some cases damage to the envelopes colour deviations or smudging may occur even if envelopes within the specifications are used This problem may be reduced by shifting the fusing unit pressure adjusting levers from their normal pressure position to the lower pressure position Follow the procedure on page 1 28 NOTE Be sure to return the lever to the normal position when you have finished feeding envelopes If not inadequate toner adherence paper misfeeds or other trouble may occur 1 Unlatch the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit and slide it to the left Unlatch the unit and gently move it away from the machine If the machine is not equipped with a Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit open the side cover similarly Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 27 General Information 2 Lower the two fusing unit pressure adjusting levers marked A a
359. rform the same type of transmission Note however that programs do not allow you to establish a timer setting for transmission e With the exception of polling reception operations cannot be stored in a program Using a Program 1 In fax mode load the document Do not load a document if you are performing a polling operation If you are going to use Dual Page Scan place the docu ment on the document glass 2 Touch the SPECIAL MODES key and then the PROGRAM key If the address directory screen appears touch the CON DITION SETTINGS key to display the condition settings screen 3 Touch the program key you wish to execute Make sure the key is highlighted and then touch the OK key The program key you touched is selected and you return to the screen of step 2 The PROGRAM key is highlighted Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 45 Fax Unit 4 Touch the OK key You will return to the initial screen 5 If needed set the original size and other settings and then press the BLACK COPY START key Transmission takes place according to the program NOTE Select functions that cannot be stored in a program before you press the BLACK COPY START key in step 5 These functions include specifying the original size see Manually Setting the Scanning Size on page 5 13 two sided scanning see Faxing a Two Sided Original on page 5 23 and timer transmission see Setting Up a
360. riginal size deleting 2 10 using 2 12 storing custom directory Scanning 4 17 F code confidential transmission memory box 5 85 F code polling memory box 5 84 F code relay broadcast memory box 5 86 group index 4 54 5 80 group keys 5 74 job program 2 73 one touch keys 5 68 one touch keys Scan to E mail 4 42 programs 5 78 sender information 4 16 4 52 transmission jobs 5 24 storing destinations Index FTP 4 12 Scan to E mail 4 11 storing groups Scan to E mail 4 14 sub address 5 7 5 51 supplies storing 1 45 suppress background 2 51 2 54 symbol set PCL 3 47 3 67 T Tiled Pamphlet 3 17 timeout scanner mode 4 68 timer transmission 5 32 TO key 4 21 toner cartridge 1 11 replacing 1 42 total count 1 37 1 40 touch panel 1 14 1 16 2 2 5 5 transaction report 5 95 transmission cancelling e mail or FTP 4 41 cancelling Scan to E mail 4 27 Scan to E mail 4 25 transmission destinations editing and deleting 4 15 transmission error 4 59 5 25 transmission method scanner 4 23 transmission methods scanner 4 3 transparency film copying onto 2 45 transparency inserts 3 29 TRANSPARENCY INSERTS key 2 37 Transparency Text 3 34 transport area misfeed 1 49 tray settings 1 38 1 41 Tray Status button 3 28 troubleshooting 1 56 two sided copying automatic from DADF 2 19 from document glass 2 24 two sided original booklets and tablets 4 33 faxing 5 23 scanning and transmitting 4 32 two sided printing 3 14 tw
361. ring during use of the product or its options or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options or other failures or for any damage that occurs due to use of the product e The display screens messages and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product improvements and modifications Installation Requirements Improper installation may damage this product Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the machine is moved 1 The machine should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection 2 Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded For the power supply requirements see the name plate on the main unit Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 1 General Information 3 Do not install your machine in areas that are e damp humid or very dusty e exposed to direct sunlight e poorly ventilated e subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes e g near an air conditioner or heater SSE ee a S lt STN SSS E A Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Installation Requirements 4 Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation 30cm 11 13 16 80cm 60cm 31 1 2
362. rm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your Telephone Company or a qualified installer Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Xx Canada This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The REN value may be found on the label located on the rear of the equipment Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Europe Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equi
363. roduct unplug the product from the electrical outlet Always use materials specifically designated for this product the use of other materials may result in poor performance and may create a hazardous situation Do not use aerosol cleaners they may be explosive and flammable under certain circumstances WARNING Electrical Safety Information Use only power cord supplied with this equipment Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet Do not use an extension cord If you do not know whether or not an outlet is grounded consult a qualified electrician This equipment is to be operated from the type of electrical supply indicated on the product data plate label If this machine needs to be moved to a different location contact a Xerox service representative or your authorized local representative or service support organization Improper connection of the equipment grounding conductor can result in electrical shock Do not place this equipment where people might step on or trip on the power cord e Do not place objects on the power cord Xvi Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide e Do not override or disable electrical or mechanical interlocks e Do not obstruct the ventilation openings Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings on this equipment If any of the following conditions occur switch off the power to the machine immediately and discon nect the power cord from the electrical outlet
364. ronmentally responsible products and services Copier printer digital press and fax products must meet energy efficiency and emissions criteria and exhibit compatibility with recycled supplies Currently Environmental Choice has more than 1600 approved products and 140 licensees Xerox has been a leader in offering EcoLogo approved products Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide xxiii Europe Energy Xerox Corporation has designed and tested this product to meet the energy restrictions required to establish Group for Efficient Appliances GEA compliance and have notified the registration authorities Illegal Copies USA Congress by statute has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions 1 Obligations or Securities of the United States Government such as Certificates of Indebtedness National Bank Currency Coupons from Bonds Federal Reserve Bank Notes Silver Certificates Gold Certificates United States Bonds Treasury Notes Federal Reserve Notes Fractional Notes Certificates of Deposit Paper Money Bonds and Obligations of certain agencies of the government such as FHA etc Bonds U S Savings Bonds may be photographed only for publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale of such bonds Internal Revenue Stamps If it is necessary to reproduce a legal document on which there
365. rotation rotation copying If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different the original image will be automatically rotated 90 and copied When an image Is rotated a message will be displayed If a function is selected that is not suitable for rotation such as enlarging the copy to greater than A4 8 1 2 x 11 size or staple sorting with the Saddle Stitch Finisher rotation will not be possible Example Orientation of original Orientation of paper Copy after rotation 5 IA Face down Face down This function operates in both the auto paper select or auto image mode Rotation copying can be disabled with a key operator program Selecting the Original Size When the correct original size is not detected or the original size is not displayed you can manually specify the original size By causing the machine to recognize the original size you can have the automatic ratio selection function page 2 28 automatically set a suitable enlargement or reduc tion ratio for the selected paper size Place the original in the DADF tray or on the document glass and then follow the steps below 1 Touch the Original tab Original 2 Sided Copy gp oex il i Sided jue ses iets Co id i 2 8 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting the Original Size 2 Enter the original size If the original size is a standard size touch the appropriate original size key MANUAL and the original size key y
366. rsing tray 2 2 RGB adjust 2 51 2 52 rotate image printing 3 27 rotation automatic copy image 2 8 S Saddle Stitch Finisher 1 12 1 59 3 14 3 20 misfeed 1 67 pamphlet style 3 14 part names 1 59 staple jam removal 1 63 troubleshooting 1 70 SADDLE STITCH key 1 60 Saturation 3 39 scan complete sound setting 4 67 Scan Kit 1 13 Scan to E mail 4 3 4 62 default sender set 4 67 DNS setup 4 9 editing and deleting programmed sender infor mation 4 17 e mail server and DNS server settings 4 7 e mail subject 4 7 file size limit 4 68 group keys editing and deleting 4 50 programming 4 48 SMTP setup 4 8 sompression mode at broadcasting 4 67 storing one touch keys 4 42 storing sender information 4 16 transmission 4 25 Scan to FTP 4 3 scanner function requirements 4 1 4 4 SCANNER JOB key 1 18 scanner mode timeout 4 68 scanner transmission methods 4 3 scanning basic settings 4 6 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide broadcast transmission 4 25 cancelling 5 39 cancelling transmission e mail or FTP 4 47 condition setting screen 4 18 error code table 4 59 sending an image 4 23 storing a custom directory 4 17 storing destinations 4 11 4 12 storing groups 4 14 transmission method 4 23 using document glass 4 26 using the DADF 4 26 scanning area cleaning 2 82 scanning margins 4 71 scanning size setting manually 4 34 5 13 Screening halftone 3 36 secure print PIN 3 24 sender information editing and deleting 4 17 4 53 St
367. rtical loading Fit To Paper Size This field is used for the Fit to Page function This function automatically enlarges or reduces the printed image to match the paper being used Enlargement or reduction takes place with the image centred on the page To use this function select the Fit to Page checkbox and then select the size of paper to be used NOTE Printing normally takes place using the paper size set in the application regardless of the paper size selected in the printer driver When the paper size is not specified in the application the paper size setting in the printer driver is used Fit To Page When this checkbox is selected the print image corresponding to the paper size selected in Paper Size is automatically reduced or enlarged to fit the paper selected in Fit To Paper Size Default setting Not selected 3 Image Orientation Set the orientation of the document Click the radio button for Portrait or the radio button for Landscape Portrait Select portrait orientation Landscape Select landscape orientation Default setting Portrait Rotate 180 degrees Rotate the image 180 before printing This function rotates the image to enable correct printing on envelopes and other paper with flaps Default setting Not selected Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 27 Printer Operation 3 28 Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color
368. ry setting to perform Quick On line transmission If desired you can turn off this function with the key operator program When a document is transmitted using the following methods the job will be stored in memory Quick On line transmission will not be performed e Sending from the document glass broadcast transmission page 5 30 e Timer transmission page 5 32 e F code transmission page 5 49 Storing transmission jobs memory transmission When a document is sent from the document glass or when the telephone line is in use the document is scanned into memory and then automatically transmitted after previously stored transmission jobs are completed This is called memory transmis sion This means that transmission jobs can be stored in memory by performing a transmission operation while the machine is occupied with another transmission reception operation This is called storing transmission and up to 50 jobs can be stored in memory at once After transmission the scanned document data is cleared from memory Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Sending a Fax NOTES Youcancheck transmission jobs stored in memory in the job status screen Refer to page 1 17 e Ifthe memory becomes full while a document is being scanned a message will appear in the display You can cancel the transmission by touching the CANCEL key or send only the pages already scanned by touching the SEND key The page that was being scanned when
369. s of the destination from the e mail list box Programmed e mail destinations appear in each of the destination lists To select multiple desti nations click each address while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard If you need to cancel an address that has been selected click the address again while holding down the Ctrl key Up to 300 addresses can be programmed Display Name Optional Enter a key name within 18 characters for the destination The key name will appear in the machine s touch panel If you don t enter a key name the initial 18 characters of the Full Group Name will be stored as the key name 4 14 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting Up Destination Information Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations To edit or delete programmed destinations click Destination in the menu frame of the Web page 1 Click Destination in the menu frame of the Web page Image Send Management e Destination o e f ceo a 2s o Desktop Group e Sender e Network Scanning o Setup o Custom Directory 2 Inthe Destinations List click the button of the destination that you want to edit or delete 4 Destinations i EMaill Q EMail2 e Emai EMail4 3 To edit the selected destination click Edit under the Destinations List Name The programming screen of the destination selected in EMail1 step 2 appears Edit the information in the same way as Email2 you in
370. sate oe ee oe toes meee ee 3 47 PCL symbol set setting 0 00 ccc eee eee 3 47 PCLAIONUSCUINGS apareamento a seeded ae oaSee 3 47 Printing from the Operation Panel 3 48 FOODS oar teed oe 6 oat ohms tase are hanes ete eee 3 48 Key Operator Programs 0002 cece e eee eee 3 50 Key operator program list 0 0 ee ee eee eens 3 50 Procedure for using key operator programS 0 00 0 eee 3 52 viii Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Key operator program Menu 2 ee eee ee 3 54 Description of Setting ProgramS 000 cee eee eee 3 55 PAME COUMO S cn ca Od DO eee Ge Enr ben E E 3 55 Belau SCUINGS 22 2 2icoce chen e eee OU Reet hee SE eh eS 3 55 INMeEHACe SCUINGS wv txa0 Sein ete eine deat Bole eee Bee 3 56 NCIWORK SCUINGS 6 eax eye ltoie outs ei aoe das eee a 3 5 COlOuradiUSIMCRIS 225 0 cietedatouas 4 Soho e eed teeadaad yb 3 58 Initialize and or store settings 0 eee 3 59 TTOUDICSNOOUNG 3 20 0tes teed oa ee dere 3 61 Additional information on selecting the paper type for the Bypass Tray when us ing the printer function 2 5 e268 veiw yan ake era da wok wie Beara eae 3 63 Checking the IP address i ioe wed ea tn wile eo wd eee bk we eS 3 64 APPENA G 6 cicsewer eee ree eee ewes eae ss 3 65 NOUCE Page PINUNO 2 6 min Gd i ba eee heey te Baki Ou Bae oder es 3 65 EAEE e EIEE ate weenie 22d he eel eas wa eee eee hema eee 3 66 4 Network Scanner Operation POC WON
371. se 2 41 centre tray 1 9 CENTRE TRAY key 1 60 centring 2 44 CENTRING key 2 37 cleaning the scanning area 2 82 CLEAR ALL key 1 15 5 6 CLEAR key 1 15 5 5 clock adjust 1 37 1 41 collate 3 16 COLOR COPY START key 5 5 color mode 3 37 black and white printing 3 4 document type preview 3 36 color mode setting selecting 3 2 Color tab 3 35 COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS key 2 38 l 2 Colour Adjustments menu 2 51 colour adjustments auto colour calibration 3 58 colour balance 2 52 2 55 COLOUR COPY START key 1 15 colour mode display 3 16 colour printing 3 10 colour rendering 3 35 colour settings default document types 3 35 communication activity report 5 98 Compress Options Bitmap Compression 3 32 Job Compression 3 32 compression mode at broadcasting 4 67 condition setting screen 4 18 condition settings restore configuration 3 60 restore factory defaults 3 59 store current configuration 3 60 CONDITION SETTINGS key 3 45 4 22 condition settings screen 5 6 5 7 connecting an extension phone 5 4 copies printing 3 16 copy image rotation automatic 2 8 COPY key 1 14 copy mode output restrictions 2 16 copy output 2 18 copy quantity display 2 3 copy ratio 2 64 automatic selection 2 28 manual selection 2 30 Copy Ratio display 2 3 copy run interrupting 2 77 copying copies 2 27 dual page 2 42 from document glass 2 21 transparency film 2 45 copying procedure 2 13 copying automatic from DADF 2 19 from document glass 2 24 covers
372. se this procedure to store the sender information sender name and e mail address that is displayed when the recipient receives your e mail Information for up to 20 dif ferent senders can be stored Select a sender from the stored senders using the touch panel of the machine when you send an image page 4 23 The selected sender appears in the sender column of the recipient s e mail software program If you prefer to store sender information from the Web page refer to page 4 16 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key and then touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 4 42 2 Touch the E MAIL SENDER key 4 Touch the SENDER NAME key The No that automatically appears is the lowest num ber from 01 to 20 that has not yet been programmed When SENDER NAME is touched the letter entry screen appears Enter up to 20 characters for the name Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Editing and Deleting Sender Information 5 Touch the RE ADDRESS key The display changes to the address entry screen when Sender Name you touch the RE ADDRESS key Up to 64 characters can be entered for the sender s e mail address When RE Address finished touch the OK key to return to the original screen 6 If you have finished storing senders touch the EXIT key If you wish to store another sender touch the NEXT key Editing and Deleting Sender Information Use this procedure when you need
373. se this setting for images containing combinations of text photos graphs etc Custom GF Erint Priority NOTE Job Control I Auto Job Control review Color Mode Speed E P All Text to Black Color Adjustment the best image quality page 3 35 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide For detailed explanations of the following settings see Setting the Printer Driver Select the Original Type setting that most closely matches your document to obtain Printer Operation 5 If you need to adjust the colour image quality perform the following step If you do not need to adjust the image quality go directly to step 6 To adjust the colour image quality click the Color Adjustment button The following screen will appear Use the Color Balance field to adjust the saturation of colour images and strengthen or weaken the RGB red green and blue colour components Use the Image field to adjust the brightness and contrast of colour images page 3 38 When finished go to step 6 m Dk Da Enui T B 8 j Deirph m mn tenh i FUJ seet A i Fi ipl d r a Pr Eb a tlugh mi a i a i i i Denias serr PTD SSS 6 Click the Paper tab Make sure that the paper size is correct Next configure the Paper Selection settings Auto Select is normally used for both Paper Source and Paper Type When you have completed the settin
374. ssion Job is given priority in the fax job status screen see Priority Transmission of a Stored Job on page 5 26 the time setting will be cancelled and the job performed as soon as the current job is completed Transmission and Reception Using the Polling Function This function can only be used if the other machine is a Super G3 or G3 machine and supports the polling function The polling function allows your machine to call a fax machine that has document data set and initiate reception of the document You can also perform the reverse operation scan a document into the memory of your machine so that another machine can call your machine and initiate reception of the document This function whereby your machine calls the sending machine and asks the sending machine to begin transmission of a loaded document is called the polling function scanning a document into memory and automatically sending it when the receiving machine calls and polls your machine is called polling memory NOTE For information on polling and polling memory using F codes refer to F Code Polling Memory on page 5 52 This section only explains normal polling and normal polling memory 5 34 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Transmission and Reception Using the Polling Function Polling This function allows your machine to call a sending machine and initiate reception of a document loaded in that machine A timer setting can also be established to have th
375. stored transmission cancel the transmission or wait until it is completed and then change or delete the group If the group is included in a group of end receiving machines for the F code relay broadcast function or a program delete the group from the end receiving machines or the program and then change or delete it e The one touch key you wish to change or delete is currently being used for transmission or is used in a currently stored transmission job including a timer transmission See Cancelling a Fax Transmission on page 5 27 e The group key is included in the end receiving machines for an F code relay broadcast operation See Editing and Deleting a Memory Box on page 5 88 e The group key is included in a program See Editing and Deleting Programs on page 5 80 Storing a Program You can store a destination fax number polling dual page scan and resolution and exposure settings in a program This enables you to call up the program and perform the transmission by means of a simplified operation See Using a Program on page 5 45 To store a program follow steps 1 through 3 beginning on page 5 66 touch the PRO GRAM key in step 4 and then follow these steps NOTE A timer setting page 5 33 cannot be included in a program When storing a program for an F Code operation one touch keys for destinations must include sub addresses 1 Touch the PROGRAM NAME key The No that automatical
376. t Dialing Methods 0 0 0 eens 5 17 Basic OPCrallOns 123 citetewsienade tenet ctu awas wee 5 19 SEMIN aA Fax caaaeii a wa thy sh ae Soh 6 ae teed ane Ss cir oh Sega d 5 19 Basic Procedure for Sending Faxes 0 00 cee eee eee 5 19 Transmission by Auto Dialing One Touch Dialing and Group Dialing 0000 ee 5 22 Faxing a Two Sided Original 0 0 0 ccc ee eee 5 23 Priority Transmission of a Stored JOD 0 0 es 5 26 Cancelling a Fax TranSMiSSION 0 eens 5 27 Cancelling On Hook Dialing 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee 5 27 FICCCIVING F aXe Siga tea ha ean ears od be Be ee oo Ae ee ae 5 28 Advanced Transmission Methods 000008 5 29 sending the Same Document to Multiple Destinations in a Single Operation Broadcast Transmission 0 000 ewes 5 29 Using Broadcast TransmisSSion 0 0 00 cee eee ees 5 30 Automatic Transmission at a Specified Time mMer FANSIMISSION 2 4 a Boe wees hee A tr Oe he eee EN 5 32 Setting Up a Timer Transmission n nananana aaae 5 33 Transmission and Reception Using the Polling Function 5 34 USNO TG PONG MIU CHO samisi darian Gres oe Bika Hae Bite ae dh ae rere 0 36 WSing Poling MEMO 22262044 boadaotoadkhetedeg basiakee taeda 5 38 Own NUMper SENOINO aicsean tea a E a E i E 5 42 Faxing a Divided Original Dual Page Scan 000 aaa 5 43 Programming Frequently Used Operations n nananana aaa 5
377. t if advance notice isn t practical the Telephone Company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The Telephone Company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the Telephone Company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this Xerox equipment for repair or warranty information please contact the Xerox Welcome Center telephone number 800 821 2797 If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved Repairs to the machine should be made only by a Xerox representative or an authorized Xerox service agency This applies at any time during or after the service warranty period If unauthorized repair is performed the remainder of the warranty period is null and void This equipment must not be used on party lines Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your office has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this Xerox equipment does not disable your ala
378. t size and the original size The order of selection can begin from the enlargement size or the original size When the enlargement size and original size are set the multi page enlargement icon W will appear in the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on The combinations of original size and enlargement size for which multi page enlargement is possible are as follows Enlargement size Original size 4 A3 A4 A5 4 A3 A4 A5 AO 4 A3 A4 AO x 2 A3 B3 B4 B5 4 B4 B5 walsAs g 22X17 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 22 x 34 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 34 x 44 lt gt 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 44x68 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 w S S You Multi page enlargement is not possible of an A system size original to a B system enlargement size nor of a B system size original to an A system enlargement size Indicates the size that is twice AO size NOTES Ifan original size is selected first a message will indicate the enlargement sizes that can be selected If an enlargement size is selected first a message will indicate the original sizes that can be selected e Ifa combination is selected for which multi page enlargement is not possible invalid selection beeps will be sounded 4 Check the placement orientation and the number of copies Example Enlargement size A2 22 x 17 Original size A4 8 1 2 x 11 Image Edit Multi Page Enlargement Enlarg
379. t the steps that follow See page 2 21 NOTE Be sure to place the original on the document glass The DADF cannot be used for this function To cancel the MULTI PAGE ENLARGEMENT function select the MULTI PAGE ENLARGEMENT function again and touch the CANCEL key step 4 2 70 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Image Edit Menu Pamphlet copy The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in proper order for eventual cen tre stapling and folding into a booklet Two original pages are copied onto each side of copy paper Four pages are therefore copied onto one sheet This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet Example Copying eight originals in the pamphlet copy mode iginal The finished copies eae can be folded Originals two sidgd f Right EN First page e Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page The order of copy ing will be automatically adjusted by the machine e Either left binding opening from right to left or right binding opening from left to right can be selected e Four originals will be copied onto one sheet Blank pages may be automatically added at the end depending on the number of the originals e A Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit and Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit are required for this function e Ifa Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed copies can be stapled in two positions along the centre of copies and folded at the cent
380. talled you will return to the base screen of fax mode or scan fax mode depending on which mode was last selected If the base screen of fax mode appears touch the Reamer lt gt Fax key see 1 on page 4 19 to switch to the base screen of scan fax mode 2 Load the original For detailed information on loading an original refer to page 2 4 NOTE You cannot load documents in both the DADF and on the document glass and send them in a single transmission 3 Check the original size The original size is automatically detected If you loaded a non standard size document or wish to Programmed Change the scanning size touch the ORIGINAL key Bite Format and set the document size Refer to page 4 34 NOTES To scan a two sided original refer to page 4 32 e To rotate the document image 90 before transmission see page 4 34 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 23 Network Scanner Operation 4 If required adjust the resolution setting Refer to page 4 37 Resolution nf mea 4 The initial factory setting is LOWER Original 5 If required adjust the exposure setting Refer to page 4 36 auto The initial factory setting is AUTO Exposure n f Resolution 6 If needed select the file format Refer to page 4 38 The initial factory setting is PROGRAMMED FileaFormat f Orig al 7 Touch the SENDER LIST key ae This step is not necessary for Sca
381. tensity 2 Use the and keys to select the desired background suppression level ae Adjustments Suppress Background Light Areas Of The Original May Be Suppressed As Background If level 1 is selected darker background areas will be erased The level can be adjusted in three steps The default setting is level 3 3 Touch the OK key inside OK key on the SUPPRESS BACKGROUND setting screen Return to the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Colour Adjustments Menu 4 Touch the OK key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 5 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow lf a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 In either case press the COLOUR COPY START key to begin copying To cancel the SUPPRESS BACKGROUND function select the SUPPRESS BACK GROUND function again and touch the CANCEL key step 2 Colour balance This function is used to adjust the colour tone and density of colour copies 1 Touch the COLOUR BALANCE key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen l The COLOUR BALANCE setting screen will appear 2 Use the keys indicated in the illustration below to adjust the colour balance settings Colour Adjustments Colour Balance The Colour Balance setting a
382. the fax option is installed General Information Touch panel Using the touch panel Example 1 ltems on the touch panel are easily selectable by touch ing the key associated with the item with a finger Selec tion of an item will be accompanied with a beep tone to confirm the item was selected Also the key area for the item will be highlighted for visual confirmation Keys which are greyed out on any screen are not select able If a greyed out key is touched a double beep will be sounded The confirmation beeps can be disabled by a key operator program The touch panel screens shown in this manual are printed images and may appear different from the actual screens Selection of function Example 1 ltems which are highlighted at the time a screen appears are already selected and will be registered to function if Left Ri the OK key is touched Binding Example 2 When the machine is used in the copy mode the func tions shown below can only be set or cancelled on the special feature screen by alternate touches of the func tion keys on the panel Dual Page Copy Transparency f Inserts 1 16 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Part Names and Functions Copier feature e Dual page copy e Centring e Transparency inserts e Mirror image e A3 11 x17 Full bleed e B W Reverse Job status screen common to print copy network scan and fax This screen is displayed when the JOB STAT
383. the possibility of personal injury This WARNING alerts users to areas of the product where there are heated surfaces which should not be touched Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide XV Electrical Supply This product shall be operated from the type of electrical supply indicted on the product s data plate label If you are not sure that your electrical supply meets the requirements please consult your local power company for advice WARNING This product must be connected to a protective earth circuit This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin This plug will fit only into an earthed electrical outlet This is a safety feature To avoid risk of electric shock contact your electrician to replace the electrical outlet if you are unable to insert the plug into it Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to an electrical outlet that lacks an earth connection terminal Operator Accessible Areas This equipment has been designed to restrict operator access to safe areas only Operator access to hazardous areas is restricted with covers or guards which would require a tool to remove Never remove these covers or guards Maintenance Any operator product maintenance procedures will be described in the user documentation supplied with the product Do not to carry out any maintenance on this product which is not described in the customer documentation Cleaning Your Product Before cleaning this p
384. the stand 1 Tray Unit NOTE NOTE NOTE Paper misfed from a paper tray may be extending out of the tray into the right side cover area In this case if the tray is drawn out of the machine the paper may become torn and difficult to remove To prevent this from happening always open the right side cover first and remove the misfed paper if it is extending into that area 1 Open the upper and lower side covers Push the lever upward and gently open the cover If paper is loaded in the Bypass Tray temporarily remove the paper and close the Bypass Tray before opening the side cover 2 Remove the misfed paper Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal The misfeed may have occurred inside the machine Check carefully and remove it 3 If misfed paper is not found in step 2 pull out Paper Tray 1 and remove the misfed paper Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal 4 Gently push the paper tray into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Misfeed Removal 5 Gently close the upper and lower side covers After closing confirm that the misfeed message has been cleared and the normal display appears Misfeed in the 3 Tray Unit To remove a misfeed in the upper middle or lower tray follow steps 1 through 5 above of Misfeed in the stand 1 Tray Unit Misfeed i
385. the time is set to 0 seconds the following step is not necessary 14 After the final page is scanned touch the READ END key The machine sounds a beep and the image is transmit ted Open the document glass cover and remove the docu ment Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Destination Inout Methods NOTES Cancelling transmission To cancel transmission while the SCANNING ORIGINAL appears in the display or before the READ END key is touched press the CLEAR ALL key To cancel a job after scanning is finished and transmission has begun press the JOB STATUS key and cancel the job as explained on page 4 41 e Important points when using Scan to E mail Be very careful not to send image data files that are too large Your mail server s system administrator may have placed a limit on the amount of data that can be sent in one e mail transmission If this limit is exceeded the e mail will not be delivered to the recipient Even if there is no limit and your e mail is successfully delivered a large data file may take a long time to be received and place a heavy burden on the recipient s network depending on the recipient s network Internet connection environment If large image data files are repeatedly sent the resulting burden on the network may slow down the speed of other unrelated data transmissions and in some cases may even cause the mail server or network to go down In cases where you need to send multiple
386. the transport area fusing area and exit area 1 49 Misfeed in the stand 1 Tray Unit 0 0 0 0 0 eee 1 52 Misfeed in the 3 Tray Unit 2 0 0 ccs 1 53 Misfeed in the Duplex Bypass Inverter Unit and Duplex Module 2 Tray Unit 1 53 Misfeed in the upper or lower tray 0 0 00 eee eee eee 1 55 TroUDIESSHOOINO cerieisa anaren aeae aana Ea 1 56 Peripheral DeviceS 00 eee es 1 59 Saddle SWEN FNS Ne sated Gg we 4 oe ea Reade ae oo ae hee Se eS tae 1 59 Pan names and TUNGNONS 5 4 3 ove de ett ee Sis ee eh ae A eee 1 59 Using the Saddle Stitch Finisher 2 0 0 0 cc eee eee eee 1 60 staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal 1 61 Staple cartridge replacement 0 0 ee ees 1 61 Staple jam removal 0 0 ee ee ees 1 63 Disposal of hole punch scrap when the punch unit is installed 1 66 Misfeed in the Saddle Stitch Finisher 0 0 0 0c ee eee 1 67 Troubleshooting Saddle Stitch Finisher problems 1 70 Stapling position quick reference guide for duplex output 1 72 Relation between print image and saddle stitch 1 73 PidhGabaciy Feeder t3 42s voc eevee ards bah ees cae ee 1 74 FAIL NING e oes Sea cies rw ciety Scenes oad eee ne ee 1 74 Loading paper in the High Capacity Feeder 0005 1 74 Misfeed in the High Capacity Feeder 0 0 0 0 eee 1 75 2 Copier Operation
387. this dialog box Not selected The Windows login name will be automatically used for the User Selected Name and the job name set in the application will be automatically used for the Job Name The names entered in this dialog box will appear in the machine s operation panel Default setting Not selected Paper settings 3 26 The following screen appears when the Paper tab is selected The settings and but tons in this screen are explained below a Paper Size Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color EN Paper Size m Paper Selection Ee 210 x 297 mm Paper Source shee Custom Paper Type G Auto Select Fit To Paper Size Fit To Page Tray Status Print 4 on fas X Output Center Tray Portrait Different Paper Landscape Rotate 180 degrees Transparency Inserts Select the size of paper to be printed on Click one of the paper sizes that appear in the box Default setting A4 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions Custom A custom paper size can also be set Only one custom paper size can be stored Click this button to open the window for setting the custom paper size When printing with a custom paper size there is limitation on paper orientation To print with a custom paper size set the paper in horizontal orientation Horizontal loading Ve
388. tion Check box for Frequently Used The destination is set as Frequently Used when checked on Hostname or IP Address Enter the IP address of the FTP file server or the host name maximum of 255 Required characters Display Name Optional Enter a key name within 18 characters for the destination The key name will appear in the machine s touch panel If you don t enter a key name the initial 18 characters of the Full Name will be stored as the key name 4 12 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting Up Destination Information E e a File Format for Colour Select the file format and compression mode for transmission of images scanned in colour PDF Middle compression is initially selected The selec tions are as follows PDF High compression PDF Middle compression PDF Low compression JPEG High compression JPEG Middle compression JPEG Low compression File Format for B W Select the file format and compression mode for transmission of images scanned in black and white TIFF G4 is initially selected The selections are as follows PDF uncompressed PDF G3 PDF G4 TIFF uncompressed TIFF G3 TIFF G4 FTP User Name Character field for the FTP user name within 50 characters Optional Password Optional Character field for the FTP password within 50 characters Directory Optional Character field to specify a directory on the FTP server within 200 characters Enable Hyperlink to FTP When you send a scanned file to a
389. to edit sender information or delete a sender 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 of Storing Sender Information 2 Touch the AMEND DELETE key The stored senders appear 3 Touch the one touch key of the sender that you wish to edit or delete The edition deletion screen of the touched sender appears Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 4 53 Network Scanner Operation 4 Edit or delete the sender E Mail Sender ppdl abed com Edit sender information in the same way that you stored it When finished touch the EXIT key to return to the screen of step 3 To delete the sender touch the DELETE key A message appears asking you to confirm your selection Touch the YES key to delete the sender and return to the screen of step 3 Storing a Group Index You can assign any name up to 6 characters long to each of the USER indexes USER 1 to USER 6 To perform this procedure from the Web page refer to page 4 17 1 Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key and then touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 4 42 2 Touch the CUSTOM INDEX key Direct Address Custom Index E Mail S amp Nder 3 Touch an index key USER 1 to USER 6 You can enter a name for the selected index Custom Settings Custom Index Select The Key To Be Custom Named When touched the letter entry screen appears 4 54 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Printing Programmed Information 4
390. tre C226 User Guide 5 93 Fax Unit 3 When you have finished entering characters touch the OK key ADDRESS NAME CANCEL You will exit the character entry screen and return to the programming screen If you touch the CANCEL key you will return to the programming screen without storing the entered characters 5 94 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide When a Transaction Report Is Printed Troubleshooting This section contains information to help you make efficient use of the fax features of the machine including solutions to common problems When a Transaction Report Is Printed The machine has been set to automatically print a Transaction Report when a trans mission is not successful or when the Broadcast transmission function is used The Transaction Report informs you of the result of the operation When the machine prints a Transaction Report be sure to check the contents The initial settings factory settings for printing Transaction Reports are indicated by shading below You can use the key operator program to change the settings See Transaction report print select setting in the Fax Unit section of the WorkCen tre C226 System Administration Guide e Single sending Print out all report Print out error report only No printed report e Broadcasting Print out all report Print out error report only No printed report e Receiving Print out all report Print out error report only No print
391. tries will be stored File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ar Back 7 gt x FE Ca A D Search fe Favorites a Media E Z7 Ki i 24 rel Address http 13 138 24 206 EJ co gt WorkC sa C226 X E ROX System information Destination Management image Send Management E mail FTP Desktop Group e Destination o E mail Click here F TP Destination Control o Desktop Full Name Required Group gig Initial Optional e Sender z o Setup C Frequently Used Custom Directory Hostname or IP Address Required Device Setup Display Name e Information Optional E ETTE File Format for Color PDF Middle compression e Log File Format for B W TIFF G4 Mi o Status Message FTP User Name o Alerts Message Optional Password Optional Network Setup Mere cos Directory Optional e Services M me anbkln Litswaclinls bha TTD marua ba bha a maaila E Full Name Full Name Required Enter the full name of the destination up to 36 characters the full name of the destination Enter the full name of the destination up to 36 characters to 36 characters Initial pia Enter the initial character of the stored destination name This initial is used to place the destination in the ABC index of the machine s address directory screen page 4 21 Custom Directory Drop down list Select one custom directory for this destina
392. ts Example Copying right and left pages of a book e The dual page copy function can be used with reduction copying but cannot be used with enlargement copying The dual page copy function can be done only from the document glass The DADF cannot be used with this function Only A4 8 1 2 x 11 paper can be used Book original Dual page copy 2 42 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Special Modes 1 Touch the DUAL PAGE COPY key on the SPECIAL MODES screen The DUAL PAGE COPY key will be highlighted to indi Bg ga Pes cate that the function is turned on and the dual page Bl copy m copy icon A will appear in the upper left of the SPE A CIAL MODES screen Transparency Inserts 2 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode 3 Place the originals on the document glass This page is copied first Centre line of original When copying book originals When copying a thick book press down lightly on the book to flatten it against the document glass Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 43 Copier Operation 4 Ensure that A4 8 1 2 x 11 size paper is selected arge Paper Supply gt Sided If A4 8 1 2 x 11 size paper is not selected touch the _ Seen appropriate key in the Paper Select display to select A4 8 je Bo 11 size paper About the steps that follow For two sided copying follow steps 2 through 4 beginning on page 2 24
393. u wish to change another one touch key repeat steps 2 through 4 Initial 5 Touch the DELETE key 6 Touch the YES key You will return to the screen of step 2 Delete The Address If you wish to delete another one touch key repeat steps Xerox Group 2 a and 6 If you cannot edit or delete a one touch key If you attempt to edit or delete a one touch key in the following situations a warning message will appear and editing deletion will not be possible e The one touch key you wish to edit or delete is currently being used for transmission or is used in a currently stored transmission job including a timer transmission See Cancelling a Fax Transmission on page 5 27 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 73 Fax Unit 5 74 e The one touch key is included in a group key See Editing and Deleting Group Keys on page 5 76 e The one touch key is included in a group of end receiving machines for an F code relay broadcast operation See Editing and Deleting a Memory Box on page 5 88 e The one touch key is included in a program See Editing and Deleting Programs on page 5 80 e Ifthe key is being used for a transmission currently in progress or a stored transmission cancel the transmission or wait until it is completed and then change or delete the key If the key is included in a group delete the key from the group and then change or delete it J Storing a Group Key
394. uide Programming Editing and Deleting F Code Memory Boxes 1 Touch the RELAY BROADCAST key in step 3 of Programming an F Code Memory Box on page 5 82 and store a box name sub address and passcode 2 Touch the RECIPIENT key The address selection screen appears Box Name Fax Information Sub Address f 123456 987654 Frequent Use f ABCD f EFGHI f JKLMN f OPQRST uvwxyz FERN o gt Group e The selected one touch keys are highlighted and programmed as end receiv ing machines e If you touch an incorrect key touch the key again to remove the highlighting and delete the destination 4 To check the destinations that have been selected as end receiving machines touch the ADDRESS REVIEW key You can delete a destination from the list of end receiv ing machines by touching it When the confirmation mes Sage appears touch the YES key to confirm the deletion Address Review Ve EEG lt gt croup 5 Touch the OK key in the screen of step 3 You will return to the screen of step 2 and the number of stored as end receiving machines will appear 6 To exit touch the EXIT key To program another memory box touch the NEXT key Touching the EXIT key returns you to the screen of step 3 on page 5 82 Touching the NEXT key returns you to the screen for programming a new memory box the screen of step 4 on page 5 82 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 87 Fax Unit E
395. ur layout patterns Example Copying seven originals using the 4 in 1 MULTI SHOT selection in a layout pattern starting from the upper left to lower right One sided copies from one sided originals Copies 21 5 6 S 4 Z One sided copies from two sided originals e When using the multi shot function place the originals select the desired paper size and select the copying mode before selecting the multi shot function on the special modes screen e When using the multi shot function the appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set based on the original size paper size and the number of originals to be copied onto one sheet The minimum possible reduction ratio is 25 Depending on the Original size paper size and the number of originals to be copied onto one sheet the copy ratio required to fit the original images onto one sheet may be smaller than 25 In this case a ratio of 25 will be used and parts of the original images may be cut off Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Image Edit Menu 1 Touch the MULTI SHOT key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen The MULTI SHOT setting screen will appear The multi shot icon 4 etc will also appear in the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on 2 Select the number of originals to be copied onto one sheet of copy paper on the multi shot selection screen Image Edit Border Line LJ The orientation of copy paper and t
396. ur modes are available Automatic Color and Gray Scale see on page 3 37 3 Collate Select this checkbox to collate the copies When the staple function or punch function is turned on a checkmark automatically appears in the checkbox Default setting Selected Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions Document Style Select one sided or two sided printing 1 Sided Print on one side of the paper 2 Sided Book Print on both sides of the paper and bind at the side 2 Sided Tablet Print on both sides of the paper and bind at the top Pamphlet Style Print on both sides of the paper and bind down the middle Default setting 1 Sided 1 The following two formats can be selected for middle binding Tiled Pamphlet Print on paper double the size of the document size selected in the application The page order will be rearranged as required for the middle binding format 2 Up Pamphlet The document size selected in the application will be reduced in the same way as in 2 Up printing and printing will take place using the selected paper size The page order will be rearranged as required for the middle binding format Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color Copies User Settings 1 Factory Defaults V Collate p iF Document Style Finishing fe 1 _ c 1 Sei l Binding Edge Z Sided Book 2 Sid
397. usted the colour adjustments menu icon R will appear at the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on 3 Touch the OK key inside OK key on the COLOUR BALANCE setting screen Return to the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen 4 Touch the OK key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 5 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow lf a DADF is being used see pages 2 13 through 2 19 If the document glass is being used see pages 2 21 through 2 24 In either case press the COLOUR COPY START key to begin copying To cancel the COLOUR BALANCE function select the COLOUR BALANCE function again and touch the CANCEL key step 2 2 56 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Colour Adjustments Menu Brightness This copier allows the level of brightness of images to be adjusted 1 Touch the BRIGHTNESS key on the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen The BRIGHTNESS setting screen will appear 2 Adjust the brightness ae aa Adjustments Brightness J G Use the and keys to adjust the level of the BRIGHTNESS When the key is touched the colour adjustments menu icon 4 will appear at the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on 3 Touch the OK key inside OK key on the BRIGHTNESS setting screen Return to the COLOUR ADJUSTMENTS menu screen
398. ways exercise care when moving or relocating equipment Please contact your local Xerox Service Department or your local support organization to arrange relocation of the product to a location outside of your building Always locate the equipment in an area that has adequate ventilation and the room for servicing See Install guide for minimum dimensions Always use materials and supplies specifically designed for your Xerox equipment Use of unsuitable materials may result in poor performance Always unplug this equipment from the electrical outlet before cleaning Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide xvii Do Not Do These e Never use a plug that lacks an earth connection terminal to connect the product to an electrical outlet e Never attempt any maintenance function that is not specifically described in this documentation This equipment should not be placed in a built in installation unless proper ventilation is provided please contact your Authorized local dealer for further information e Never remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws There are no operator serviceable areas within these covers e Never locate the equipment near a radiator or any other heat source e Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings Never override or cheat any of the electrical or mechanical interlock devices Never operate the equipment if you notice unusual noises or odors Disconnect the power cord from t
399. will appear at the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on If the key for the desired combination doesn t appear touch the or key to scroll and then touch the desired repeat type key A4 8 1 2 x 11 or A3 11 x 17 When making repeat copies of an original size to 57 x 100 mm 2 1 8 x 3 5 8 only A4 8 1 2 x 11 can be selected for the paper size 3 Touch the OK key inside OK key on the PHOTO REPEAT setting screen Return to the IMAGE EDIT menu screen 4 Touch the OK key on the IMAGE EDIT menu screen Return to the SPECIAL MODES screen 5 Touch the OK key on the SPECIAL MODES screen Return to the main screen of copy mode About the steps that follow See pages 2 21 through 2 24 NOTES Be sure to place the original on the document glass The DADF cannot be used for this function Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 63 Copier Operation e Place 70 x 100mm 2 1 2 x 4 65 x 70mm 2 1 2 x 2 1 2 and 57 x 100mm 2 1 8 x 3 5 8 originals as shown below Centring Scale Centring Scale Placing a 70 x 100mm Placing a ase 2 Yo x 2 Vo 2 1 8 X 35 original original To cancel the PHOTO REPEAT function select the PHOTO REPEAT function again and touch the CANCEL key step 2 Multi shot 2 64 The multi shot function is used to copy up to four originals collectively in a specified order per sheet of copy paper in any one of fo
400. will call each of the programmed end receiving machines and relay the fax to those machines If a passcode SID is not programmed in the memory box enter only the sub address when dialing Aside from the method of dialing the relay machine the transmission procedure is the same as for a normal transmission Refer to Entering Dialing a Fax Number with a Sub Address and Passcode on page 5 51 for the procedure for entering a sub address and passcode after the fax number of the other machine Convenient Methods of Use This section explains functions that widen the scope of use of the fax machine Please read those sections that are of interest to you Using an Extension Phone You can connect a telephone to the machine and use it as an extension phone to place and receive calls like any normal phone You can also activate fax reception from the phone remote operation NOTE f you connect a combination telephone answering machine to the machine you will not be able to use the answering machine function Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 61 Fax Unit Sending a Fax after Talking Manual Transmission NOTE NOTE 5 62 lf the other fax machine is set to manual reception you can talk to the other party and then send a fax without breaking the connection This procedure is called manual transmission Automatic redialing see If the receiving party is busy on page 5 25 will not take place if the line is
401. xi Printer Name e i Properties Status Default printer Ready Type Xerox WorkCentre C226 Where LPT1 Comment Print to file m Print range Copies All Number of copies fi C Pages komf twf F Coll 0late Selection no p caren 3 10 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Print window in Windows XP Ss General Select Printer a Add Printer MW v Status Ready 7 Print to file Number of copies i E Location Comment Page Range All Selectio Current F age O Pages 1 65535 Enter either a single page number or a single page range For example 5 12 o le GHG Setting the Printer Drivers 3 In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 click the Properties button In Windows 2000 click the displayed tab In Windows XP Server 2003 click the Preferences button Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color Copies Vv Collate iy Document Style 1 Sided 2Sided Book 2Sided Tablet Pamphlet Style Tiled Pamphlet N Up Printing i Up 7 F Border m User Settings Factory Defaults Save Finishing Binding Edge Left Staple n one v E Bunch I No Offset NOTE Properties on page 3 15 4 Click the Color tab and select Color for the Color Mode setting Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color r Original Type U
402. xt original A on page 2 17 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 77 Copier Operation 3 Make all other desired settings such as exposure paper size and number of copies and then press the COLOUR COPY START 9000 or BLACK COPY START O key When making black and white copying using the document glass in the sort mode replace the original with the next original and press the BLACK COPY START key Repeat this operation until all originals have been scanned Then touch the READ END key 4 When the interrupt copy job is finished touch the CANCEL key to turn off the interrupt copy state ed Copy Copy Output 141 Sided QB collates 122 Sided started 5 Resume the interrupted copy job If a colour copy job was interrupted replace the originals that have not yet been copied and resume copying If a black and white copy job was interrupted replace the originals that have not yet been copied and press the BLACK COPY START key to resume copying 2 78 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Removing an Original Misfeed Machine Maintenance for Copying This section explains procedures for removing misfeeds in a DADF cleaning the machine and troubleshooting Removing an Original Misfeed Removing a misfed original from the DADF If an original misfeed occurs in the DADF follow the steps below to remove the misfed original NOTES gt For misfeed removal in the main unit and other peripheral devices s
403. y box Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide When a Transaction Report Is Printed NO F FUNC F code transmission was attempted however the other machine does not sup port F code communication NO F CODE An F code transmission was refused by the other machine because of an incor rect sub address or other reason M BOX Xxxxxx Data was received to a confidential or relay broadcast memory box or data was HHH sent from a memory polling box The name of the memory box appears in xxxxxx and the type of F code opera tion relay request reception polling memory transmission or confidential recep tion appears in X FAIL xx xxxx The communication handshake signals or image signals were distorted due to line conditions or other reasons and communication was not successful First two digits of communication error number Error code from 00 to 31 appears Last four digits of communication error number Codes for use by service techni cians REJECTED A fax was sent from a party that has been blocked by the anti junk fax function Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 5 97 Fax Unit Viewing the Communication Activity Report Your machine keeps a record of the most recent 50 transactions both transmissions and receptions that were performed The record includes the date of the transaction the other party s name the duration and result You can have the report automatically printed when the number of transactions exceeds 50 or
404. y is touched the letter entry F Code Memory Box Polling Memory screen appears Enter up to 18 characters for the name Sub Address Refer to page 5 90 for the procedure for entering letters POLLING TIMES 5 82 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Programming Editing and Deleting F Code Memory Boxes 5 Touch the SUB ADDRESS key The sub address passcode entry screen appears F Code Memory Box Polling Memory Marketing Group Sub Polling Times F Code Memory Box Polling Memory No 001 Sub Address Pass Code Enter The Sub Address Pass Code Via The 10 Key Pad Then Press Ok amp 214341434 e The characters and cannot be used in a sub address e Ifyou enter an incorrect digit press the C key and re enter the correct digit e If you do not wish to enter a passcode proceed to step 9 7 To seta passcode touch the PASS CODE key A slash appears after the sub address 10 Key Pad Then Press Ok If you enter an incorrect digit press the C key and re enter the correct digit F Code Memory Box Polling Memory No 001 Sub Address Pass Codd Enter The Sub Address Pass Code Via The 10 Key Pad Then Press Ok amp 214341434 351212 e In addition to numbers the characters and can be used in a pass code e If you make a mistake press the C key to clear the mistake and re enter the correct digits Xerox WorkCentre C226 User
405. your legal counsel Product Recycling and Disposal Xerox operates a worldwide equipment takeback and reuse recycle program Contact your Xerox sales representative 1 800 ASK XEROX to determine whether this Xerox product is part of the program For more information about Xerox environmental programs visit www xerox com environment If you are managing the disposal of your Xerox product please note that the product contains lead other materials whose disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations The presence of Lead is fully consistent with global regulations applicable at the time that the product was placed on the market For recycling and disposal information contact your local authorities In the United States you may also refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site www eiae org Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 1 General Information Before Using the Product This section contains basic information that should be read before using the product NOTES Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual If you have any comments or concerns about the manual please contact your nearest Xerox Representative e This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem is discovered please contact your dealer or nearest Xerox Representative e Aside from instances provided for by law Xerox is not responsible for failures occur
406. ys a M PS Pass through No Overlay iv None g pein lt Job Compression Font Medium v Bitmap Compression Very High Quality iv PS Pass through Default setting Selected Margin Shift See the explanation for Margin Shift on page 3 30 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 3 31 Printer Operation Compress Options Select the Job Compression and Bitmap Compression options here Using these options allow for smaller file sizes going across the network thus reducing bandwith drain Job Compression Use this option to compress the entire job Default setting Medium Bitmap Compression Use this option to compress bitmap images without compressing the entire job Bitmap compression is similar to JPEG and or G3 G4 Fax compression Default setting Very High Quality Overlays See the explanation for Overlays on page 3 32 Font See the explantion for Font on page 3 31 3 32 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Selecting Printing Functions Watermark settings The following screen appears when the Watermarks tab is selected The settings and buttons in this screen are explained below Main Paper Advanced Watermarks Color Watermark lt None gt D Size 100 Angle 45 TN CE lee 7 lt al z T Edit Fonts Edit Color D Position x 0 y 0 Iv Transparency
407. ze detection function The factory default setting is AB 1 INCH 1 The setting can be changed using Original size detector setting in the key operator programs Detectable original sizes Group DADF tray for reversing single pass feeding or document glass INCH 1 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 INCH 2 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 AB 1 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 BSR A3 A4 A4R A5 B5 B5R 8 1 2 x 13 When the DADF is used these sizes are only supported for one sided originals 2 6 Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide Setting Originals Standard original setting orientation Place originals in the DADF tray or on the document glass so that the top and bottom of the original is positioned as shown in the illustration If not staples will be incorrectly positioned and some special features may not give the expected result Example 1 DADF tray Document glass Example 2 DADF tray en the original is placed as shown In example 2 and stapling Is to be performea orient the top of the original as shown below DADF tray Document glass Xerox WorkCentre C226 User Guide 2 7 Copier Operation Automatic copy image

Xerox WorkCentre C226 PSG

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents